Home

GarrettCom Magnum MNS-6K User's Manual

1. Command show host display the hosts table entries show igmp IGMP operation status show ip access display all trusted hosts show ipconfig shows the IP parameters set in the switch show lacp displays the status and other relevant LACP information show III display the status of LLL show log display logs and specific types of logs fatal alert crit error warn note info d ebug show port lt Port number gt display port settings show pott mirror display port mirror settings show pott security display port security settings show qos type lt port tag tos gt port lt port list range gt displays the QoS settings show rmon lt stats hist event alarm gt list the specific RMON data as defined by the group type show ts ring show the status of RS Ring show serial displays the serial port settings show session Display the current telnet sessions See also kill session show setup displays the system parameters setup on the system show setup show setup parameters show smtp lt config recipients gt config displays the current SMTP global settings and recipients displays the currently configured recipients of email alerts 292 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Command show snmp Description displays the SNMP configuration information show s ring show the
2. FIGURE 130 Predefined conditions for the relay The S RING open condition generates a sustained relay contact close The relay will stay closed during the period which the S RING is in OPEN condition The relay will revert to closed position when the S RING goes to CLOSED position This information is covered in more details in Chapter 11 on S Ring and Link Loss Learn To customize these capabilities the MNS 6K provides additional software capabilities and commands for configuring the behavior They are Syntax alarm enter the alarm configuration mode Syntax add event lt event id list range all gt enables alarm action in response to the specified event ID 9 The RMON settings are when the RMON thresholds are crossed and hence indicated as RMON rising or falling indicating the threshold has been crossed While there is no specific command to view and change the specific RMON variables the RMON discussion is in Chapter 16 Best way to set RMON values will be via using the web interface or a Management system such as Castle Rock s SNMPc 236 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Syntax period time lt 1 10 gt sets the duration of relay action for the momentary type signal This may be needed to adjust to the behavior of the circuit or relay Default is 3 seconds Time is in seconds Syntax del event lt event id list range all gt disables alarm action in response to the specified event ID
3. FIGURE 52 Removing a MAC address from port security Magnum6K25 port security signal port 11 logandtrap Port security Signal type set to Log and Trap on selected port s FIGURE 53 Setting the logging on a port The figures listed above show the necessary commands to setup port security The recommended steps to setup security are 1 Set the MNS 6K software to allow port security commands Use port security command 2 Enable port security Use enable ps command 3 Enable learning on the required ports Use learn port 11 enable command for port 11 4 Verify learning is enables and MAC addresses ate being learnt on required ports Use show port security port 11 command 5 Save the port security configuration Use save command 6 Disable learning on required ports Use learn port 11 15 disable command 7 Optional step Add any specific MAC addresses if needed to allow designated devices to access the network Use add mac 00 c1 00 7fec 00 port 11 15 command 69 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE 8 Disable access to the network for unauthorized devices Use action port 11 lt diable drop gt depending on whether the port should be disabled or the packed dropped Follow that with a show port security command to verify the setting 9 Optional step Set the notification to notify the management station on security breach attempts Use command sign
4. MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Baud Rate 38400 Data 8 Parity No Parity Stop 1 Flow Control None Magnum6K25 show history show version show setup show serial show history RONM Magnum6K25 1 show version MNS 6K Ver 3 6 Date Oct 20 2006 Time 1 7 22 35 Build ID 1161390154 Magnum6K25 FIGURE 134 History commands Prompt Setting a meaningful host prompt can be useful when a network administrator is managing multiple switches and has multiple telnet or console sessions open at the same time To facilitate this MNS 6K allows administrators to define custom prompts The command to set a prompt is Syntax set prompt lt prompt string gt The length of the prompt is limited to 60 characters There are predefined variables which can be used to set the prompt These are n System Name c System Contact 1 System Location i System IP m System MAC v Version Character r New Line b Space A few examples on how the system prompt can be setup is shown below 246 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Magnum6K25 snmp Magnum6K25 snmp setvar sysname Core System variable s set successfully Magnum6K25 snmp exit Magnum6K25 set prompt n Core set prompt n b i Core 192 168 5 5 set prompt n b i b Core 192 168 5 5 snmp Core 192 168 5 5 snmp setvar sysname Magnum6K25 System variable s set successfully Core 192 168
5. 6 7 a 8 ao I 9 I 10 Magnum 6K25 access FIGURE 36 Creating host entries on MNS 6K Displaying configuration To display the configuration or to view specific modules configured the show config command is used as described below Syntax show config module lt module name gt 50 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Where module name can be Name Areas affected system IP Configuration Boot mode Users settings e g login names passwords event Event Log and Alarm settings port Port settings Broadcast Protection and QoS settings bridge Age time setting stp STP RSTP S Ring and LLL settings ps Port Security settings mirror Port Mirror settings sntp SNTP settings llan VLAN settings gvrp GVRP settings snmp SNMP settings web Web and SSL TLS settings tacacs TACACS settings auth 802 1x Settings igmp IGMP Settings smtp SMTP settings If the module name is not specified the whole configuration is displayed Magnum6K25 show config HARDWARE type Magnum6K25 slotB 8 Port TP Module Atit ttt tutt k Atttt ttut tttt ttt tttittitt ttitt t tttitt ttituttititttt System Manager This area configures System related information FARBER SYSTEM Edit below this line only system_name Main system_contact someone joe com system_location Sunnyvale CA boot_m
6. Syntax authorize lt module gt key lt security key gt activate the RS Ring or S Ring capabilities Don t forget to use the save command to save the Rey Magnum6K25 authorize s ring key abc123456789 S RING Module Successfully Authorized Please Save Configuration Magnum6K25 save Saving current configuration Configuration saved Saving current event logs Event logs saved FIGURE 91 Activating RS Ring on the switch Since RS Ring uses RSTP RSTP has to be activated and enabled Please refer to the Chapter on Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP for more information Some of the commands are repeated here for clarity Using RS Ring with multiple switches it is recommended to do the following 1 On all switches in the ring topology authorize the use of RS Ring software 2 On all the switches in the ring enable RSTP 3 On all the switches in the ring designate the ports which make the ring pair 4 Only the ports on the RS Ring must be enabled with RS Ring capability 5 DO NOT enable S Ring and RS Ring in a given ring at the same time 6 Enable RS Ring on each switch Ports associated with RS Ring should have the following settings e Same Speed 100Mbps connection provides faster recovery than 10 Mbps networks e Same Duplex capabilities The necessary commands are Syntax tstp STP Configuration mode 164 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Syntax tstp lt enable disable gt Start Enable
7. The default is enabled mgrip lt add delete gt ip lt IPaddress gt adds or deletes a management station specified by the IP address which can query SNMP variables from the switch This is done to protect the switch from being polled by unauthorized managers Applicable for SNM v1 only Maximum of five stations allowed mode lt 12 normal gt Set the IGMP mode to be IGMP L2 mode or normal IGMP mode more lt enableldisablelshow gt enable or disable the scrolling of lines one page at a time passwd user lt name gt changing a password for a user period time lt 1 10 gt sets the duration of relay action for the momentary type signal This may be needed to adjust to the behavior of the circuit or relay Default is 3 seconds Time is in seconds ping lt ipaddress gt count lt 1 999 gt timeout lt 1 256 gt use the ping command to test connectivity ping6 lt ipv6 address gt ping an IPv6 station port port lt number list range gt status lt enable disable gt migration lt enable gt edge lt enable disable gt p2p lt on off auto gt set the port type for RSTP port port lt number list range gt status lt enable disable gt Specific ports may not need to participate in STP process These ports typically would be end stations If you are not sure let MNS 6K software make the decisions portaccess port lt num list range
8. QoS is disabled by default on the switch QoS needs to be enabled and configured Syntax qos enter the QoS configuration mode Syntax set qos type lt pott tag tos none gt port lt port list range gt priority lt high low gt tos lt 0 63 list range gt tag lt 0 7 list range gt depending on the type of OOS the corresponding field has to be set For example for OOS type tag the tag levels have to be set and for QOS type ToS the ToS levels have to be set If the priority field is not set it then defaults to low priority ToS has 64 levels and the valid values are 0 63 and a tagged packet has 8 levels and the valid values are 0 7 f Eg Setting type to none will clear the QoS settings 1 189 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Syntax set weight weight lt 0 7 gt sets the port priority weight for All the ports Once the weight is set all the ports will be the same weight across the switch The valid value for weight is 0 7 A weight is a number calculated from the IP precedence setting for a packet This weight is used in an algorithm to determine when the packet will be serviced Syntax show pottweight display the weight settings on a port As mentioned previously the switch is capable of detecting higher priority packets marked with precedence by the IP forwarder and can schedule them faster providing superior response time for this traffic The IP Precedence field has values b
9. 18 SNMP Managing your network using SNMP There ate many software packages which provide a graphical interface and a graphical view of the network and its devices The graphical interface and view would not be possible without SNMP SNMP is thus the building block for network management S imple Network Management Protocol SNMP enables management of the network SNMP concepts SNMP provides the protocol to extract the necessary information from a networked device and display the information The information is defined and stored in a Management Information Base MIB MIB is the database of the network management information SNMP has evolved over the years since 1988 using the RFC process Several RFC s today define the SNMP standards The most common standards for SNMP are SNMP v1 the original version of SNMP SNMP v2 and more recently SNMP v3 SNMP is a poll based mechanism SNMP manager polls the managed device for information and display the information retrieved in text or graphical manner Some definitions related to SNMP are Community string A text string used to authenticate messages between a management station and an SNMP v1 v2c engine Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP A network management protocol that provides a means to monitor and control network devices and to manage configurations statistics collection performance and security Simple Network Management Protocol Version 2c SNMPv2
10. different xmodem file transfer operations get a file from the server ot put the information on the server type lt app config oldconf script hosts log gt optional type field This is useful to specify whether a log file or host file is uploaded or downloaded This can also perform the task of exporting a configuration file or uploading a new image to the switch The details are conceptually explained in the figure below script commands ftp or tftp Server or xmodem connection patameters FIGURE 33 Based on the fip or tftp or xmodem commands the MNS 6K based switch can upload or download different types of files and images Other files such as log files hosts file can also be saved or loaded onto a switch 47 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Prior to Release 3 2 the configuration was saved only as a binary object file With Release 3 2 and beyond the configuration can be saved in the older format binary object or in a newer format as an ASCII readable file The new format is preferred by GarrettCom and GarrettCom recommends all configuration files be saved in the new format GarrettCom recommends saving the configuration in the old format only if there are multiple Magnum 6K family of switches on the network and they all run different versions of MNS 6K GarrettCom recommends to upgrade all switches to the most current release of MNS 6K Config files As shown in the figure abov
11. enter the SNMP V3 configuration mode note enable SNMP V3 by using the set snmp command which follows Syntax set snmp type lt v1 all gt define the version of SNMP to use the option all supports all versions v1 v2 and v3 v1 restricts SNMP to v1 only By default SNMP v1only is enabled Syntax show active snmp shows the version of SNMP currently in use 272 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Syntax community write lt write community gt read lt read community gt trap lt trap community gt set the necessary community strings Syntax authtraps lt enable disable gt enables or disables authentication traps generation Syntax traps lt add delete gt type lt Snmp Rmon Snmp Rmon Enterprise Snmp Enterprise Rmon Enterprise A gt ip lt ipaddress gt add v1 traps as well as define the trap receiver Syntax show snmp displays the SNMP configuration information Syntax mgrip lt add delete gt ip lt IPaddress gt adds or deletes a management station specified by the IP address which can query SNMP variables from the switch This is done to protect the switch from being polled by unauthorized managers Maximum of five stations allowed Syntax setvar sysname syscontact syslocation lt string gt sets the system name contact and location All parameters are optional but a user must supply at least one parameter Syntax quickefg quick setup for snmpv3 configuration It
12. mandatory the recipient ID range from 1 to 5 MNS 6K allows a maximum of 5 recipients email mandatory email address of the recipient traps optional this is the trap filter If value is all all traps of any type will be sent to this recipient If value is none no traps are sent to this recipient Value can also be a combination of S SNMP R RMON and E ENTERPRISE For example trap SR means that SNMP and RMON traps will be sent via email to the recipient If this option is not defined the recipient will have a default value of all events optional this is the event filter Value can be all all event severity types will be sent to recipient none no event will be sent to recipient or a combination of T informational A activity C critical F fatal and D debug With event ACF implies that events of severity types activity critical and fatal will be sent to recipients by email If this option is not defined a value of all is taken ip optional SMTP server IP address This is the SMTP server to connect to for this particular user If this option is not defined the global default SMTP server is used port optional TCP port of the SMTP server If this is not defined the global default TCP port is used Syntax delete id lt 1 5 gt delete the specific id specified The deleted id no longer receives the traps via email The id is
13. port lt tcp port gt encrypt lt enable disable gt key lt string gt mgrlevel lt level gt oprlevel lt level gt adds a list of up to five TACACS servers where lt add delete gt mandatory adds or delete a TACACS server id lt num gt mandatory the order in which the TACACS servers should be polled for authenticaton ip lt ip addr gt mandatory for add the IP address of the TACACS server port lt tcp port gt optional for add TCP port number on which the server is listening encrypt lt enable disable gt optional for add enable or disable packet encryption key lt string gt optional for add mandatory with encrypt when encryption is enabled the secret shared key string must be supplied mgrlevel lt level gt and oprlevel lt level gt optional specifies the manager and operator level as defined on the TACACS server for the respective level of login telnet lt enable disable gt enable or disable telnet sessions telnet lt ipaddress gt port lt port number gt telnet from the switch The IP address can be an IPv4 address or an IPv6 address 295 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES Command timers forward delay lt 4 30 gt hello lt 1 10 gt age lt 6 40 gt Description MNS 6K USER GUIDE change the STP Forward Delay Hello timer and Aging timer values tftp lt get put gt type lt app config oldconf
14. 185 236 237 238 240 242 243 254 255 257 266 270 275 278 279 add id 109 add mac 69 add port 181 182 183 185 270 279 add user 29 advertisement 209 alarm 231 234 236 237 238 254 274 275 alarm disable 239 Alarm Group 230 allow 66 67 68 73 74 75 262 263 allow mac 66 67 75 262 anycast address 60 app 46 47 260 282 297 321 auth 32 80 81 82 83 84 85 263 Authentication 219 Authentication Server 77 authenticator 77 79 80 81 85 86 263 264 Authenticator 77 Authoritative SNMP engine 219 authorize 159 164 165 166 268 279 authserver 80 85 263 authtrap 222 226 232 273 auto 37 55 258 backend 85 263 backpressure 97 98 102 265 bootcfg 37 55 258 bootimg 37 55 258 bootp 36 37 55 258 BPDU 80 150 154 155 157 158 161 163 179 broadcast storms 99 broadcast protect 100 102 266 chlevel 30 34 257 chlevel user 30 clear 67 72 75 262 clear log 72 75 262 CLI 23 24 climode 57 com2sec 223 227 233 274 community 222 232 273 280 community string 218 INDEX config 46 47 260 282 297 configure 57 75 107 108 122 261 262 266 configure access 38 57 261 configure vlan 108 122 266 CoS 188 cost 126 128 131 134 142 146 148 267 268 default user name 25 DEFAULT VLAN 104 107 deftrap 222 226 232 273 del 46 181 182 185 237 239 254
15. Access Server NAS and the TACACS clients or services or daemon It allows for arbitrary length and content authentication exchanges which allows any authentication mechanism to be utilized with TACACS clients The protocol allows the TACACS client to request very fine grained access control by responding to each component of a request The Magnum 6K family of switches implements a TACACS client 1 TACACS servers and daemons use TCP Port 49 for listening to client requests Clients connect to this port number to send authentication and authorization packets 2 There can be mote than one TACACS server on the network MNS 6K supports a maximum of five TACACS servers 87 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE TACACS Flow TACACS works in conjunction with the local user list on the MNS 6K software operating system Please refer to User Management for adding users on the MNS 6K software The process of authentication as well as authorization is shown in the flow chart below Login as Operator Is User Manager User in Local User List Login as Manager Y es Ve Authentication failure Connection failure 3 s Authorized as Authenticated No Operator or Todias Opio Authorization Failure TAC ACS authorization Authorized as Manager Login as Manager FIGURE 60 Flow chart describing the interaction between local users and TACACS authorization The above flow diagram shows the tight integration of TACA
16. Auto learn the MAC addresses 2 Specify individual MAC addresses to allow access to the network 3 Validate or change the settings The commands for doing the above actions are Syntax allow mac lt address list range gt port lt num list range gt Syntax leatn port lt number list gt lt enable disable gt Syntax show port security Syntax action port lt num list range gt lt none disable drop gt Syntax signal port lt num list range gt lt none log trap logandtrap gt Syntax ps lt enable disable gt Syntax remove mac lt all address list range gt port lt num list range gt Syntax signal port lt num list range gt lt none log trap logandtrap gt Where allow mac configures the switch to setup allowed MAC addresses on specific ports learn port configures the switch to learn the MAC addresses associated with specific port or a group of ports show port security shows the information on port security programmed or learnt action port specifies the designated action to take in case of a non authorized access ps port security allows port security to be enable or disabled remove mac removes specific or all MAC addresses from port security lookup signal port lt num list range gt observe list of specified ports and notify if there is a security breach on the list of port specified The signal can be a log entry a trap to the trap receiver specified as par
17. Changing telnet access note in this case the enable command was repeated without any eled do the smithae n a a a a ra a A A 38 RE 22 Reviewing the console parameters note telnet is enabled sosser 39 RE 23 Exaniple of a telnet session nreninenineniniiann i ia a aa 39 RE 24 managing and viewing multiple telnet gegiong 40 xi FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU RE 25 Oueryne theseri l port SIN Os sae aa ternal ledrenmai ant a RE 26 System parameters using the show setup command Most parameters here cannot be AILS ia a it i tip ia St RE 27 System parameters using the show sysconfig command Most parameters here can be angeeeeeeeeeee ii a aa i a a iiit RE 28 Setting the system name system location and system contact infor Matin sss RE 29 Setting the system date time and time Zone RE 30 Setting the system daylight saving mMe sssssssssssssirsirirsirersirssirrrsrrerreririrsresersrrsresess RE 31 Sneup SN TP serie snan uu na a a a aai RE 32 Saving the configuration on a HED Serven RE 33 Based on the fip or tftp or xmodem commands the MNS 6K based switch can upload or download different types of files and images Other files such as log files hosts file can also be saved or loaded Onto A SWITCH aora aiaa a a a a a FIGURE 34 commands to save the configuration using ftp Similar options will be specified using FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIG
18. If the connectivity is OK please contact your system or network administrator to unblock FTP or TFTP packets If that is not possible the alternative then is to locate the Magnum 6K switch and update the MNS 6K software through the serial port as described in this document Next steps 1 Upload the updated MNS 6K software and reboot the switch This is described in step 3 2 Optional step Reload the saved configuration This is described in step 4 313 UPDATING SOFTWARE STEP 3 Step 3 Loading the MNS 6K software Load the new version of the MNS 6K image GarrettCom site and the configuration saved The Magnum 6K switch is now ready to N T this stage the Magnum MNS 6K software has been downloaded from the upload the new MNS 6K software image Before loading the MNS 6K software It will be necessary for the Magnum 6K switch to be reset or re booted after the new MNS 6K software is loaded Since this may cause a network outage software upgrades should be performed when it is tolerable for the outage and the appropriate users are informed of this outage Alternately if the S Ring technology is used the outage will not be noticeable and the switch will be re inserted in the S Ring after the upgrade is performed It is however a good practice to inform the affected people of a possible outage Accessing the switch Continue to use the access method defined in steps 1 and 2 The command used for upgrade is
19. In addition the group defines what notifications a user is allowed to receive 219 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Notification host An SNMP entity to which notifications traps and informs are to be sent Notify view A view name not to exceed 64 characters for each group that defines the list of notifications that can be sent to each user in the group Privacy An encrypted state of the contents of an SNMP packet where they are prevented from being disclosed on a network Encryption is performed with an algorithm called CBC DES DES 56 Read view A view name not to exceed 64 characters for each group that defines the list of object identifiers OIDs that are accessible for reading by users belonging to the group Security level A type of security algorithm performed on each SNMP packet The three levels are noauth auth and priv noauth authenticates a packet by a string match of the user name auth authenticates a packet by using either the HMAC MD5 algorithms priv authenticates a packet by using either the HMAC MD5 algorithms and encrypts the packet using the CBC DES DES 56 algorithm Security model The security strategy used by the SNMP agent Currently MNS 6K supports three security models SNMPv1 SNMPv2c and SNMPv3 Traps The traps supported by MNS 6K are as follows SNMP Traps Warm Start Cold Start Link Up Link Down Authentication Failure RMON Traps Rising Alarm Falling Alarm f
20. Magnum 6K25 tag vlan show vlan type tag id 5 VLAN ID 5 Name engineering Note ports 10 13 got dropped from Status Pending VLAN 5 Also note the management Management Port Excluded from this VLAN function is excluded for this VLAN PORT MODE STATUS 14 UNTAGGED DOWN Magnum 6K25 tag vlan show vlan type tag id 5 port 10 14 VLAN ID 5 Name engineering Status Pending Management Port Excluded from this VLAN 14 UNTAGGED DOWN Magnum 6K25 tag vlan show vlan type tag VLAN ID 1 Name Default VLAN Status Active 120 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE 1 UNTAGGED UP 2 UNTAGGED DOWN 3 UNTAGGED DOWN 4 UNTAGGED DOWN 5 UNTAGGED DOWN 6 UNTAGGED DOWN 7 UNTAGGED DOWN 8 UNTAGGED DOWN 9 UNTAGGED DOWN 10 UNTAGGED DOWN 11 UNTAGGED DOWN 12 UNTAGGED DOWN 13 UNTAGGED DOWN 14 UNTAGGED DOWN 15 UNTAGGED DOWN 16 UNTAGGED DOWN VLAN ID 5 Name engineering Status Pending Management Port Excluded from this VLAN PORT MODE STATUS 14 UNTAGGED DOWN VLAN ID 10 Name marketing Status Pending Management Port Excluded from this VLAN PORT MODE STATUS 15 UNTAGGED DOWN 16 UNTAGGED DOWN Magnum 6K25 tag vlan FIGURE 73 Editing the VLAN information for enabling or disabling management List of commands in this chapter Syntax set vlan type lt port tag none gt defines the VLAN type 121
21. Magnum6K25 FIGURE 54 Steps for setting up port security on a specific port Once port security is setup it is important to manage the log and review the log often If the signals are sent to the trap receiver the traps should also be reviewed for intrusion and other infractions Logs All events occurring on the Magnum 6K family of switches are logged The events can be as shown below Code Description 0 Emergency system is unusable called fatal in show log command Alert action must be taken immediately Critical critical conditions Error error conditions Warning warning conditions ajA S N gt Notice normal but significant condition called note in show log command nN Informational informational messages 7 Debug debug level messages A few point to note about logs e By default the logging is limited to the first six levels e The event log is now automatically saved to flash so rebooting will not loose them NOTE since the event logs are written on the flash once the flash memory is full the logs stop writing It is important to erase the log periodically ot use syslog capability to download the logs to a syslog server e The event log now includes more information because of the additional flexibility built into the log engine For example it now logs the IP address and user name of a remote user login e The log size para
22. Magnum6K25 saveconf mode serial file 6kconfig 10 11 Do you wish to upload the configuration Y or N Use KMODEM to download config file Receives a file from the remote system FIGURE 148 Invoke the Receive File to start the Xmodem transfer program In the figure above the Windows XP based HyperTerminal screen is shown Once the Receive File is invoked as shown in Figure 8 follow the dialog to save the file in the proper directory with the proper name as shown in Figure 9 E Receive File Place received file in the following folder C TFTP GCh Configs Use receiving protocol xmodem FIGURE 149 Make sure to select the Xmodem protocol and the proper directory where the configuration is saved Click on Receive This starts the file transfer Once the file transfer is started the Xmodem status window is shown in Figure 10 311 UPDATING SOFTWARE STEP 2 Xmodem file receive for gci Storing as _ C TFTP GCI Configs 6kconfig 10 11 Packet 656 Error checking CRC Retries Totalretries 0 File 82K Last error Throughput 2035 cps Elapsed 00 00 41 FIGURE 150 Status window for Xmodem using HyperTerminal under Windows XP When the file transfer is completed the window shown in Figure 10 exits and the completion message is displayed as shown in Figure 11 Successfully uploaded the configuration Magnum6K25 FIGURE 151 Messa
23. SNMP Enterprise Magnum6K25 set snmp type all SNMP version support is set to v1 v2c and v3 Magnum6K25 show active snmp 225 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE 6K SNMP Agent supports all v1 v2c v3 versions Magnum6K25 show snmp SNMP v3 Configuration Information System Name Magnum6K25 System Location Fremont CA System Contact support garrettcom com Authentication Trap Disabled Default Trap Comm public V3 Engine ID 6K_v3Engine Magnum6K25 snmpv3 Switch over to SNMPv3 from this point forward Magnum6K25 snmpv3 setvar sysname my_m 6k syscontact admin syslocation lab Magnum6K25 snmpv3 quickcfg This will enable default VACM Max limit of system variables is Do you wish to proceed Y or N Y 15 characters Quick configuration done default VACM enabled Magnum6K25 snmpv3 engineid string Magnum6K Engine ID is set successfully Magnum6K25 snmpv3 authtrap enable Authentication trap status is set successfully Magnum6K25 snmpv3 show authtrap Authentication Trap Status Enabled Magnum6K25 snmpv3 deftrap community mysecret Default trap community is set successfully Magnum6K25 snmpv3 show deftrap Default Trap Community public Magnum6K25 snmpv3 trap add id 1 type v1 host 10 21 1 100 Entry is added successfully 226 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Magnum6K25 snmpv3 show trap ID Trap Type Host IP Communi
24. VLAN Syntax show pott port lt port list range gt shows all parameters related to tag vlan for the list of ports If the port parameter is omitted it will display all ports 122 Chapter 10 Spanning Tree Protocol STP Create and manage alternate paths to the network network using switches can have redundant paths this may however cause loops and to prevent the loops MNS O6K software uses spanning tree protocol As a manager of the MNS 6K software controlling n which span the traffic traverses is necessary It is also necessary to specify the parameters of STP STP is available as the IEEE 802 1d protocol and is a standard of the IEEE S panning Tree Protocol was designed to avoid loops in an Ethernet network An Ethernet STP features and operation The switch uses the IEEE 802 1d Spanning Tree Protocol STP When STP is enabled it ensures that only one path at a time is active between any two nodes on the network In networks where more than one physical path exists between two nodes STP ensures only a single path is active by blocking all redundant paths Enabling STP is necessary to avoid loops and duplicate messages This duplication leads to a broadcast storm or other erratic behavior that can bring down the network As recommended in the IEEE 802 1Q VLAN standard the Magnum 6K family of switches uses single instance STP This means a single spanning tree is created to make sute there are no network loo
25. VLAN a VLAN creates separate collision domains or network Why VLANs VLAN s provide the capability of having two or more Ethernet segments co exist on common hardware The reason for creating multiple segments in Ethernet is to isolate collision domains VLANs can isolate groups of users or divide up traffic for security bandwidth management etc VLANs are widely used today and are here to stay VLANs need not be in one physical location They can be spread across geography or topology VLAN membership information can be propagated across multiple Magnum6K switches Segment 1 Segment 2 FIGURE 67 VLAN as two separate collision domains The top part of the figure shows two traditional Ethernet segments Up to 32 VLANS can be defined per switch 103 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE A group of network users ports assigned to a VLAN form a broadcast domain Packets are forwarded only between ports that are designated for the same VLAN Cross domain broadcast traffic in the switch is eliminated and bandwidth is saved by not allowing packets to flood out on all ports For many reasons a port may be configured to belong to multiple VLANs Segment 1 Seaments seamen FIGURE 68 Ports can belong to multiple VLANs In this figure a simplistic view is presented where some ports belong to VLANs 1 2 and other ports belong to VLANs 2 3 Ports can belong to VLANs 1 2 and 3 This is not shown
26. ability to keep broadcast storms from spreading throughout a network Network storms or broadcast storms ate characterized by an excessive number of broadcast packets being sent over the network These storms can occur if network equipment is configured incorrectly or the network software is not properly functioning or badly designed programs including some network games are used Storms can reduce network performance and cause bridges routers workstations servers and PC s to slow down or even crash 99 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Preventing broadcast storms The Magnum 6K family of switches is capable of detecting and limiting storms on each port A network administrator can also set the maximum rate of broadcast packets frames that are permitted from a particular interface If the maximum number is exceeded a storm condition is declared Once it is determined that a storm is occurring on an interface any additional broadcast packets received on that interface will be dropped until the storm is determined to be over The storm is determined to be over when a one second period elapses with no broadcast packets received Syntax broadcast protect lt enable disable gt enable or disable the broadcast storm protection capabilities Syntax rate threshold port lt port list range gt rate lt frames sec gt set the rate limit in frames per second Syntax show broadcast protect display the broadcast storm protec
27. defines the default community string to be used when sending traps When user does not specify the trap community name when setting a trap station using the trap command the default trap community name is used 280 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES Command del event lt event id list range all gt MNS 6K USER GUIDE Description disables alarm action in response to the specified event ID del port lt number list range gt delete specified ports from the LACP membership Requires the lagp module delete id lt 1 5 gt delete the specific id specified The deleted id no longer receives the traps via email The id is added using the add command delete user lt name gt deleting a user deny ip lt ipaddress gt mask lt netmask gt service lt name list gt deny specific IP address or range of IP addresses device configure device and port specific settings dualhome enter the dual homing configuration sub system dualhome lt enable disable gt enable or disable dual homing dualhome add portl lt port gt port2 lt port gt OR dualhome add primary lt port gt secondary lt port gt dual homing setup similar to that of unmanaged switches such as ESD42 dual homing setup as primary secondary mode dualhome del Delete the dual homing setup edit id lt vlan id gt name lt vlan name gt port lt number list range gt lt mgt nomegt gt
28. enable or disable the SNTP services s ring lt enable disable gt enable or disable S ring capabilities s ring add port lt port1 port2 gt define ports which make up the s ring ports Note as discussed earlier you can create multiple S rings on a switch s ring del port lt port1 port2 gt remove the switch from S ring topology by eliminating the end ports on the switch s ring learn start the learning process to discover the ring and the ports which make up the s ring 294 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Command start vlan lt name number list range gt Description activate the VLAN configuration static vlan lt VID gt convert a dynamic VLAN to a static VLAN statistics def owner lt string gt def comm lt string gt define the RMON statistics group and the community string associated with the group stp STP Configuration mode stp lt enable disable gt Start Enable or stop Disable STP sync hour lt 0 24 gt min lt 0 59 gt setup the frequency at which the SNTP server is queried tacplus lt enable disable gt otder lt tac local local tac gt enable or disable TACACS authentication specifying the order in which the server or local database is looked up where tac local implies first the TACAS server then local logins on the device tacserver lt add delete gt id lt num gt ip lt ip addr gt
29. network that supports IP multicasting A host requests the creation of new groups and joins or leaves existing groups by exchanging messages with a neighboring agent The Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP is an internal protocol of the Internet Protocol IP suite IP manages multicast traffic by using switches multicast routers and hosts that support IGMP A set of hosts routers and or switches that send or receive multicast data streams to or from the same source s is termed a multicast group and all devices in the group use the same multicast group address The multicast group running version 2 of IGMP uses three fundamental types of messages to communicate e Query A message sent from the querier multicast router or switch asking for a response from each host belonging to the multicast group If a multicast router supporting IGMP is not present then the switch must assume this function in order to elicit group membership information from the hosts on the network If you need to disable the querier feature you can do so through the CLI using the IGMP configuration MIB See Changing the Querier Configuration Setting on page Configuring the Querier Function e Report A message sent by a host to the querier to indicate that the host wants to be or is a member of a given group indicated in the report message e Leave Group A message sent by a host to the querier to indicate that the host has ceased to be a member
30. odd even gt stop lt 1 1 5 2 gt flowctrl lt none xonxoff gt sets serial port parameters Syntax snmp enter the snmp configuration mode Syntax setvar sysname syscontact syslocation lt string gt sets the system name contact and location information Syntax set timezone GMT or hour lt 0 14 gt min lt 0 59 gt sets the timezone Syntax set date year lt 2001 2035 gt month lt 1 12 gt day lt 1 31 gt format lt mmddyyyy ddmmyyyy yyyymmdd gt sets the date and the format in which the date is displayed Syntax set time hour lt 0 23 gt min lt 0 59 gt sec lt 0 59 gt zone GMT hh mm sets the time as well as the timezone Syntax set timeformat format lt 12 24 gt sets the display time in the 12 24 hour mode Syntax set daylight country lt country name gt sets the daylight saving time Syntax setsntp server lt ipaddress gt timeout lt 1 10 gt retry lt 1 3 gt setup the SNTP server Syntax syne hour lt 0 24 gt min lt 0 59 gt setup the frequency at which the SNTP server is queried Syntax sntp enable disable enables or disables the SNTP services Syntax saveconf mode lt serial tftp ftp gt lt ipaddress gt file lt name gt saves the configuration on the network using tftp fip or serial protocols Syntax loadconf mode lt serial tftp ftp gt lt ipaddress gt file lt name gt oads the previously saved configuration from th
31. script host s log gt host lt hostname gt ip lt ipaddress gt file lt filename gt where lt get put gt different tftp operations get a file from the server or put the information on the server type lt app config oldconf script ho sts log gt optional type field This is useful to specify whether a log file or host file is uploaded or downloaded This can also perform the task of exporting a configuration file or uploading a new image to the switch host lt hostname gt ip lt ipaddress gt file lt filename gt parameters associated with tftp server for proper communications with the server upload and download information using tftp command traps lt add delete gt type lt Snmp Rmon Snmp Rmon Enterprise Snmp Enterprise Rmon Enterprise All gt ip lt ipaddress gt add SNMP v1 traps as well as define the trap receiver trap lt add delete gt id lt id gt type lt v1 v2 inform gt host lt host ip gt community lt string gt port lt 1 65534 gt define the trap and inform manager stations The station can receive v1 v2 traps and or inform notifications An inform notification is an acknowledgments that a trap has been received A user can add up to 5 stations trigger reauth port lt num list range gt manually initiate a re authentication of supplicant 296 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES Command user lt add delete gt
32. 11 idle_timeout 10 telnet_access enable XXXX 52 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE snmp_access enable web_access enable more lt additional lines deleted for succinct viewing gt FIGURE 39 displaying configuration for different modules Note multiple modules can be specified on the commana line Erasing configuration To erase the configuration and reset the configurations to factory default you can use the command kill config This command is a hidden command i e the on line help and other help functions normally do not display this command The kill config command resets everything to the factory default The reset does not take place till the switch reboots w e It is recommended to save the configuration using saveconf command discussed above before using the kill config command The kill config will also reset the IP address and all other parameters as well unless the save option described below is used Syntax kill config save module name resets the system configuration The module name option does not reset the specific module parameters The modules are listed below The module name can be Name Areas affected system IP Configuration Boot mode Users settings e g login names passwords event Event Log and Alarm settings port Port settings Broadcast Protection and QoS settings
33. 20 06 25 ed 80 P 10 100 Disabled 80 00 00 20 06 25 ed 80 P 10 100 Disabled 80 00 00 20 06 25 ed 80 P 10 100 Disabled 80 00 00 20 06 25 ed 80 P 10 100 100 Disabled 80 00 00 20 06 25 ed 80 P 10 100 100 Disabled 80 00 00 20 06 25 ed 80 P 10 100 100 Disabled 80 00 00 20 06 25 ed 80 128 100 Disabled 80 00 00 20 06 25 ed 80 Magnum6K25 stp stp enable Successfully set the STP status Magnum6K25 stp show stp config STP CONFIGURATION Spanning Tree Enabled Global YES Spanning Tree Enabled Ports YES 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Protocol Normal STP Bridge ID 80 00 00 20 06 25 ed 80 Bridge Priority 32768 Bridge Forward Delay 2 15 Bridge Hello Time 2 Bridge Max Age 20 Root Port 0 Root Path Cost 0 Designated Root 80 00 00 20 06 25 ed 80 Designated Root Priority 32768 Root Bridge Forward Delay 15 Root Bridge Hello Time 2 Root Bridge Max Age 20 RSTP CONFIGURATION Rapid STP STP Enabled Global NO Ports which have devices connected to it now Magnum6K25 stp show stp ports participate in STP STP Port Configuration Port Type Priority Path Cost State Des Bridge Des Port TP 10 100 La 10 100 128 100 Forwarding 80 00 00 20 06 25 ed 80 80 09 TP 128 100 Disabled 80 00 00 20 06 25 ed 80 80 0a 128 100 Disabled 80 00 00 20 06 25 ed 80 80 0b TP 10 100 TP 10 100 128 100 Disabled 80 00 00 20 06 25 ed 80 80 0c 128 19 Forwarding 80 00 00 20 06 25 ed 80 80 0d 130 MAGN
34. 20 06 25 ed 80 TP 10 100 Disabled 80 00 00 20 06 25 ed 80 TP 10 100 Forwarding 80 00 00 20 06 25 ed 80 TP 10 100 Disabled 80 00 00 20 06 25 ed 80 TP 10 100 Disabled 80 00 00 20 06 25 ed 80 TP 10 100 Disabled 80 00 00 20 06 25 ed 80 132 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Magnum6K25 stp show stp config STP CONFIGURATION Spanning Tree Enabled Global Spanning Tree Enabled Ports Protocol Bridge ID Bridge Priority Bridge Forward Delay Bridge Hello Time Bridge Max Age Root Port Root Path Cost Designated Root Designated Root Priority Root Bridge Forward Delay Root Bridge Hello Time Root Bridge Max Age RSTP CONFIGURATION Rapid STP STP Enabled Global YES YES 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Normal STP 80 00 00 20 06 25 ed 80 15535 15 2 20 0 0 80 00 00 20 06 25 ed 80 15535 15 12 20 NO The age parameter is out of range as per IEEE 802 1d specifications Magnum6K25 stp timers forward delay 20 hello 5 age 40 ERROR Invalid Values Max Age lt 2 Forward Delay 1 and Max Age gt 2 Hello Time 1 Magnum6K25 stp timers forward delay 20 hello 5 age 30 Successfully set the bridge time parameters Magnum6K25 stp show stp config STP CONFIGURATION Spanning Tree Enabled Global Spanning Tree Enabled Ports Protocol Bridge ID Bridge Priority Bridge Forward Delay Bridge Hello Time Bridge Max Age Root Port Root Path Cost Desi
35. 260 270 275 281 282 del port 181 182 185 270 281 delete 29 33 241 242 255 257 delete user 29 deny 73 75 263 device 94 95 98 100 101 265 dhcp 37 55 258 DHCP 36 Differentiated Services See Diffserv DiffServ 187 disable mode 65 drop mode 65 DS See Diffserv DSCP 187 dualhome 171 172 173 270 281 Dual Homing 168 EAP 78 EAPOL 78 edit 108 114 122 181 185 266 270 281 edit port 181 185 270 281 322 enable 28 33 257 enable ps 69 engineid 222 226 232 273 Ethernet segments 103 Ethernet Statistics Group See event 231 234 274 exit 42 45 74 95 99 113 147 183 207 239 244 247 exportlog 249 250 256 276 FIFO 186 file transfer protocol See ftp flowcontrol 96 98 101 265 forceversion 142 144 148 268 FTA 137 ftp 46 56 62 63 248 260 261 282 FTP modes 248 GARP 209 get 46 47 260 282 297 group 223 233 274 group add 228 gvrp 215 272 GVRP 209 211 GVRP BPDUs 209 help 31 34 257 history 231 233 274 History Group 230 host 50 57 hosts 46 47 260 282 297 IEEE 78 80 95 103 123 127 135 136 138 141 148 150 151 160 161 165 166 167 174 186 188 209 268 269 IEEE 802 1p 186 209 INDEX IEEE 802 1q 186 209 IEEE 802 3ad 174 IETF 187 igmp 202 203 205 207 271 IGMP 20 189 195 196 197 198 199 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 21
36. 40 seconds with default value of 20 seconds Magnum6K25 rstp Magnum6K25 rstp show stp config RSTP CONFIGURATION Rapid STP STP Enabled Global NO Magnum6K25 rstp show active stp Current Active Mode RSTP RSTP is Disabled Magnum6K25 rstp rstp enable Successfully set the RSTP status Magnum6K25 rstp show active stp Current Active Mode RSTP RSTP is Enabled Magnum6K25 rstp show stp config RSTP CONFIGURATION Rapid STP STP Enabled Global RSTP STP Enabled Ports YES 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Protocol Normal RSTP Bridge ID 00 00 00 20 06 25 ed 89 Bridge Priority 0 Bridge Forward Delay 215 Bridge Hello Time 02 Bridge Max Age 20 Root Port 0 Root Path Cost 0 Designated Root 00 00 00 20 06 25 ed 89 Designated Root Priority 0 Root Bridge Forward Delay 215 Root Bridge Hello Time 02 Root Bridge Max Age 20 Topology Change count 0 Time Since topology Chg 33 Magnum6K25 rstp show stp ports RSTP Port Configuration 143 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Port Type Priority Path Cost State Des Bridge Des Port 09 TP 10 100 128 2000000 Forwarding 00 00 00 20 06 25 ed 89 00 09 10 TP 10 100 128 2000000 Disabled 00 0a 11 TP 10 100 128 2000000 Disabled 00 0b 12 TP 10 100 128 2000000 Disabled 00 0c 13 TP 10 100 128 200000 Forwarding 00 00 00 20 06 25 ed 89 00 0d 14 TP 10 100 128 2000000 Disabled 00 0e 15 TP 10 100 128 2000000 Disabled 00
37. 7013 This file is provided as a sample template to create a backup of Magnum 6K switch configurations As such this script provides insights into the configuration of Magnum 6K switch s settings GarrettCom recommends that modifications of this file and the commands should be verified by the User in a test environment prior to use in a live production network All modifications are made at the User s own risk and are subject to the limitations of the GarrettCom software End User License Agreement EULA Incorrect usage may result in network shutdown GarrettCom is not liable for incidental or consequential damages due to improper use FAB Magnum 6KQ build 3 7 1 Sep 27 2007 16 41 37 Modules 39 99 86 0 Slot A 4 Port TP MDIX Module Slot B 2 Port Fiber10 Module Slot C 4 Port Fiber100 Module Slot D 1 10 100 1000T 1 Giga SFP 1000 n t i tttttttttttttttttttttttttttttt t titktkt intt System Manager This area configures System related information FAB HA HHRHH A AHAHAHAH HHHHRHRHRHH set bootmode type auto set timeout 10 access telnet enable snmp enable web enable ssl enable exit FAB User Accounts This area configures user accounts for accessing this system FAB user add user manager level 2 pass manager useraccess user manager service telnet enable useraccess user manager service web enable useraccess user manager service acl enable add user operator leve
38. 802 1 authentication details 10 The supplicant laptop host is initially blocked from accessing the network The supplicant wanting to access these services starts with an EAPOL Start frame The authenticator Magnum 6K switch upon receiving an EAPOL start frame sends a response with an EAP Request Identity frame back to the supplicant This will inform the supplicant to provide its identity The supplicant then sends back its own identification using an EAP Response Identity frame to the authenticator Magnum 6K switch The authenticator then relays this to the authentication server by encapsulating the EAP frame on a RADIUS Access Request packet The RADIUS server will then send the authenticator a RADIUS Access Challenge packet The authenticator Magnum 6K switch will relay this challenge to the supplicant using an EAP Request frame This will request the supplicant to pass its credentials for authentication The supplicant will send its credentials using an EAP Response packet The authenticator will relay using a RADIUS Access Request packet If the supplicant s credentials are valid RADIUS Access Accept packet is sent to the authenticator The authenticator will then relay this on as an EAP Success and provides access to the network If the supplicant does not have the necessary credentials a RADIUS Access Deny packet is sent back and relayed to the supplicant as an EAP Failure frame The access to the network continues to be block
39. Bridge Max Age Root Port Root Path Cost Designated Root Designated Root Priority Root Bridge Forward Delay Root Bridge Hello Time Root Bridge Max Age Topology Change count Time Since topology Chg Magnum6K25 rstp show timers Forward Delay Timer 15 sec Hello Timer 2 sec Max Age 20 sec YES 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Normal RSTP 00 00 00 20 06 25 ed 89 00 00 00 20 06 25 ed 89 0 15 02 20 0 141 Magnum6K25 rstp show stp ports RSTP Port Configuration Port Type Priority Path Cost State Des Bridge Des Port 09 TP 10 100 128 2000000 Forwarding 00 00 00 20 06 25 ed 89 00 09 10 TP 10 100 128 2000000 Disabled 00 0a 11 TP 10 100 128 2000000 Disabled 00 0b 12 TP 10 100 128 2000000 Disabled 00 0c 13 TP 10 100 128 200000 Forwarding 00 00 00 20 06 25 ed 89 00 0d 14 TP 10 100 128 2000000 Disabled 00 0e 15 TP 10 100 128 2000000 Disabled 00 0f 16 TP 10 100 128 2000000 Disabled 00 10 Magnum6K25 rstp priority port 13 value 100 Magnum6K25 rstp show stp ports RSTP Port Configuration Port Type Priority Path Cost State Des Bridge Des Port 09 TP 10 100 128 2000000 10 TP 10 100 128 2000000 11 TP 10 100 128 2000000 Forwarding 00 00 00 20 06 25 ed 89 00 09 Disabled 00 0a Disabled 00 0b 145 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE 12 TP 10 100 128 2000000 Disabled 00 0c 13 stat 00 100 200000 Forwarding 00 00 00 20 06 25 ed 89 00 0d 14 TP 10 100 128 2000000 Disabl
40. Designated Root shows the MAC address of the bridge in the network elected or designated as the root bridge Normally when STP is not enabled the switch designates itself as the root switch Designated Root Priority shows the designated root bridge s priority Default value is 32768 Root Bridge Forward Delay indicates the designated root bridge s forward delay This is the time the switch waits before it switches from the listening to the forwarding state The default is 15 seconds This value can be set between 4 30 seconds Root Bridge Hello Time indicates the designated root bridge s hello time Hello information is sent out every 2 seconds Root Bridge Max Age indicates the designated root bridge s maximum age after which it discards the information as being old and receives new updates 23 cc 23 66 These variables can be changed using the priority and timers commands described later in this chapter cost port Magnum6K25 show stp ports STP Port Configuration TP 10 100 Disabled 80 00 00 20 06 25 ed 80 TP 10 100 Disabled 80 00 00 20 06 25 ed 80 TP 10 100 Disabled 80 00 00 20 06 25 ed 80 ta 0 100 Disabled 80 00 00 20 06 25 ed 80 TP Disabled 80 00 00 20 06 25 ed 80 Disabled 80 00 00 20 06 25 ed 80 TP 10 100 Disabled 80 00 00 20 06 25 ed 80 TP 10 100 Disabled 80 00 00 20 06 25 ed 80 Magnum6K25 FIGURE 76 STP Port status information The variables shown above are Port i
41. E5 a 10 Magnum6K25 snmpv3 show view id 1 View ID 1 View Name all Type included Subtree 1 Mask ff 228 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Magnum6K25 snmpv3 access add id 1 accessname v1 model v1 level noauth read 1 writ e none notify none Entry is added successfully Magnum6K25 snmpv3 show access ID ViewName Model Level R View W View N View Context Prefix OONDOARWND 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 _ oO 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Magnum6K25 snmpv3 show access id 1 Access ID 1 Access Name ivi Sec Model ivi Sec Level noauth Read View ID 1 Write View ID none Notify View ID none Context Prefix exact Magnum6K25 snmpv3 user add id 1 username jsmith usertype readwrite authpass something Entry is added successfully Magnum6K25 snmpv3 show user ID UserName UType AuthPass PrivPass AType Level Subtree Magnum6K25 snmpv3 show user id 2 ERROR Entry is not active 229 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Magnum6K25 snmpv3 show user id 1 User ID 1 User Name jsmith User Type read write Auth Pass something Priv Pass Auth Type MD5 Auth Level auth Subtree Magnum6K25 snmpv3 exit Magnum6K25 show snmp SNMPv3 Configuration Information System Name Magnum6K25 System Location Fremont CA System Contact support garrettcom com Authentication Trap Enab
42. GarrettCom Magnum 6K family of switches is not overrun The important parameters to set for any serial connectivity software is to set the line delay to be 500 milliseconds and the character delay to be 50 milliseconds For example using Hyper Terminal this can be set under File gt Properties and when the Properties sheet is open click on the ASCII Setup button and in the Line Delay entry box enter in 500 and in the Character Delay entry box enter in 50 as shown below y none HyperTerminal none Properties Connect To Settings Function arrow and ctrl keys actas ASCII Setup Terminal keys O Windows keys ASCII Sending Backspace key sends L Send line ends with line feeds CtkH O Del CtrhH Space Ctr H C Echo typed characters locally Line delay po milliseconds Emulation l eT Character delay E milliseconds Telnetterminal ID ASCII Receiving Backscroll buffer lines 500 C Append line feeds to incoming line ends C Force incoming data to 7 bit ASCII Wrap lines that exceed terminal width E Play sound when connecting or disconnecting Input Translation FIGURE 133 Optimizing serial connection shown for Hyper Terminal on Windows XP The highlighted fields are the ones to change as described rit 244 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Note this is needed if you plan to cut and paste between a serial window and another file
43. MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Syntax configure vlan type port enter the VLAN configuration commands Syntax vlan type port enter the VLAN configuration commands Syntax add id lt vlan Id gt name lt vlan name gt port lt number list range gt forbid lt number list range gt lt mgt nomegt gt adding VLAN Syntax edit id lt vlan id gt name lt vlan name gt port lt numbet list range gt lt megt nomegt gt edit existing VLAN name Syntax start vlan lt name number list range gt activate the VLAN configuration Syntax save save the configuration including the VLAN configuration Syntax show vlan type lt port tag gt lt id vlanid gt display specific VLAN information Syntax set port port lt number list range gt default id lt number gt sets the default VLAN id For Magnum 6K family of switches the default VLAN id is 1 unless changed using this command Syntax set port port lt number list range gt filter status lt enable disable gt enables or disables the VLAN filtering function Syntax set port port lt number list range gt tagging id lt number gt status lt tagged untagged gt defines whether the outgoing packets from a port will be tagged or untagged Syntax set port port lt number list range gt join id lt number gt adds the specified port s to the specified VLAN id Syntax set port port lt number list range gt leave id lt number gt releases a specific port from a
44. MNS 6K up to 10 entries can be specified Syntax group lt add delete gt id lt id gt groupname lt name gt model lt v1 v2c usm gt com2secid lt com2sec id gt a part of the View based Access control model V ACM as defined in RFC 2275 This command defines the mapping from sec model or a sec name to a group A sec model is one of v1 v2c or usm On MNS 6K up to 10 entries can be specified Syntax show group id lt id gt display all or specific group entries id is optional and is the number corresponding to the group entry number in the table Syntax view lt add delete gt id lt id gt viewname lt name gt type lt included excluded gt subtree lt oid gt mask lt hex string gt a part of the View based Access control model VACM as defined in RFC 2275 This command defines a manager or group or manager stations what it can access inside the MIB object tree On MNS 6K up to 10 entries can be specified Syntax show view id lt id gt display all or specific view entries id is optional and is the number corresponding to the view entry number in the table Syntax uset lt add delete gt id lt id gt username lt name gt usertype lt readonly readwrite gt authpass lt pass phrase gt privpass lt pass phrase gt level lt noauth auth priv gt subtree lt oid gt jor quickly adding or deleting v3 USM based security this command adds user entries MNS 6K allows up to 5 users to be
45. PC is networked to the switch the switch s command line interface CLI can be accessed via telnet To manage the switch through in band networked access e g telnet or Web Browser Interface you should configure the switch with an IP address and subnet mask compatible with your network You should also change the manager password to control access privileges from the console Many other features such as optimizing the switch s performance traffic engineering and traffic prioritizing VLAN configuration and improving network security can be configured through the switch s console interface as well as in band networked access once the IP address is setup Besides the IP address setting up the SNMP parameters allows configuration and monitoring through an SNMP network management station running a network management program e g SNMPc from Castle Rock available from GarrettCom Inc MNS 6K Software Updates Magnum switches already have the necessary software loaded on them If a software upgrade is needed or the MNS 6K software needs to be updated to the current version please refer to the GarrettCom web site for information on updating the MNS 6K software The documentation on how to update the MNS 6K is included as an Appendix in this manual The Login prompt is shown when the connection to the GarrettCom Magnum 6K Switch is successful and the switch is ready for the configuration commands Should you get a boot prompt please
46. RADIUS authentication is on port other than 1812 Syntax auth lt enable disable gt enables or disables the 802 1 authenticator function on MNS 6K switch Syntax setport port lt num list range gt status lt enable disable gt control lt auto forceauth forceunauth gt initialize lt assert deassert gt se ting the port characteristic for an 802 1 network Syntax backend port lt num list range gt supptimeout lt 1 240 gt servertimeout lt 1 240 gt maxreq lt 1 10 gt configure parameters for EAP over RADIUS port mandatory port s to be configured supptimeout optional This is the timeout in seconds the authenticator waits for the supplicant to respond back Default value is 30 seconds Values can range from 1 to 240 seconds servertimeout optional This is the timeout in seconds the authenticator waits for the backend RADIUS server to respond back The default value is 30 seconds Values can range from 1 to 240 seconds 80 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE maxreq optional The maximum number of times the authenticator will retransmit an EAP Request packet to the Supplicant before it times out the authentication session Its default value is 2 It can be set to any integer value from 1 to 10 Syntax portaccess port lt num list range gt quiet lt 0 65535 gt maxreauth lt 0 10 gt transmit lt 1 65535 gt set port access parameters for authenticating PCs or sup
47. RE 148 Invoke the Receive File to start the Xmodem transfer program In the figure above the Windows XP based HyperTerminal screen is Shown scssi 311 RE 149 Make sure to select the Xmodem protocol and the proper directory where the configuration is saved Click on Receive This starts the file transfer assesses 311 RE 150 Status window for Xmodem using HyperTerminal under Windows XP 312 RE 151 Message which shows the completion of the file transfer from saveconf command 312 RE 152 Example of saveconf command fOr Ih 312 RE 153 Upgrade using serial connection 315 RE 154 File upload status window under Xmodem using HyperTerminal under Windows DOP sei seat aitasrcbea a abd edad i a ana PNA 315 RE 155 upgrading the switch using the serial interface 316 RE 156 Dialog for upgrading the image using 317 RE 157 Updating the boot code over the network using the upgrade command Make sure to reboot the switch after the boot loader upgrade is completed sssri 319 xvii Chapter 1 Conventions Followed Conventions followed in the manual manual including screen captures interactions and commands with the switch etc T o best use this document please review some of the conventions followed in the Box shows interaction with the switch command line or screen captures from the switch or computer for clarity Commands typed by a user will be shown in a
48. SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Port Priority Trunk 13 32768 Link Down 14 32768 Link Down 15 32768 Link Down Magnum 6K25 lacp add port 12 Port s added successfully Magnum 6K25 lacp show lacp Orphan Ports Port Priority Trunk 12 32768 Link Down 13 32768 Link Down 14 32768 Link Down 15 32768 Link Down Magnum 6K25 lacp exit Magnum 6K25 show lacp Orphan Ports Port Priority Trunk 12 32768 Link Down 13 32768 Link Down 14 32768 Link Down 15 32768 Link Down Magnum 6K25 FIGURE 106 Configuring LACP The error messages received when a trunk port is not configured properly are as follows Link Down Link is down or the cable is not connected Half duplex A Half Duplex port Half Duplex ports cannot participate in LACP Loop Detected Indicates the other side does not have LACP configured Without LACP configured on both switches the network will create an Ethernet loop Peer Nota Trunk When no LACPDU was received or cannot be received from the peer This maybe due to the fact that the port is already in use or is shutdown or not available Speed Mismatch All ports in a trunk should have the same speed If one port s speed does not match the other ports this specific port cannot join the port group 183 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Trunk Mismatch The other switch sent a BPDU which did not match the trunk information associated with this port This happens when the port
49. Switch are trademarks and Personal Hub is a registered trademark of GarrettCom Inc NEBS is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies UL is a registered trademark of Underwriters Laboratories Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Corporation Copyright 2007 GarrettCom Inc All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced without prior written permission from GarrettCom Inc Printed in the United States of America Part 84 00131 Table of Contents T Conventions Followed 18 Flow of the User Guide ss esten inetd aaeaniennieiMomatins 19 2 GCN Statted ninien ai e a aE aime R A 22 Before stactitieeee E a r A n a ai 22 MNS 6K Software Updates s ssssssessseseseessessreesresseeeseeeseeeseesreess 23 Console connection soniais ia a Gi 23 Co sole setup roiie nirin T EEEa 24 Console SCLC EN ve item tiactinscutdnn 24 Logging in for the first time Ppp 25 Setting the IP parameters 25 Priv le Oe leel zzzzz er i ai 28 Opeta PrIVlETES S soena a Ba E a A 28 Manager Prwvilegeeeeeeeeeee 28 User managemenccccc area eiealane 28 29 Delete Use e eee cide In iewiedte a aai vot 29 Modify Passwotd nicnn nna 29 Modify the Privilege Level iscussiinaimniausidunniadvarts 29 Modify Access Privileges fof a uset esssesssssessresseeeseeeseeereeereess 30 I ea aa a AA EA a aia 31 Displaying Help for an Individual Command 31 Viewing options for a command ss sesssessssressressreeseeese
50. Syntax Syntax Syntax Syntax Syntax Syntax Syntax set password set or change password configure port security sets the port authorization based on MAC addresses port security configure port security settings allow mac lt address list range gt port lt num list range gt specify a specific MAC address or MAC address list learn port lt number list gt lt enable disable gt arn MAC addresses connected to the Magnum 6K switch show port security display port security settings action port lt num list range gt lt none disable drop gt action to perform in case of breach of port security signal port lt num list range gt lt none log trap logandtrap gt port to monitor and signal to send in case of breach of port security ps lt enable disable gt enable or disable port security remove mac lt all address list range gt port lt num list range gt remove a MAC address entry show log fatal alert crit error warn note info debug display logs and specific types of logs clear log fatal alert crit error warn note info debug clear logs or specific type of logs set logsize size lt 1 1000 gt set the log buffer size access setup access configuration parameters allow ip lt ipaddress gt mask lt netmask gt service lt name list gt aow specific IP address or range of addresses as a trusted host s deny i
51. Syntax prtmr lt enable disable gt enable or disable port mirror settings Syntax device configure device and port specific settings Syntax setport port lt port list range gt name lt name gt speed lt 10 100 gt duplex lt half full gt auto lt enable disable gt flow lt enable disable gt bp lt enable disable gt status lt enable disable gt configure port settings Syntax show port lt Port number gt display port settings Syntax flowcontrol xonlimit lt value gt xofflimit lt value gt configure flow control buffers 101 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Syntax show flowcontrol display flow control buffers Syntax backpressure rxthreshold lt value gt configure backpressure buffers Syntax show backpressure display backpressure buffers Syntax broadcast protect lt enable disable gt protect switch from broadcast storms Syntax rate threshold port lt port list range gt rate lt frames sec gt change the allowed broadcast rate threshold 102 Chapter 9 VLAN Create separate network segments collision domains across Magnum 6K family of switches segments that can span multiple Magnum 6K family of switches A VLAN is a group of ports designated by the switch as belonging to the same broadcast domain The IEEE 802 1Q specification establishes a standard method for inserting VLAN membership information into Ethernet frames hort for virtual LAN
52. Syntax upgrade mode lt serial tftp ftp gt lt ipaddress gt file lt name gt Where mode is the mode by which the software will be accessed for upload serial ftp or tftp ipaddress is the IP address of the ftp or tftp server only used when mode ftp or tftp file name is the name of the MNS 6K software file to be used for upgrade This file was downloaded from the GarrettCom site as described in steps 1 and 2 314 UPDATING SOFTWARE STEP 3 Serial Connection Prerequisites make sure the directory and the file name of the MNS 6K software image downloaded in steps 1 and 2 is known To use the serial connection to update the MNS 6K image the command dialog is shown below Magnum6K25 show version Version 2 6 0 Build Date Jan 29 2004 Time 12 02 32 Magnum6K25 upgrade mode serial Do you wish to upgrade the image Y or N Y FIGURE 153 Upgrade using serial connection Once the upgrade process is started the VT100 emulation software e g HyperTerminal will ask for the file location Once the file location is indicated the file transfer begins Make sure the Xmodem protocol is also selected in this file location dialog window Once selected the file transfer begins The file transfer status window is shown in Figure 14 Xmodem file send for ghi Sending C TFTP GCl Configs Rel3 0 bin Packet 6930 Error checking Checksum Retries 0 Total retries 0 Last error File EE
53. The port pairs may be of any media type and the media type does not have to be the same for the pair With the Magnum 6K family of switches a port operating at any speed 10Mb 100Mb Gb may be designated as part of a RS Ring port pair ensuring proper Ethernet configuration of the ring elements After selecting a port pair for a ring the manager or administrator enables RS Ring on the selected port pairs via RS Ring software commands One command enable disable turns RS Ring on and off Another command adds deletes port pairs Other commands provide for status reporting on the ring The MNS 6K software package provides for remote operation access security event logs and other industry standard managed network capabilities suitable for industrial applications requiring redundancy When RS Ring is enabled for a port pair fault detection and recovery are armed for the associated ring The standard RSTP functions are performed by the Magnum 6K family of switches for other ports in the same manner as they would be without RS Ring enabled when operating in the RING_CLOSED state During this state RS Ring is also watching the flow of the BPDU packets that move around the ring between the designated part pair The extra capability of RS Ring comes into play when a fault occurs When the flow of BPDU packets around the ring is interrupted RS Ring quickly acts to change the blocking port s state to forwarding No waiting for RSTP analysis No
54. The same license key needs to be configured for each switch on the ring and RS Ring capability has to be enabled on all switches and hence all the devices in the ring have to be a managed Magnum 6K switches 5 RS Ring topologies support one failure in the network The second failure may create isolated network islands 6 RSTP has to be enabled on all Magnum 6K switches in the ring 7 At least one untagged VLAN must be available for the BPDU s to propagate through the network to update RSTP status When to use RS Ring vs S Ring RS Ring or S Ring provides resiliency in the network So does RSTP and STP The general guidelines for making a decision as to whether to use S Ring or RS Ring or for that matter RSTP or STP matters a lot on some key criteria some of which are listed below Speed RS Ring offers substantially faster recovery times compared to S Ring While the recovery time will vary on factors such as number of nodes in a ring lengthof the ring etc on an average RS Ring typically recovers in less than 100 mSec vs 300 mSec for S Ring Cost RS Rings and S Rings are licensed features S Ring requires at least one device in the network should be a managed switch RS Ring requires all devices in the ring should be a managed Magnum 6K switches So while the recovery times are faster for RS Ring the cost of building such a ring may be higher e Ring Topology multiple rings may be implemented with S Ring running on on
55. To use STP it has to be manually enabled 2 If you ate using tagged VLANs at least one untagged VLAN must be available for the BPDU s to propagate through the network to update STP status Using STP The commands used for configuring STP are listed below Syntax show stp lt config ports gt regardless of whether STP is enabled or disabled default this command lists the switch s full STP configuration including general settings and port settings Magnum6K25 show stp config STP CONFIGURATION Spanning Tree Enabled Global NO Spanning Tree Enabled Ports YES 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Protocol Normal STP Bridge ID 80 00 00 20 06 25 ed 80 Bridge Priority 32768 Bridge Forward Delay 15 124 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Bridge Hello Time 42 Bridge Max Age 20 Root Port 0 Root Path Cost 0 Designated Root 80 00 00 20 06 25 ed 80 Designated Root Priority 32768 Root Bridge Forward Delay 15 Root Bridge Hello Time 2 Root Bridge Max Age 20 RSTP CONFIGURATION Rapid STP STP Enabled Global NO Magnum6K25 FIGURE 75 Viewing STP configuration The variables listed above are Spanning Tree Enabled Global indicates whether STP is enabled or disabled globally i e if the values is YES all ports have STP enabled otherwise all ports have STP disabled Spanning Tree Enabled Ports indicates which ports have STP enabled note in the figure the ports 9 through
56. USER GUIDE Ports associated with S Ring should have the following settings e Auto negotiation disable e Speed Fixed e Same Speed e Same Duplex and e LLL enable The necessary commands are Syntax stp STP Configuration mode Syntax stp lt enable disable gt Szart Enable or stop Disable STP Syntax set stp type lt stp rstp gt set the spanning tree protocol to be IEEE 802 1d or 802 1w Spanning Tree Protocol or Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Syntax show active stp Display which version of STP is currently active Syntax show s ring show the status of S Ring status and configuration Syntax s ting lt enable disable gt enable or disable S Ring capabilities Syntax s ting learn start the learning process to discover the ring and the ports which make up the S Ring Syntax s ring add port lt port1 port2 gt define ports which make up the S Ring ports Note as discussed earlier you can create multiple S Rings on a switch Syntax s ting del port lt portl port2 gt remove the switch from S Ring topology by eliminating the end ports on the switch Magnum6K25 stp show s ring S Ring Status sRing Status DISABLED Port 1 Port 2 Status Magnum6K25 stp s ring enable S RING Enabled Magnum6K25 stp show s ring S Ring Status sRing Status ENABLED 160 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Port 1 Port 2 Status Magnum6K25 stp s ring add port 1 7 Ports 1 and 7 Configured for s
57. Usmo Port VLANS iriste t ene cnn cece eueamenss 107 Get VLAN Semani ienna A E 107 Using Tag VI ie i raie 111 Tag VLANs and Management ss sssesssessessesrerresrerresrrsrrsresrese 118 List of commands in this chapter sessessseesererrrereerres 121 10 Spanning Tree Protocol STP ssseeseeresssssseeseeeeessss 123 STP features and Operation sss sseesssesseeeressreesrresressreeseereesreess 123 Using STP areenan a i 124 List of commands in this Chapter sssssseeesessesreereererreresen 134 11 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP PP 135 RTE EE x acer ee tert ERE 135 Transition from STP to RSTP P P 136 Confiurine 8 ineine 137 List of commands in this chapter ssssesssesessesresreeresreresen 147 12 RS Ring S Ring and Link Loss Learn LLL 149 S Ring and LLL concepts 150 RSRS CONCE Sn ner er pr ny Pe Emenee aa ener 151 When to use RS Ring vs S Ring Pp 152 Comparing resiliency methods 153 RSTP STP Operation without RS Ring or S Ring 154 RSTP STP Operation with S Ring eseese 156 LEG with S Ring osnan eina a E aan 158 Ring leara atureee ncrieeniestucenenrande aude 158 Configuring 8 Ring P 159 RSTP Operation with RS Ring PP 162 COME Ute RS BGs sec ist toa creed inc ciara telacierseraaseaaradndes 164 List of commands in this chapter scconsceasssorte rea soesievstioncercess 166 13 Dual Homing 168 vi DuakHoming concepteeee a 168 Dual Homing Modes
58. X Delete this item Other Places Rel My Documents My Network Places FIGURE 144 Use the copy command to copy the files to the proper location 6 Make sure you remember where the files are stored as these files will be needed for the next step Next steps 1 Access the GarrettCom Magnum 6K switch The access can be over the console port using the null modem cable or through the network using telnet This is described in step 2 2 Save the existing configuration either through the serial port or through the network depending on the access method This is also described in step 2 3 Load the updated MNS 6K software and reboot the switch This is described in step 3 4 Optional step Reload the saved configuration This is described in step 4 307 UPDATING SOFTWARE STEP 2 Step 2 Preparing to load the software Backup your existing configuration nce the MNS 6K software is downloaded from the GarrettCom site it is strongly recommended that the existing configuration of the switch is preserved before the MNS 6K software upgrade is performed This section will show you how to save the existing configuration and prepare you for loading the configuration Accessing the switch The MNS 6K User Guide explains how the switch can be accessed For clarity this section simplifies the details and describes some of the commands you can use for accessing the switch The Magnum 6K switch can be acc
59. added Right now the MNS 6K agent only support noauth and auth md5 for v3 authentication and auth des for priv authentication Syntax show uset id lt id gt display all or specific view entries id is optional and is the number corresponding to the view entry number in the table Syntax rmon enter the RMON configuration mode to setup RMON groups and communities Syntax history def owner lt string gt def comm lt string gt define the RMON history group and the community string associated with the group 233 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Syntax statistics def owner lt string gt def comm lt string gt define the RMON statistics group and the community string associated with the group Syntax alarm def owner lt string gt def comm lt string gt define the RMON alarm group and the community string associated with the group Syntax event def owner lt string gt def comm lt string gt define the RMON event group and the community string associated with the group Syntax show rmon lt stats hist event alarm gt Ast the specific RMON data as defined by the group Hype 234 Chapter 19 Miscellaneous Commands Improving productivity and manageability the overall productivity and manageability of the switch These items are examined here ate several features built into the Magnum 6K family of switches which help with individually in this chapter Alarm Relays In a wiring closet it would be h
60. added successfully Magnum6K25 snmp show snmp SNMP CONFIGURATION INFORMATION SNMP Get Community Name public SNMP Set Community Name private SNMP Trap Community Name public AuthenTrapsEnableFlag disabled SNMP Access Status enabled Managers added are displayed under the SNMP information by using the show snmp command SNMP MANAGERS INFO IP Address 192 168 1 111 IP Address 192 168 1 222 224 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE SNMP TRAP STATIONS INFO Magnum6K25 snmp traps add type Snmp Rmon ip 192 168 1 2 Successfully Added Magnum6K25 snmp show snmp SNMP CONFIGURATION INFORMATION SNMP Get Community Name public SNMP Set Community Name private SNMP Trap Community Name public AuthenTrapsEnableFlag enabled SNMP Access Status enabled Managers added are displayed under the SNMP information by using the show snmp command SNMP MANAGERS INFO IP Address 192 168 1 111 IP Address 192 168 1 222 SNMP TRAP STATIONS INFO IP Address 192 168 1 2 Trap Type SNMP RMON Magnum6K25 snmp exit Magnum6K25 show snmp SNMP CONFIGURATION INFORMATION SNMP Get Community Name public SNMP Set Community Name private SNMP Trap Community Name public AuthenTrapsEnableFlag enabled SNMP Access Status enabled SNMP MANAGERS INFO IP Address 192 168 1 111 IP Address 192 168 1 222 SNMP TRAP STATIONS INFO IP Address 192 168 1 2 Trap Type
61. added using the add command Syntax sendmail server lt ip addr gt to lt email addr gt from lt email addr gt subject lt string gt body lt string gt customize and also to send a test email to check SMTP settings the email sent out by specifying the email subject field server address to field and the body of the text See example fo the body of the text message later in this chapter server mandatory SMTP server IP v4 address to mandatory the recipient email address from mandatory the sender email address subject mandatory email subject or title 255 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE body mandatory email body Syntax server ip lt ip addr gt port lt 1 65535 gt retry lt 0 3 gt configure the global SMTP server settings ip mandatory SMTP server IP address port mandatory TCP port to be used for SMTP communications default is 25 retry optional specifies how many times to retry if an error occurs when sending email Range from 0 to 3 Default is 0 Syntax smtp lt enable disable gt enables or disables SMTP to send SNMP alerts by email Syntax exportlog mode lt serialltftplftp gt lt ipaddress gt file lt name gt doctype lt rawlhtml gt facilitates the export of the event log information as a text file or as an HTML file Syntax V repeat the last command Syntax lt n gt repeat the n th command as indicated by a show his
62. address please refer to the section in Chapter 2 Setting IP Parameters Once the IP address is set the CLI can be accessed via the telnet programs as well as the console interface From now on all commands discussed are accessible from the CLI irrespective of the access methods serial port or in band using telnet 35 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE To verify the IP address settings the show ipconfig command can be used Magnum6K25 gt show ipconfig IP Address 192 168 1 150 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 192 168 1 10 Magnum6K25 gt FIGURE 19 Checking the IP settings Besides manually assigning IP addresses there are other means to assign an IP address automatically The two most common procedures are using DHCP and bootp DHCP and bootp DHCP is commonly used for setting up addresses for computers users and other user devices on the network bootp is the older cousin of DHCP and is used for setting up IP addresses of networking devices such as switches routers VoIP phones and more Both of them can work independent of each other Both of them are widely used in the industry It s best to check with your network administrator as to what protocol to use and what the related parameters are DHCP and bootp require respective services on the network DHCP and bootp can automatically assign an IP address It is assumed that the reader knows how to setup the necessary boo
63. automatically configures a default VACM view based access control model This allows any manager station to access the Magnum 6K switch either via SNMP v1 v2c or v3 The community name is public This command is only intended for first time users and values can be changed by administrators who want more strict access Syntax engineid string lt string gt Every agent has to have an enginelD name to be able to respond to SINMPv3 messages The default engine ID value is 6K_v3 Engine This command allows the user to change the engine ID Syntax authtrap lt enable disable gt enables or disables authentication traps generation Syntax show authtrap displays the current value of authentication trap status Syntax deftrap community lt string gt defines the default community string to be used when sending traps When user does not specify the trap community name when setting a trap station using the trap command the default trap community name is used Syntax show deftrap displays the current value of default trap Syntax trap lt add delete gt id lt id gt type lt v1 v2 inform gt host lt host ip gt community lt string gt port lt 1 65534 gt define the trap and inform manager stations The station can receive v1 v2 traps and or inform notifications An inform notification is an acknowledgments that a trap has been received A user can add up to 5 stations Syntax show trap id lt id gt shows
64. because the capacity of an aggregated link is higher than each individual link alone 10Mbps or 10 100Mbps or 100Mbps ports can be grouped together to form one logical link Instead of adding new hardware to increase speed on a trunk one can now use LACP to incrementally increase the throughput in the network preventing or deferring hardware upgrades Some known issues with LACP on the Magnum 6K family of switches are e LACP will not work on Half Duplex ports e All trunk ports must be on the same module Trunk ports cannot be spread out across different modules e All trunk ports MUST have the same speed setting If the speed is different LACP shows an error indicating speed mismatch e Many switches do not forward the LACPDUs by default So it is possible to hook up multiple ports to these switches and create an Ethernet loop In many cases this is prevented by Spanning Tree running on these switches e All ports in a trunk group should be members of the same VLAN Each port can be a member of multiple VLANs but each port should have at least one VLAN that is common to both the port groups e The LACPDU packets are sent out every 30 seconds It is possible that in configuring LACP a loop can be created until LACP notification is completed It is recommended to configure LACP first and then physically connect the ports to avoid this potential issue e Port Security will not work with the ports configured for LACP e IGMP w
65. bridge Age time setting stp STP RSTP S Ring and LLL settings ps Port Security settings mirror Port Mirror settings sntp SNTP settings llan VLAN settings gvrp GVRP settings snmp SNMP settings web Web and SSL TLS settings 53 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE tacacs TACACS settings auth 802 1x Settings igmp IGMP Settings smtp SMTP settings If the module name is not specified the whole configuration is erased For example kill config save system preserves the system IP address netmask and default gateway Magnum6K25 kill config save system Do you want to erase the configuration Y or N Y Successfully erased configuration Please reboot FIGURE 40 Erasing configuration without erasing the IP address Once the configuration is erased please reboot the switch for the changes to take effect Displaying Serial Number To display the serial number of the unit use the command show setup as shown below The command also displays other information related to the switch Syntax show setup display the setup serial number factory code information and more Magnum 6K25 show setup Version MAC Address IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway Address CLI Mode System Name System Description System Contact System Location System Objectid System Seriial No Original Factory Config Code Magnum 6K25 Magnum 6K25 build 3 7 1 Sep 27
66. community gt trap lt trap community gt set the necessary community strings Syntax authtraps lt enable disable gt enables or disables authentication traps generation Syntax traps lt add delete gt type lt Snmp Rmon Snmp Rmon Enterprise Snmp Enterprise Rmon Enterprise A gt ip lt ipaddress gt add v1 traps as well as define the trap receiver Syntax show snmp displays the SNMP configuration information Syntax mgrip lt add delete gt ip lt IPaddress gt adds or deletes a management station specified by the IP address which can query SNMP variables from the switch This is done to protect the switch from being polled by unauthorized managers Valid for SNMP v1 Maximum of 5 stations allowed Syntax setvar sysname syscontact syslocation lt string gt sets the system name contact and location All parameters are optional but a user must supply at least one parameter Syntax snmpv3 enter the SNMP V3 configuration mode note enable SNMP V3 by using the set snmp command which follows Syntax quickefg quick setup for snmpv3 configuration It automatically configures a default VACM view based access control model This allows any manager station to access the Magnum 6K switch either via SNMP v1 v2c or v3 The community name is public This command is only intended for first time users and values can be changed by administrators who want more strict access Syntax engineid string lt
67. contact GarrettCom technical support The IP address of the switch is assigned automatically from a DHCP server or a BootP server If these servers do not exist the switch will be assigned an IP address which was previously configured or a static IP address of 192 168 1 2 with a netmask of 255 255 255 0 if that address is not in use It is recommended that the user uses Secure Web Management SWM capabilities built into MNS 6K to setup and manage the switch Please refer to the SWM user guide for more information Console connection The connection to the console is accessed through the DB 9 RS232 connector on the switch marked on the Magnum 6K family of switches as a console port This interface provides access to the commands the switch can interpret and is called the Command Line Interface or CLI This interface can be accessed by attaching a VT100 compatible terminal or a PC running a terminal emulation program to the console port on the Magnum 6K family of switches USB to serial adapters are also available for laptops or computers that do not native serial ports but have access to USB ports 23 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE The interface through the console or the Console Management Interface or CMI enables you to reconfigure the switch and to monitor switch status and performance Once the switch is configured with an IP address the Command Line Interface or CLI is also accessible using telnet as well as the seri
68. del port lt portl port2 gt remove the switch from S Ring topology by eliminating the end ports on the switch Syntax Ul lt enable disable gt enable or disable LLL on the snitch Syntax Ul add port lt port list range gt enable LLL on the list of specified ports Syntax Ill del port lt port list range gt disable LLL on the list of specified ports Syntax show Ill display the status of LLL Syntax tstp STP Configuration mode Syntax tstp lt enable disable gt Start Enable or stop Disable STP Syntax set stp type lt stp rstp gt set the spanning tree protocol to be IEEE 802 1d or 802 1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Syntax show active stp Display which version of STP is currently active Syntax show ts ring show the status of RS Ring status and configuration Syntax ts ring lt enable disable gt enable or disable RS Ring capabilities Syntax ts ring add port lt portl port2 gt define ports which make up the RS Ring ports Note as discussed earlier you can create multiple RS Rings on a switch Syntax ts ring del port lt portl port2 gt remove the switch from RS Ring topology by eliminating the end ports on the switch 167 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Chapter 13 Dual Homing Fault tolerance options for edge devices networks can be challenging Traditionally the choices for redundancy for edge of the network devices were too limited too expensive and too complica
69. disable telnet session 57 MAGN Syntax Syntax Syntax Syntax Syntax Syntax Syntax Syntax Syntax Syntax UM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE show ipconfig shows IP parameters set show console reviews console settings show serial reviews serial settings show setup reviews system parameters show sysconfig reviews settable system parameters show time shows the system time show timezone shows the system timezone show date shows the system date show uptime shows the amount of time the switch has been operational show setup display the setup serial number factory code information and more 58 Chapter 4 IPv6 Next generation IP addressing T his section explains how the access to the GarrettCom Magnum MNS 6K can setup using IPv6 instead of IPv4 addressing described earlier IPv6 provides a much larger address space and is required today by many Assumptions It is assumed here that the user is familiar with IP addressing schemes and has other supplemental material on IPv6 configuration routing setup and other items related to IPv6 This user guide does not dwell or probe those details Introduction to IPv6 IPv6 is short for Internet Protocol Version 6 IPv6 is the next generation protocol or IPng and was recommended to the IETF to replace the current version Internet Protocol IP Version 4 IPv4 IPv6 was recommended by the IPv6 or IPng Area Directors of the Inte
70. edit existing VLAN name edit port lt number list range gt priority lt priority gt edit the membership of the ports specified for LACP ports The priority can be from 0 6553 Requires LACP module 281 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K Command enable lt user name gt USER GUIDE Description changing the privilege level engineid string lt string gt Every agent has to have an enginelD name to be able to respond to SNMPv3 messages The default engine ID value is 6K_v3 Engine This command allows the user to change the engine ID event def owner lt string gt comm lt string gt def define the RMON event group and the community string associated with the group exportlog mode lt serialltftplftp gt lt ipaddress gt file lt name gt doctype lt rawlhtml gt facilitates the export of the event log information as a text file or as an HTML file flowcontrol xonlimit lt value gt xofflimit lt value gt configure flow control buffers forcevetsion lt stp rstp gt set the STP or RSTP compatibility mode ftp lt get put list del gt type lt app config oldconf script host s log gt host lt hostname gt ip lt ipaddress gt file lt filename gt user lt user gt pass lt password gt where lt get put list del gt different ftp operations type lt app config oldconf script hos ts log gt option
71. esessssssseseeereesesessoseeeeeesessses 235 Alarm Religiniai i a aiaa a 235 Rae i ETE EA E E E EEA 239 Serial Connectivity assists ond a aR 244 Miscellaneous commands ss ssssssssssssssesessressesssesseerresseeseessess 245 Peomh a ate at i ra R 246 Piit onneni aa sie tise palate aae 247 FIP mOdES cunei a a We Tata a cae 248 System EVENTS oes reari rE E R E a 248 MAGC Address TAC ius ceas came alttaine tat aisuiventates 253 List of commands in this chapter ssssssssesessesresrrererresersen 254 APPENDIX 1 Command listing by Chapter 257 Chapter 2 Getting Starte 257 Chapter 3 IP Address and System Information 258 Chapter A IPV Orr cases 261 Chapter 5 Access Considerations seseseesereeererreree 262 Chapter 6 Access Using Radius cesses 263 Chapter 7 Access using TACA CS P 264 Chapter 8 Port mirroring and setup 265 Chapter 9 VLAN sulisi 266 Chapter 10 Spanning Tree Protocol STP 267 Chapter 11 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol 267 Chapter 12 RS Ring S Ring and Link Loss Learn 268 Chapter 13 Dual Homing is cstsscoetsvasessitcnnstnsnsestorssonteosies 270 Chapter 14 Link Ageregation Control Protocol LACP 270 Chapter 15 Quality Of Service p 270 viii Chapter 164 I1JJ onai 271 Chapter T7 GVRP EE E cane tls 212 Chapter 13 SIN MEP vrig soci 272 Chapter 19 Miscellaneous Commands sssssesssessresreereseeses 275 APPENDIX 2 Comm
72. for first time users and values can be changed by administrators who want more strict access rate threshold port lt port list range gt rate lt frames sec gt change the allowed broadcast rate threshold reauth port lt num list range gt status lt enable disable gt period lt 10 86400 gt set values on how the authenticator Magnum OK switch does the re authentication with the supplicant or PC reboot restart the switch same effect as physically turning off the power remove ip lt ipaddress gt mask lt netmask gt delete a specific IP address from the access or trusted host list remove mac lt all address list range gt port lt num list range gt remove a MAC address entry removeall remove all IP addresses of trusted hosts 285 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES Command rmon MNS 6K USER GUIDE Description enter the RMON configuration mode to setup RMON groups and communities rs ring lt enable disable gt enable or disable RS Ring capabilities rs ring add port lt port1 port2 gt define ports which make up the RS Ring ports Note as discussed earlier you can create multiple RS rings on a switch rs ring del port lt port1 port2 gt remove the switch from RS Ring topology by eliminating the end ports on the switch rstp enter the RSTP configuration mode rstp lt enable disable gt enable RSTP by default this is d
73. for the set time command Magnum6K25 help set time set time Sets the device Time Usage set time hour lt 0 23 gt min lt 0 59 gt sec lt 0 59 gt zone GMT hh mm Magnum6K25 FIGURE 13 Help for a specific command Viewing options for a command The options for a specific command can be displayed by typing the command and pressing enter Syntax command lt Enter gt Magnum6K25 show lt Enter gt 31 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Usage show active stp show active snmp show active vlan show address table show age show alarm show arp show auth lt config ports gt show backpressure show bootmode more FIGURE 14 Options for the show command Context help Other ways to display help specifically with reference to a command or a set of commands use the TAB key Syntax lt TAB gt Syntax lt Command string gt lt TAB gt Syntax lt First character of the command gt lt TAB gt For example following the syntax listed above the lt TAB gt key will list the available commands in the particular privilege level Magnum6K25 gt lt TAB gt alarm clear enable exit help logout ping set show telnet terminal walkmib whoami Magnum6K25 gt FIGURE 15 Listing commands available at the operator level OR Magnum6K25 gt s lt TAB gt set show Magnum6K25 gt FIGURE 16 Listing commands starting
74. gt set port access parameters for authenticating PCs or supplicants port mandatory ports to be configured quiet optional This is the quiet period the amount of time in seconds the supplicant is held after an authentication failure before the authenticator retries the supplicant for connection The default value is 60 seconds Values can range from 0 to 65535 seconds maxreauth optional The number of re authentication attempts that are permitted before the port becomes unauthorized Default value is 2 Values are integers and can range from 0 to 10 transmit optional This is the transmit period this is the time in seconds the authenticator waits to transmit another request for identification from the supplicant Default value is 30 Values can be from 1 to 65535 seconds 85 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Syntax reauth port lt num list range gt status lt enable disable gt period lt 10 86400 gt set values on how the authenticator Magnum 6K snitch does the re authentication with the supplicant or PC port mandatory ports to be configured status optional This enables disables re authentication period optional this is the re authentication period in seconds This is the time the authenticator waits before a re authentication process will be done again to the supplicant Default value is 3600 seconds 1 hour Values can range from 10 to 86400 seconds Syntax show s
75. high low gt tos lt 0 63 list range gt tag lt 0 7 list range gt depending on the type of OOS the corresponding field has to be set For example for QOS type tag the tag levels have to be set and for QOS type ToS the ToS levels have to be set If the priority field is not set it then defaults to low priority ToS has 64 levels and the valid values are 0 63 and a tagged packet has 8 levels and the valid values are 0 7 set qri interval lt value gt The query response interval is the maximum amount of time that can elapse between when the querier router sends a host query message and when it receives a response from a host The Default value is 10 seconds The Range can be from 2 to 270 seconds Restrictions apply to the maximum value because of an internal calculation that is dependent on the value of the Query Interval set querier lt enable disable gt enables or disables a switch as IGMP querier setsntp server lt ipaddress gt timeout lt 1 10 gt retry lt 1 3 gt setup the SNTP server 290 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES Command set untag port lt port list range gt ptiority lt high low gt tag lt 0 7 gt MNS 6K USER GUIDE Description The 802 1p user priority assigned to untagged received packets to be transmitted as tagged from the priority queue setvar set the system name contact and location sysname syscontact syslocation lt stri_ informat
76. id lt id gt username lt name gt usertype lt readonly readwrite gt authpass lt pass phrase gt ptivpass lt pass phrase gt level lt noauth auth priv gt subtree lt oid gt MNS 6K USER GUIDE Description for quickly adding or deleting v3 USM based security this command adds user entries MNS 6K allows up to 5 users to be added Right now the MNS 6K agent only support noauth and auth mad5 for v3 authentication and auth des for priv authentication useraccess uset lt name gt setvice lt telnet web gt lt enable disable gt whete user lt name gt specifies the user id setvice lt telnet web gt specifies which service telnet or web the user has access to lt enable disable gt specifies whether the setvices ate allowed or not allowed For assigning access capabilities to the user for example to allow or not allow telnet access to the switch view lt add delete gt id lt id gt viewname lt name gt type lt included excluded gt subtree lt oid gt mask lt hex string gt a part of the View based Access control model V ACM as defined in RFC 2275 This command defines a manager or group or manager stations what it can access inside the MIB object tree On MNS 6K up to 10 entries can be Specified xmodem lt get put gt type lt app config oldconf script host s log gt where lt get put gt different xmodem file transfer operatio
77. in more details later The only exception is the ping command where there is a special command for IPv6 That commands is ping6 and the syntax is as Syntax ping6 lt IPv6 address gt pings an IPv6 station There is also a special command to ping the status of IPv6 That command is Syntax show ipv6 displays the IPv6 information To configure IPv6 the following sequence of commands can be used 61 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Magnum 6K25 ipconfig ipconfig Configures the system IP address subnet mask and gateway Usage ipconfig ip lt ipaddress gt mask lt subnet mask gt dgw lt gateway gt Magnum 6K25 ipconfig ip fe80 220 6ff fe25 ed80 mask ffff ffff ffff ffff Action Parameter Missing add assumed IPv6 Parameters Set Magnum 6K25 show ipv6 IPv6 Address fe80 220 6ff fe25 ed80 mask ffff ffff ffff ffff Magnum 6K25 show ipconfig IP Address 192 168 5 5 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Gateway Address 192 168 5 1 IPv6 Address fe80 220 6ff fe25 ed80 mask ffff ffff ffff ffff IPv6 Gateway Magnum 6K25 FIGURE 42 Configuring IPv6 In addition to the commands listed above the commands which support IPv6 addressing are Syntax ftp lt IPv6 address gt fp to an IPv6 station Example ftp fe80 220 6ff fe25 ed80 Syntax telnet lt IPv6 address gt se net to an IPv6 station Example telnet fe80 220 6ff fe25 ed80 Besides if the end station supp
78. in the figure By default on Magnum 6K family of switches VLAN support is enabled and all ports on the switch belong to the default VLAN DEFAULT VLAN This places all ports on the switch into one physical broadcast domain If VLANs are entirely separate segments or traffic domains how can the VLANs route traffic or talk to each other This can be done using routing technologies e g a router or a L3 switch The routing function can be done internally to a L3 switch One advantage of an L3 switch is that the switch can also support multiple VLANs The L3 switch can thus route traffic across multiple VLANs easily and provides a cost effective solution if there are mnay VLANs defined 104 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Router or L3 switch Mitt ry Lit ity TARP 3 FIGURE 69 routing between different VLANS ts performed using a router or a Layer 3 switch L3 switch The Magnum 6K family of switches supports up to 32 VLANs per switch Tag VLAN or Port VLAN What is the difference between tag and port VLAN In a nutshell the term port vlan is specific to a switch and port VLAN assigns a specific port or group of ports belonging to a VLAN So when ports belong to multiple VLANs and they are specific to a switch use the Port VLAN to configure that Port VLANs do not look for VLAN identifier VID information nor does it manipulate the VID information It thus works tran
79. in the ring S Ring and LLL concepts S Ring is built upon networking software standards such as IEEE 802 1d Spanning Tree Protocol STP or Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP based on IEEE 802 1w The purpose of S Ring is to define two ports which patticipate in the RSTP STP tree structure in a ring topology as opposed to a meshed topology S Ring running on the ring manager switch leverages this capability to recover quickly from fault situations The recovery times for S Ring based networks are within a few hundred milliseconds Recovery time for STP devices is in tens of seconds typically 30 50 seconds in most networks or sub second to a few seconds for RSTP networks The biggest advantage of S Ring besides the fast recovery time is the defined ring topology which makes the network manageable S Ring can also be an overall lower cost solution as there are hubs as well as switches which can be used in the ring In the Magnum 6K family of switches as well as in other unmanaged switches such as the ESD42 a feature called Link Loss Learn LLL can be activated to immediately flush its address buffer and relearn the MAC addresses that route packets around the fault This procedure which is similar to switch initialization occurs within milliseconds resulting in fast ring recovery An S Ring implementation watches for link loss as well as for STP RSTP BPDU packet failures and responds to whichever occurs first In most instances the link lo
80. info debug display logs and specific types of logs clear log fatal alert crit error warn note info debug char logs or specific type of logs set logsize size lt 1 1000 gt set the log buffer size access setup access configuration parameters 262 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Syntax allow ip lt ipaddress gt mask lt netmask gt service lt name list gt a ow specific IP address or range of addresses as a trusted host s Syntax deny ip lt ipaddress gt mask lt netmask gt service lt name list gt deny specific IP address or range of IP addresses Syntax remove ip lt ipaddress gt mask lt netmask gt delete a specific IP address from the access or trusted host list Syntax temoveall remove all IP addresses of trusted hosts Syntax show ip access display all trusted hosts Syntax clear lt history log 1 5 informational activity critical fatal debug terminal arp portstats addr char command to clear various aspects of the MNS 6K information most notably clear addr clears the addresses learnt or clear log to clear the logs and the type of logs Chapter 6 Access Using Radius Syntax auth configuration mode to configure the 802 1 parameters Syntax show auth lt config ports gt show the 802 1x configuration or port status Syntax authserver ip lt ip addr gt udp lt num gt secret lt string gt define the RADIUS serve
81. list range gt leave id lt number gt releases a specific port from a VLAN For example if port 1 belongs to VLAN 10 20 30 40 the command set port port 1 leave id 40 makes port 1 belong to VLAN 10 20 30 dropping VLAN 40 Syntax show port port lt port list range gt shows all parameters related to tag vian for the list of ports If the port parameter is omitted it will display all ports In the example below we start with Port VLAN and convert to TAG VLAN We define ports 14 through 16 to belong to VLANs 10 20 and 30 and the rest of the ports belong to the default VLAN VLAN 1 Filtering is enabled on ports 14 16 The VLAN setup is done before devices are plugged into ports 14 16 as a result the status of the ports show the port status as DOWN A word of caution when TAG VLAN filtering is enabled there can be serious connectivity repercussions the only way to recover from that it is to reload the switch without saving the configuration or by modifying the configuration from the console serial port There can be either TAG VLAN on MSN 6K or Port VLAN Both VLANs cannot co exit at the same time There can only be one default VLAN for the switch The default is set to VLAN 1 and can be changed to another VLAN A word of caution on changing the default VLAN as well there can be repercussions on management as well as multicast and other issues Tag VLAN support VLAN ids from 1 to 4096 VLAN ids more than 2048 are reserved
82. month lt 1 12 gt day lt 1 31 gt format lt mmddyyyy ddmmyyyy yyyymmdd gt Syntax set time hour lt 0 23 gt min lt 0 59 gt sec lt 0 59 gt zone GMT hh mm Thus to set the time to be 08 10 am in the 8 hours from GMT PST or time zone on west coast of USA and to set the date to be 15 October 2003 the following set of commands are used Magnum6K25 set time hour 8 min 30 sec 0 zone GMT 8 00 success in setting device time Magnum6K25 show time Time 8 30 04 Magnum6K25 show timezone Timezone GMT O8hours 00minutes Magnum6K25 set date year 2003 month 10 day 15 Success in setting device date Magnum6K25 show date System Date Wednesday 10 15 2003 in mm dd yyyy format Magnum6K25 FIGURE 29 Setting the system date time and time zone Rebooting the switch resets the time to the default Synchronizing with the time server resets the time Other relevant date and time commands are Syntax set timeformat format lt 12 24 gt Syntax set daylight country lt country name gt Magnum6K25 set daylight set daylight Sets the day light location Usage set daylight country lt name gt Magnum6K25 set daylight country USA Success in setting daylight savings to the given location country USA Magnum6K25 show daylight 43 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Daylight savings location name USA Magnum6K25 FIGURE 30 Setting the system daylight saving time S
83. move as needed to maintain LAN operations When the fault is cured the re emergence of the ring structure enables the BPDU packets to flow again between the ring s port pair This is recognized by S Ring and RSTP STP as well as by RS Ring and RSTP and one of the ports in the ring s port pair is changed to the blocking state S Ring takes the recovery action immediately not waiting for the 30 second STP analysis Rings are simple structures Either one port of a pair is forwarding or both are Not complicated not much to go wrong A Link loss on one of the Magnum 6K Switch s ring ports is an alternative trigger for S Ring to initiate fault recovery The Link loss trigger almost always comes quicker after a fault a few milliseconds than the loss of a BPDU packet which is gated by the standard STP 2 second hello time interval So the Link loss trigger will almost always provide faster fault detection and faster recovery accordingly LLL with S Ring The Link Loss Learn feature available on Magnum 6K family of switches can significantly reduce switch address memory decay time resulting in more rapid reconfiguration With Link Loss Learn LLL Magnum 6K family switches in a ring can flush their address memory buffer and quickly re learn where to send packets enabling them to participate in a very quick recovery or restoration Note that a Link loss on any Magnum 6K Switch port somewhere in the ring is an alternative trig
84. on the ability to allow or deny access to network resources The access control aspect of secure network services involves allowing or disallowing traffic based on information contained in packets such as the IP address MAC address or other content Planning for access is a key architecture and design consideration For example which ports are configured for port security Normally rooms with public access e g lobby conference rooms etc should be configured with port security Once that is decided the next few decisions ate who ate the authorized and unauthorized users What action should be taken against authorized as well as unauthorized users How ate the users identified as authorized or unauthorized Configuring Port Security Login as a level 2 user or as a manager to configure port security Once logged in get to the port security configuration level to setup and configure port security Syntax configure port security Or Syntax port security For example Magnum6K25 configure port security Magnum6K25 port security FIGURE 44 Port security configuration mode Alternately the following commands can also be used to enter the port security configuration mode 65 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Magnum6K25 port security Magnum6K25 port security FIGURE 45 Port security configuration mode From the port security configuration mode the switch can be configured to 1
85. or from rstp configuration state as shown in the screen captures earlier In this example ports 9 10 have a path cost of 20 000 and are the least cost paths These ports are connected to other switches and the ports are enabled as forwarding ports Ports 6 7 are also 141 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE connected to other switches From the state column it indicates that port 7 is in a standby state as that port is discarding all traffic More CLI commands associated with RSTP in the RSTP configuration mode are Syntax Syntax Syntax forceversion lt stp rstp gt set the STP or RSTP compatibility mode show forceversion she current force version show timers show the values of the timers set for RSTP Syntax priority port lt number list range gt value lt 0 255 0 65535 gt specifies the port or Syntax switch level priority When a port s are specified the priority is associated with ports and their value is O 255 If no ports are specified then the switch bridge priority is specified and its value is 0 65535 cost port lt number list range gt value lt 0 65535 gt cost is specific to a port and the port s have to be specified Syntax port port lt number list range gt status lt enable disable gt specific ports may not need to Syntax participate in STP process These ports typically would be end stations If you are not sure let MNS 6K software make the decisions t
86. port from participating in STP discovery Its best to only allow trunk ports to participate in STP End stations need not participate in STP process Forward Delay indicates the time duration the switch will wait from listening to learning states and from learning to forwarding states The value ranges from 4 to 30 seconds Default value is 15 Hello When the switch is the root device this is the time between messages being transmitted The value is from 1 to 10 seconds Default value is 2 seconds Age This is the maximum time a message with STP information is allowed by the switch before the switch discards the information and updates the address table again Value ranges from 6 to 40 seconds with default value of 20 seconds Magnum6K25 stp show stp config STP CONFIGURATION Spanning Tree Enabled Global NO Spanning Tree Enabled Ports YES 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Protocol Normal STP Bridge ID 80 00 00 20 06 25 ed 80 Bridge Priority 32768 Bridge Forward Delay 2 15 Bridge Hello Time 2 Bridge Max Age 20 Root Port 0 Root Path Cost 0 Designated Root 80 00 00 20 06 25 ed 80 Designated Root Priority 32768 Root Bridge Forward Delay 15 Root Bridge Hello Time 2 Root Bridge Max Age 20 RSTP CONFIGURATION Rapid STP STP Enabled Global NO Magnum6K25 stp show stp ports 129 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE STP Port Configuration Priority Path Cost State P 10 100 Disabled 80 00 00
87. port parameter is omitted it will display all ports show portweight display the weight settings on a port 293 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES Command show router MNS 6K USER GUIDE Description displays detected IGMP enabled router ports show stats port lt num gt displays 802 1 related statistics show timers show the values of the timers set for RS TP show trap id lt id gt shows the configured trap stations in tabular format id is optional and is the number corresponding to the trap entry number in the table show user id lt id gt display all or specific view entries id is optional and 1s the number corresponding to the view entry number in the table show view id lt id gt display all or specific view entries id is optional and is the number corresponding to the view entry number in the table show vlan list all the VLANs including dynamic VLANs on the switch signal port lt num list range gt lt none log trap logandtrap gt port to monitor and signal to send in case of breach of port security smtp configure the SNMP alerts to be sent via email smtp lt enable disable gt enables or disables SMTP to send SNMP alerts by email snmp enter the SNMP Configuration mode snmpv3 enter the SNMP V3 configuration mode note enable SNMP V3 by using the set snmp command which follows sntp enable disable
88. root The IGMP L2 is used when there is no L3 device in the network set logsize size lt 1 1000 gt set the log buffer size set password set or change password set prompt lt prompt string gt set the prompt for switch The prompt has predefined variables These are n System Name c System Contact 1 System Location i System IP m System MAC v Version Character r New Line b Space set serial baud lt rate gt data lt 5 6 7 8 gt parity lt none odd even gt stop lt 1 1 5 2 gt flowctrl lt none xonxoff gt set serial port parameters set snmp type lt vl all gt define the version of SNMP to use the option all supports all versions v1 v2 and v3 v1 restricts SNMP to v1 only By default SNMP v1ontly is enabled set stp type lt stp rstp gt Set the switch to support RSTP or change it back to STP Need to save and reboot the switch after this command set time hour lt 0 23 gt min lt 0 59 gt sec lt 0 59 gt zone GMT hh mm sets the time as well as the timezone set timeformat format lt 12 24 gt set the display time in the 12 24 hour mode set timezone GMT or hour lt 0 14 gt min lt 0 59 gt sets the timezone 287 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES Command set vlan type lt port tag none gt MNS 6K USER GUIDE Description defines the VLAN type set forbid vlan lt tag
89. sent to an anycast address will be delivered to one member of the set Multicast addresses identify a group of interfaces such that a packet sent to a multicast address is delivered to all of the interfaces in the group There are no broadcast addresses in IPv6 their function being superseded by multicast addresses IPv6 supports addresses which are four times the number of bits as IPv4 addresses 128 vs 32 This is 4 Billion times 4 Billion times 4 Billion 2 times the size of the IPv4 address space 2 This works out to be 340 282 366 920 938 463 463 374 607 431 768 211 456 This is an extremely large address space In a theoretical sense this is approximately 665 570 793 348 866 943 898 599 addresses per square meter of the surface of the planet Earth assuming the earth surface is 511 263 971 197 990 square meters In the most pessimistic estimate this would provide 1 564 addresses for each square meter of the surface of the planet Earth The optimistic estimate would allow for 3 911 873 538 269 506 102 addresses for each square meter of the surface of the planet Earth Approximately fifteen percent of the address space is initially allocated The remaining 85 is reserved for future use The details on the addressing are covered by numerous articles on the WWW as well as other literature and are not covered here Configuring IPv6 The commands used for IPv6 are the same as those used for IPv4 Some of the commands will be discussed
90. status of S Ring show stp lt config ports gt regardless of whether STP is enabled or disabled default this command lists the snitch s full STP configuration including general settings and port settings show stp lt config ports gt display the RSTP or STP parameters show sysconfig displays the settable system parameters show tacplus lt status servers gt show status of TACACS or servers configured as TACACS servers show time displays the system time show timezone displays the timezone information show uptime displays the amount the time elapsed since the last reboot or power failure show version displays the version of MNS 6K being used show vlan type lt port tag gt lt id vlanid gt display specific VLAN information show authtrap show deftrap displays the current value of authentication trap status displays the current value of default trap show forbid display the ports with GVRP forbid capabilities show forceversion the current forced version show group shows the multicast groups show group id lt id gt display all or specific group entries id is optional and is the number corresponding to the group entry number in the table show pott display the port characteristics for IGMP show port port lt port list range gt shows all parameters related to tag vlan for the list of ports If the
91. string gt Every agent has to have an enginelD name to be able to respond to SINMPv3 messages The default engine ID value is 6K_v3 Engine This command allows the user to change the engine ID Syntax show authtrap displays the current value of authentication trap status Syntax deftrap community lt string gt defines the default community string to be used when sending traps When user does not specify the trap community name when setting a trap station using the trap command the default trap community name is used Syntax show deftrap displays the current value of default trap Syntax trap lt add delete gt id lt id gt type lt vl1 v2 inform gt host lt host ip gt community lt string gt port lt 1 65534 gt define the trap and inform manager stations The station can receive v1 v2 traps and or inform notifications An inform notification is an acknowledgments that a trap has been received A user can add up to 5 stations Syntax show trap id lt id gt shows the configured trap stations in tabular format id is optional and is the number corresponding to the trap entry number in the table 222 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Syntax com2sec lt add delete gt id lt id gt secname lt name gt source lt source gt community lt community gt a part of the View based Access control model VACM as defined in RFC 2275 This specifies the mapping from a source community pair to
92. tag vlan set port port 14 16 tagging id 30 status tagged Port tagging enabled Magnum6K25 tag vian show vlan type tag VLAN ID 1 Name Default VLAN Status Active UNTAGGED UNTAGGED UNTAGGED UNTAGGED UNTAGGED VLAN ID 10 Name engineering Status Active TAGGED TAGGED TAGGED VLAN ID 20 Name sales Status Active 117 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE TAGGED TAGGED TAGGED VLAN ID 30 Name marketing Status Active TAGGED TAGGED TAGGED FIGURE 72 Example for Tag VLAN Tag VLANs and Management Normally for security reasons a user may want to disable management information propagating on a specific VLAN By default management information propagates on VLAN 1 default VLAN To disable management or to enable management information from propagating on a VLAN please use the commands listed below Syntax add id lt vlan Id gt name lt vlan name gt port lt number list range gt forbid lt number list range gt lt mgt nomgt gt add VLANs GarrettCom recommends to disable management function when the VLANs are added using the add command shown above By default management is allowed enabled on a VLAN Syntax edit id lt vlan Id gt name lt vlan name gt port lt number list range gt lt mgt nomegt gt change VLAN assignment THE EDIT COMMAND ONLY ASSOCIATES THE PORT WITH THE VLANS So for example if VLAN 5 had port 10
93. the configured trap stations in tabular format id is optional and is the number corresponding to the trap entry number in the table 273 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Syntax com2sec lt add delete gt id lt id gt secname lt name gt source lt source gt community lt community gt a part of the View based Access control model VACM as defined in RFC 2275 This specifies the mapping from a source community pair to a security name On MNS 6K up to 10 entries can be specified Syntax group lt add delete gt id lt id gt groupname lt name gt model lt v1 v2c usm gt com2secid lt com2sec id gt a part of the View based Access control model V ACM as defined in RFC 2275 This command defines the mapping from sec model or a sec name to a group A sec model is one of v1 v2c or usm On MNS 6K up to 10 entries can be specified Syntax show gtroup id lt id gt display all or specific group entries id is optional and is the number corresponding to the group entry number in the table Syntax view lt add delete gt id lt id gt viewname lt name gt type lt included excluded gt subtree lt oid gt mask lt hex string gt a part of the View based Access control model VACM as defined in RFC 2275 This command defines a manager or group or manager stations what it can access inside the MIB object tree On MNS 6K up to 10 entries can be specified Syntax show view id lt id gt display
94. the new port as described above Port setup Each port on the GarrettCom Magnum 6K family of switches can be setup specific port characteristics The command for setting the port characteristics are Syntax device enter the device configuration mode Syntax setport port lt port list range gt name lt name gt speed lt 10 100 gt duplex lt half full gt auto lt enable disable gt flow lt enable disable gt bp lt enable disable gt status lt enable disable gt where device sets up the Magnum 6K switch in the device configuration mode name assigns a specific name to the port This name is a designated name for the port and can be a server name user name or any other name 94 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE speed specifically sets the speed to be 10 or 100Mbps Note this works only with 10 100 ports with 10Mbps ports the option is ignored No error is shown See speed settings section below flow sets up flow control on the port See Flow Control section below bp back pressure enables back pressure signaling for traffic congestion management status disable disables the port from operation Syntax show port lt port number gt In the example listed below the ports 11 and 12 are given specific names Ports 9 and 13 are active as shown by the link status Port 13 is set to 100 Mbps all other ports are set to 10Mbps All ports are set with aut
95. the particular tag setting on a packet allows each queue to have different service levels Magnum QoS implementations provide mapping of ToS or IP precedence to Class of Service CoS A CoS setting in an Ethernet Frame is mapped to the ToS byte of the IP packet and vice versa A ToS level of 1 equals a CoS level of 1 This provides end to end priority for the traffic flow when Magnum 6K family of switches are deployed in the network 188 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Not all packets received on a port have high priority IGMP and BPDU packets have high priority by default The Magnum 6K family of switches has the capability to set the priorities based on three different functions They are Port QoS assigns a high priority to all packets received on a port regardless of the type of packet TAG QoS if a packet contains a tag the port on which the packet was received then looks to see at which level that tag value is set Regardless of the tag value if there is a tag that packet is automatically assigned high priority sent to the high priority queue ToS QoS Layer 3 when a port is set to ToS QoS the most significant 6 bits of the IPv4 packet which has 64 bits are used If the 6 bits are set to ToS QoS for the specific port number the packet went to that packet is assigned high priority by that port Configuring QoS Magnum 6K family of switches support three types of QoS Port based Tag based and ToS based
96. using RS Ring with managed switches Chapter 12 talks about dual homing and how dual homing can be used to bring resiliency to edge devices Chapter 13 describes LACP and how LACP can be used to increase the throughput using 10 100 Mbps ports or in situations where resiliency is needed between switches trunks Once the network is made resilient the network manager may want to setup prioritization of traffic Chapter 14 focuses on Quality of Service QoS and other prioritization issues Chapters 15 and 16 focus on advanced topics such as IGMP and GVRP 20 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Chapter 15 focuses on IGMP Chapter 16 focuses on GVRP Chapter 17 shows how the SNMP parameters can be setup for managing the switch with network management software such as Castle Rock SNMPc Chapter 18 includes miscellaneous commands to improve the overall ease of use and other diagnostic information 21 Chapter 2 Getting Started Furst few simple steps using the console port on the switch Some of the functionality includes setting up the IP T his section explains how the GarrettCom Magnum 6K family of switches can be setup address of the switch securing the switch with a user name and password setting up VLAN s and more Before starting 1 2 3 4 5 6 Before you start it is recommended to acquire the hardware listed below and be ready with the items listed For initial config
97. vian all Magnum6K25 port vian save Saving current configuration Configuration saved FIGURE 70 configuring VLANs on Magnum 6K switch The example below shows how to add three different VLANs Along with the VLANs Port 14 is assigned to the four VLANs the three new ones added plus the DEFAULT VLAN 1 The following 108 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE interaction shows how VLANs 10 20 30 are added to port 14 and the VLANs activated A typical use for such a port would be to connect a dumb switch to this port and allow traffic from three different VLANs to pass through transparently to the dumb switch which will be connected to port 14 Note in this example VLAN information is not propagated on to the dumb switch Magnum6K25 set vlan type port VLAN set to Port based Magnum6K25 vlan type port mode Magnum6K25 port vlan add id 10 name engineering port 14 Vlan added successfully with Vian id 10 Vlan name engineering Ports 714 Magnum6K25 port vlan add id 20 name engineering port 14 Notice each VLAN needs a unique name here by mistake ERROR Duplicate Vian name VLAN 10 and 20 had the same Magnum6K25 port vlan add id 20 name sales port 14 Vlan added successfully with Vlan id 20 Vlan name sales Ports 14 Magnum6K25 port vlan add id 30 name marketing port 14 Vlan added successfully with Vlan id 30 Vlan name ma
98. well as the operator account Passwords can be changed from the user id by using the command set password command Syntax set password Example Magnum6K25 set password Enter New Password Confirm New Password Password has been modified successfully Magnum6K25 FIGURE 43 Changing password for a given account Other details on managing users and the passwords are covered in Chapter 2 User Management 64 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Port Security The port security feature can be used to block computers from accessing the network by requiring the port to validate the MAC address against a known list of MAC addresses This port security feature is provided on an Ethernet Fast Ethernet or Gigabit Ethernet port In case of a security violation the port can be configured to go into the disable mode or drop mode The disable mode disables the port not allowing any traffic to pass through The drop mode allows the port to remain enabled during a security violation and drop only packets that are coming in from insecure hosts This is useful when there are other network devices connected to the Magnum 6K family of switches If there is an insecure access on the secondary device the Magnum 6K family of switches allows the authorized users to continue to access the network the unauthorized packets are dropped preventing access to the network Network security Network security hinges
99. with type bootp only This option allows the switch to load the image file from the BootP server This is useful when a new switch is put on a network and the IT policies are set to load only a specific MNS 6Kimage which is supported and tested by IT personnel bootcfg lt enable disable gt valiad with type bootp only This option allows the switch to load the configuration file from the BootP server This is useful when a new 37 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE switch is put on a network and the specific configurations are loaded from a centralized BootP server Magnum6K25 set bootmode type dhcp Save Configuration and Restart System Magnum6K25 set bootmode type auto Save Configuration and Restart System Magnum6K25 set bootmode type bootp bootimg enable bootcfg disable Network application image download is enabled Network application config download is disabled Save Configuration and Restart System Magnum6K25 FIGURE 20 Changing the boot mode of the switch Using Telnet By default the telnet client is enabled on the GarrettCom Magnum 6K family of switches MNS 6K supports five simultaneous sessions on a switch four telnet sessions and one console session This allows many users to view discuss or edit changes to the MNS 6K This also becomes useful as two remote people want to view the commands and other settings on the switch The telnet client can be disabled by using the telnet disable command Tel
100. 0 00 20 06 25 ed 80 Magnum6K25 stp cost port 13 value 20 131 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Setting cost for STP Successfully set the path cost for port 13 Magnum6K25 stp show stp ports STP Port Configuration Priority Path Cost State Forwarding 80 00 00 20 06 25 ed 80 Disabled 80 00 00 20 06 25 ed 80 Disabled 80 00 00 20 06 25 ed 80 Disabled 80 00 00 20 06 25 ed 80 Forwarding 80 00 00 20 06 25 ed 80 Disabled 80 00 00 20 06 25 ed 80 Disabled 80 00 00 20 06 25 ed 80 128 Disabled 80 00 00 20 06 25 ed 80 Magnum6K25 stp port port 9 status disable Successfully set the STP status for port 9 Magnum6K25 stp show stp ports Since Port 9 does not participate in STP it is not listed here Any changes made to STP STP Port Configuration parameters on Port 9 will be ignored Priority Path Cost State 10 100 Disabled 80 00 00 20 06 25 ed 80 10 100 Disabled 80 00 00 20 06 25 ed 80 10 100 Disabled 80 00 00 20 06 25 ed 80 10 100 Disabled 80 00 00 20 06 25 ed 80 10 100 Disabled 80 00 00 20 06 25 ed 80 TP TP TP TP 10 100 Forwarding 80 00 00 20 06 25 ed 80 TP TP TP 10 100 128 100 Disabled 80 00 00 20 06 25 ed 80 Magnum6K25 stp port port 9 status enable Successfully set the STP status for port 9 Magnum6K25 stp show sip ports STP Port Configuration Priority Path Cost State TP 10 100 Forwarding 80 00 00 20 06 25 ed 80 TP 10 100 Disabled 80 00 00 20 06 25 ed 80 TP 10 100 Disabled 80 00 00
101. 00 lines in chronological order from the oldest to the newest Each line consists of one complete event message NOTE since the event logs are written on the flash once the flash memory is full the logs stop writing It is 248 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE important to erase the log periodically or use syslog capability to download the logs to a syslog server The event log window contains 22 log entry lines Magnum6K25 show log 03 02 2005 01 01 2001 01 01 2001 01 01 2001 01 01 2001 01 01 2001 01 01 2001 03 03 2005 03 03 2005 03 03 2005 03 03 2005 03 03 2005 03 03 2005 Magnum6K25 5 14 43 P M 12 00 00 A M 12 00 00 A M 12 00 00 A M 12 00 00 A M 12 00 00 A M 12 00 00 A M 4 32 48 A M 9 31 59 A M 9 32 04 A M 9 32 11 A M 9 35 40 A M 9 41 46 A M Log Description SYSMGR System Subnet Mask changed SYSMGRi successfully registered with DB Manager SYSMGR successfully read from DB VLAN Vlan type set to Port VLAN SYSMGRi system was reset by user using CLI command SNTP Date Time set to 01 01 2001 12 00AM SNTP Client started SNTP Date and Time updated from SNTP server TELNET Telnet Session Started CLI manager console login IGMP IGMP Snooping is enabled IGMP IGMP Snooping is disabled IGMP IGMP Snooping is enabled FIGURE 137 Event log shown on the screen Event logs can be exported to a ftp or a TFTP server on the network for further analysis or for other uses To facilitate the export
102. 0f 16 TP 10 100 128 2000000 Disabled 00 10 Magnum6K25 rstp forceversion rstp Error Force Version already set to Normal RSTP Magnum6K25 rstp forceversion stp forceversion can be used for compatibility with STP ices In thi le the switch i to SIP Magnum6K25 rstp show forceversion devices In this example the switch is forced to S mode Force Version Force to STP only Magnum6K25 rstp show stp config RSTP CONFIGURATION Rapid STP STP Enabled Global YES RSTP STP Enabled Ports 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Protocol Force to STP only Bridge ID 00 00 00 20 06 25 ed 89 Bridge Priority 0 Bridge Forward Delay 215 Bridge Hello Time 02 Bridge Max Age 20 Root Port 0 Root Path Cost 0 Designated Root 00 00 00 20 06 25 ed 89 Designated Root Priority 0 Root Bridge Forward Delay 215 Root Bridge Hello Time 02 Root Bridge Max Age 20 Topology Change count 0 Time Since topology Chg 100 Magnum6K25 rstp forceversion rstp Using forceversion the switch is now operating using RSTP Note the show stp config command also indicates the switch Magnum6K25 rstp show forceversion protocol is RSTP Force Version Normal RSTP Magnum6K25 rstp show stp config RSTP CONFIGURATION 144 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Rapid STP STP Enabled Global RSTP STP Enabled Ports Protocol Bridge ID Bridge Priority Bridge Forward Delay Bridge Hello Time
103. 10Tx DOWN 10 No E 1 a a 11 B3 E H 10Tx DOWN 10 No E 1 12 B4 E H 10Tx DOWN 10 No E 1 13 B5 E F 100Tx UP 100 No E 1 14 B6 E H 10Tx DOWN 10 No E M 15 B7 E H 10Tx DOWN 10 No E 1 16 B8 E H 10Tx DOWN 10 No E 1 AI traffic on port 10 is sent to the Magnum6K25 qos S jah bronn giei Magnum6K25 qos setqos type port port 10 priority high Successfully set QOS Magnum6K25 qos show qos PORT QOS STATUS 9 None UP 10 Port DOWN 11 None DOWN 12 None DOWN 13 None UP 14 None DOWN 15 None DOWN 16 None DOWN Magnum6K25 qos show qos type port 191 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE PORT PRIORITY STATUS 9 Low UP 10 High DOWN 11 Low DOWN 12 Low DOWN 13 Low UP 14 Low DOWN 15 Low DOWN 16 Low DOWN Magnum6K25 qos setqos port 11 priority high type tag tag 6 Successfully set QOS Magnum6K25 qos show qos All traffic on port 11 is sent to the high priority queue and the QoS tag is set to 6 PORT QOS STATUS 9 None UP 10 Port DOWN 11 Tag DOWN 12 None DOWN 13 None UP 14 None DOWN 15 None DOWN 16 None DOWN PORT QOS STATUS 9 UP 10 DOWN 11 6 DOWN 12 DOWN 13 UP 14 DOWN 15 DOWN 16 DOWN Magnum6K25 qos setgos port 12 priority high type tag tag 5 Successfully set QOS Magnum6K25 qos show gos type tag 192 MAGNUM 6
104. 14 an edit command on port 14 only will drop ports 10 13 from VLAN 5 See example below Magnum 6K25 vlan type tag 118 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Magnum 6K25 tag vian add id 5 name engineering port 10 14 Tag based vlan Added Successfully Vianid 5 Vlan name engineering Ports 10 14 Magnum 6K25 tag vlan add id 10 name marketing port 15 16 nomgt Tag based vlan Added Successfully Vlanid 10 Vlan name marketing Ports 15 16 Magnum 6K25 tag vlan show vlan type tag VLAN ID 1 Name Default VL Status Active PORT MODE STATUS 1 UNTAGGED UP 2 UNTAGGED DOWN 3 UNTAGGED DOWN 4 UNTAGGED DOWN 5 UNTAGGED DOWN 6 UNTAGGED DOWN 7 UNTAGGED DOWN 8 UNTAGGED DOWN 9 UNTAGGED DOWN 10 UNTAGGED DOWN 11 UNTAGGED DOWN 12 UNTAGGED DOWN 13 UNTAGGED DOWN 14 UNTAGGED DOWN 15 UNTAGGED DOWN 16 UNTAGGED DOWN VLAN ID 5 Name engineering Status Pending PORT MODE l STATUS 10 UNTAGGED DOWN 11 UNTAGGED DOWN 12 UNTAGGED DOWN 13 UNTAGGED DOWN 14 UNTAGGED DOWN VLAN ID 10 119 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Name marketing Status Pending Management Port Excluded from this VLAN PORT MODE l STATUS 15 UNTAGGED DOWN 16 UNTAGGED DOWN Magnum 6K25 tag vlan edit id 5 port 14 nomgt Tag based vlan edited Successfully Vlanid 5 Vlan name engineering Ports 14
105. 14 16 mode block Port mode is set Magnum6K25 igmp show port Port Mode 09 Auto 10 Forwarding 11 Forwarding 12 Forwarding 13 Auto 14 Blocking 15 Blocking 16 Blocking Magnum6K25 igmp show router Routerlp PortNo Timer 10211250 9 25 Magnum6K25 igmp set leave enable IGMP immediate leave status is enabled Magnum6K25 igmp show igmp IGMP State Enabled ImmediateLeave Enabled Querier Enabled 205 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Querier Interval 125 Querier Response Interval 10 Magnum6K25 igmp set leave disable IGMP immediate leave status is disabled Magnum6K25 igmp show igmp IGMP State Enabled ImmediateLeave Disabled Querier Enabled Querier Interval 125 Querier Response Interval 10 Magnum6K25 igmp set querier enable IGMP querier status is enabled Magnum6K25 igmp show igmp IGMP State Enabled ImmediateLeave Disabled Querier Enabled Querier Interval 125 Querier Response Interval 10 Magnum6K25 igmp set querier disable IGMP querier status is disabled Magnum6K25 igmp show igmp IGMP State Enabled ImmediateLeave Disabled Querier Disabled Querier Interval 125 Querier Response Interval 10 Magnum6K25 igmp set qi interval 127 Query interval successfully set Magnum6K25 igmp show igmp IGMP State Enabled ImmediateLeave Disabled Querier Disabled Querier Interval 127 Querier Response Interval 10 Magnu
106. 16 are STP enabled but STP functionality is not enabled so STP will not perform on these ports Bridge Priority specifies the switch bridge priority value This value is used along with the switch MAC address to determine which switch in the network is the root device Lower values mean higher priority Value ranges from 0 to 65535 Default value is 32768 Bridge Forward Delay indicates the time duration the switch will wait from listening to learning states and from learning to forwarding states The value ranges from 4 to 30 seconds Default value is 15 Bridge Hello Time When the switch is the root device this is the time between messages being transmitted The value is from 1 to 10 seconds Default value is 2 seconds Bridge Max Age This is the maximum time a message with STP information is allowed by the switch before the switch discards the information and updates the address table again Value ranges from 6 to 40 seconds with default value of 20 seconds Root Port indicates the port number which is elected as the root port of the switch A root port of 0 indicates STP is disabled Root Path Cost A path cost is assigned to individual ports for the switch to determine which ports are the forwarding points A higher cost means more loops a lower cost means fewer loops More loops equal more traffic and a tree which takes a long time to converge resulting in a slower system 125 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE
107. 2007 16 41 37 00 20 08 03 05 09 192 168 5 5 255 255 255 0 192 168 5 1 Manager Magnum 6K25 25 Port Modular Ethernet Switch support garrettcom com Fremont CA 1 3 6 1 4 1 553 12 6 43576812 6K25 8TP FIGURE 41 Display the serial number factory code and other relevant setup information 54 MAGN UM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE List of commands in this chapter Syntax set bootmode type lt dhcp bootp manual auto gt bootimg lt enable disable gt bootcfg lt enable disable gt assign the boot mode for the switch Syntax Syntax Syntax Syntax Syntax Syntax Syntax Where lt dhcp bootp manual auto gt where dhcp look only for DHCP servers on the network for the IP address Disable bootp or other modes bootp look only for bootp servers on the network Disable dhcp or other mode manual do not set the IP address automatically auto the switch will first look for a DHCP server If a DHCP server is not found it will then look for a BootP server If that server is not found the switch will check to see if the switch had a pre configured IP address If it did the switch would be assigned that IP address If the switch did not have a pre configured IP address it would inspect if the IP address 192 168 1 2 with a netmask of 255 255 255 0 is free If the IP address is free MNS 6K will assign the switch that IP address If the address is not
108. 224 0 0 1 The default value is 125 seconds The valid range can be from 60 to 127 seconds Syntax set qri interval lt value gt The query response interval is the maximum amount of time that can elapse between when the querier router sends a host query message and when it receives a response from a host The Default value is 10 seconds The Range can be from 2 to 270 seconds Restrictions apply to the maximum value because of an internal calculation that is dependent on the value of the Query Interval Syntax mode lt 12 normal gt Toggle the IGMP mode from L2 to nnormal or IGMP L2 Chapter 17 GVRP Syntax show gvtp shows whether GVRP is disabled along with the current settings for the maximum number of VLANs and the current Primary VLAN Syntax gvrp lt enable disable gt enable or disable GVRP Syntax show vlan ist all the VLANs including dynamic VLANS on the switch Syntax set ports port lt port list range gt state lt learn block disable gt set the state of the port to learn block or disable for GVRP Note the default state is disable Syntax static vian lt VID gt convert a dynamic VLAN to a static VLAN Syntax set forbid vlan lt tag vlanid gt forbid lt port number list range gt sets the forbid GVRP capability on the ports specified Syntax show forbid display the ports with GVRP forbid capabilities Chapter 18 SNMP Syntax snmp enter the SNMP Configuration mode Syntax snmpv3
109. 32 34 258 INDEX TACACS 87 88 89 90 91 264 265 295 TACACSD 87 tacplus 90 91 264 295 tacserver 90 91 265 295 tag VLAN 106 TCP 25 87 90 92 265 295 telnet 38 39 55 62 63 258 262 telnet enable 38 tftp 46 48 57 250 260 296 timers 126 128 133 134 142 147 148 267 268 ToS 187 188 189 193 271 trap 222 226 233 273 trigger reauth 84 86 264 UDP 80 81 82 85 87 263 UNKNOWN 161 328 user 40 223 229 233 274 useraccess 30 34 40 257 USM 221 223 233 274 VACM 221 222 223 226 232 233 273 274 VID 105 106 107 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 217 272 view 223 228 233 274 virtual LAN See VLAN vlan 108 109 112 114 122 266 VLAN 22 23 94 95 98 99 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 123 209 VLAN identifier 106 Write view 219 xmodem 47 57 260 297 XTACACS 87
110. 5 255 255 0 Gateway Address 192 168 5 1 CLI Mode Manager System Name Magnum 6K25 System Description 25 Port Modular Ethernet Switch System Contact support garrettcom com System Location Fremont CA System Objectld 1 3 6 1 4 1 553 12 6 System Serial No 43576812 Original Factory Config Code 6K25 8TP Magnum6K25 show sysconfig System Name Magnum6K25 System Contact support garrettcom com System Location HO Fremont CA Boot Mode manual Inactivity Timeout min 10 Address Age Interval min 300 Inbound Telnet Enabled Yes Web Agent Enabled Yes Time Zone GMT O8hours 00minutes Day Light Time Rule USA System UpTime 36 Days 7 Hours 49 Mins 48 Secs Magnum6K25 FIGURE 5 Viewing the basic setup parameters You can use show setup or show sysconfig to view setup parameters 27 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Some of the parameters in the Magnum 6K family of switches are shown above The list of parameters below indicates some of the key parameters on the switch and the recommendations for changing them or optionally keeping them the same Privilege levels Two privilege levels are available Manager and Operator Operator is at privilege level 1 and the Manager is at privilege level 2 the privilege increases with the levels For example to set up a user for basic monitoring capabilities use lower number or operator level privilege Level 1 The Manage
111. 5 5 snmp exit Core 192 168 5 5 set prompt b b i b 192 168 5 5 set prompt n b i b Magnum6K25 192 168 5 5 Magnum6K25 192 168 5 5 Magnum6K25 192 168 5 5 Magnum6K25 192 168 5 5 set prompt Some bthing i Some thing192 168 5 5 set prompt Some bthing b i Some thing 192 168 5 5 FIGURE 135 Setting custom prompts Ping command can be used from MNS 6K to test connectivity to other devices as well as checking to see if the IP address is setup correctly The command is Syntax ping lt ipaddress gt count lt 1 999 gt timeout lt 1 256 gt use the ping command to test connectivity Magnum6K25 ping 67 109 247 202 67 109 247 202 is alive count 1 time 40ms Magnum6K25 ping 67 109 247 202 count 3 67 109 247 202 is alive count 1 time 20ms 67 109 247 202 is alive count 2 time 20ms 67 109 247 202 is alive count 3 time 40ms Magnum6K25 FIGURE 136 Using the ping command 247 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Many devices do not respond to ping or block ping commands Make sure that the target device does respond or the network does allow the ping packets to propagate through FTP modes The file transfer protocol or ftp is supported on MNS 6K MNS 6K supports normal ftp as well as passive ftp Passive FTP is used by many companies today to work with firewall policies and other security policies set by companies The commands for setting the type of ftp are Synta
112. 5 rstp rs ring enable RS RING enabled Magnum 6K25 rstp show rs ring RS RING status Enabled RS RING set on ports 13 14 Magnum 6K25 rstp rs ring disable RS RING disabled Magnum 6K25 rstp rs ring del port 13 14 Deleted Ports 13 14 Magnum 6K25 rstp show rs ring RS RING status Disabled RS RING set on ports NONE Magnum 6K25 rstp exit Magnum 6K25 FIGURE 92 RS Ring configuration commands List of commands in this chapter Syntax authorize lt module gt key lt security key gt activate the S Ring capabilities Don t forget to use the save command to save the Rey Syntax stp STP Configuration mode Syntax stp lt enable disable gt Start Enable or stop Disable STP Syntax set stp type lt stp rstp gt set the spanning tree protocol to be IEEE 802 1d or 802 1w Spanning Tree Protocol or Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Syntax show active stp Display which version of STP is currently active Syntax show s ring show the status of S Ring status and configuration Syntax s ting lt enable disable gt enable or disable S Ring capabilities Syntax s ring learn start the learning process to discover the ring and the ports which make up the S Ring Syntax s ring add port lt portl port2 gt define ports which make up the S ring ports Note as discussed earlier you can create multiple S Rings on a switch 166 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Syntax s ring
113. 55 255 255 0 is free If the IP address is free MNS 6K will assign the switch that IP address If the address is not free MNS 6K will poll the network for DHCP server then BootP server then check if the IP address 192 68 1 2 is freed up This mode of assigning the IP address can be changed by using the set bootmode command Syntax set bootmode type lt dhep bootp manual auto gt bootimg lt enable disable gt bootcfg lt enable disable gt assign the boot mode for the switch Where lt dhcp bootp manual auto gt where dhcp look only for DHCP servers on the network for the IP address Disable bootp or other modes bootp look only for bootp servers on the network Disable dhcp or other mode manual do not set the IP address automatically auto the switch will first look for a DHCP server If a DHCP server is not found it will then look for a BootP server If that server is not found the switch will check to see if the switch had a pre configured IP address If it did the switch would be assigned that IP address If the switch did not have a pre configured IP address it would inspect if the IP address 192 168 1 2 with a netmask of 255 255 255 0 is free If the IP address is free MNS 6K will assign the switch that IP address If the address is not free MNS 6K will poll the network for DHCP server then BootP server then check if the IP address 192 68 1 2 is freed up bootimg lt enable disable gt valid
114. 8 235 257 271 272 299 301 IGMP L2 199 200 201 202 207 208 271 272 284 287 IMAP 239 ipconfig 26 33 62 257 261 IPv4 59 60 61 188 189 282 295 IPv6 59 60 61 62 63 261 262 282 295 ISP 77 kill 39 56 259 283 kill config 53 54 kill session 39 40 56 259 283 lacp 181 182 185 270 283 LACP 20 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 270 279 281 283 292 LACPDU 175 177 179 learn 66 68 69 70 75 262 learn port 66 75 262 Link Loss Learn 149 150 See LLL list 46 260 282 Ill 161 162 167 269 LLL 149 150 158 161 162 167 269 Ill add 161 167 269 Ill del 161 162 167 269 loadconf 45 56 259 323 log 46 47 260 282 297 Log and Event Group 230 logout 33 34 258 Management Information Base See MIB Manager 28 manual 37 55 258 mcast 202 207 271 MD5 80 89 mgrip 222 232 273 MIB 80 196 218 223 230 233 274 mode L2 207 mode normal 207 modes of operation 25 MOMENTARY 235 236 237 238 239 more 57 NAS 87 oldconf 46 47 260 282 297 OPEN 161 Operator 28 passwd 29 34 257 passwd user 29 period 237 254 275 PHB 187 ping 247 256 277 ping6 61 63 261 PoE 169 POP3 239 port 126 128 132 134 138 142 146 148 267 268 port security 65 See ps port VLAN 105 port VLANs 107 INDEX portaccess 83 85 264 port mirror 93 101 265
115. 9 70 75 262 signal port 66 75 262 smtp 240 242 243 254 256 275 276 SMTP 239 240 241 242 243 244 255 256 275 216 286 292 294 snmp 42 55 231 247 259 272 SNMP 21 23 35 39 42 66 74 80 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 226 230 231 232 240 241 242 244 252 254 255 256 272 213 215 276 278 285 287 293 294 SNMP engine 219 SNMP group 219 SNMP user 219 SNMPv2c 218 219 snmpv3 222 226 232 272 sntp 44 45 56 sntp enable 45 327 s ring 160 165 166 167 269 286 S Ring ii 20 149 150 151 152 154 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 166 186 268 279 s ring add 160 161 166 167 269 s ring del 160 167 269 s ring enable 160 s ring learn 160 166 269 start 108 110 115 122 266 start vlan 110 static 213 215 272 statistics 231 234 274 stop 113 stp 127 130 134 160 164 165 166 167 267 268 269 STP 20 51 53 80 95 98 99 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 163 164 165 166 167 179 191 236 238 239 267 268 269 282 284 287 291 293 295 296 stp enable 127 130 STP Path cost 141 supplicant 77 79 80 81 85 86 263 264 Supplicant 77 SUSTAINED 235 236 237 238 sync 44 45 56 sysname 247 TAB
116. ATUS 1 Default VLAN Static Active VLAN 10 is converted to a 2 Blue Static Active static VLAN 10 dyni0 Static Active FIGURE 125 Converting a dynamic VLAN to a static VLAN 213 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Tagged or Untagged Auto Forbid Learn Generate advertisements Receive Do not allow the Forward advertisements advertisements and port to become a for other VLANs dynamically join any member of this Receive advertisements advertised VLAN that VLAN and dynamically join any has the same VID as advertised VLAN the static VLAN Block Generate advertisements Receive Do not allow the Forward advertisements advertisements and VLAN on this received from other ports dynamically join any port to other VLANs advertised VLAN that Do not dynamically join has the same VID any advertised VLAN Disable Ignore GVRP and drop Ignore GVRP and Do not allow the all GVRP advertisements drop all GVRP VLAN on this advertisements port FIGURE 126 GVRP options As the above table indicates a port that has a tagged or untagged static VLAN has the option to both generate advertisements and dynamically join other VLANs The unknown VLAN parameters are configured on a per interface basis using the CLI The tagged untagged Auto and Forbid options are configured in the VLAN context Since dynamic VLANs operate as tagged VLANs and it is possible that a tagged port on one device may not communicate with an unta
117. CHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE 11 TP 10 100 128 2000000 Disabled 00 0b 12 TP 10 100 128 2000000 Disabled 00 0c 13 TP 10 100 100 250000 Forwarding 00 00 00 20 06 25 ed 89 00 0d 14 TP 10 100 128 2000000 Disabled 00 0e 15 TP 10 100 128 2000000 Disabled 00 0f 16 TP 10 100 128 2000000 Disabled 00 10 Magnum6K25 rstp timers forward delay 20 hello 5 age 30 Successfully set the bridge time parameters Magnum6K25 rstp show stp config RSTP CONFIGURATION Rapid STP STP Enabled Global YES RSTP STP Enabled Ports 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Protocol Normal RSTP Bridge ID 00 00 00 20 06 25 ed 89 Bridge Priority 0 Bridge Forward Delay 20 Bridge Hello Time 05 Bridge Max Age 30 Root Port 0 Root Path Cost 0 Designated Root 00 00 00 20 06 25 ed 89 Designated Root Priority 0 Root Bridge Forward Delay 20 Root Bridge Hello Time 05 Root Bridge Max Age 30 Topology Change count 0 Time Since topology Chg 567 Magnum6K25 rstp exit Magnum6K25 FIGURE 83 Configuring RSTP on MNS 6K List of commands in this chapter Syntax set stp type lt stp rstp gt Set the switch to support RSTP or change it back to STP Need to save and reboot the switch after this command Syntax rstp enter the RSTP configuration mode Syntax rstp lt enable disable gt enable RSTP by default this is disabled and has to be manually activated 147 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Syntax port port
118. CS authentication with the local user based authentication There are two stages a user goes through in TACACS The first stage 88 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE is authentication where the user is verified against the network user database The second stage is authorization where it is determined whether the user has operator access or manager privileges TACACS Packet Packet encryption is a supported and is a configurable option for the Magnum MNS 6K software When encrypted all authentication and authorization TACACS packets are encrypted and are not readable by protocol capture and sniffing devices such as EtherReal or others Packet data is hashed and shared using MD5 and secret string defined between the Magnum 6K family of switches and the TACACS server 32 bits wide Major Minor Packet type Sequence no Flags Version Version Session ID Length FIGURE 61 TACACS packet format e Major Version The major TACACS version number e Minor version The minor TACACS version number This is intended to allow revisions to the TACACS protocol while maintaining backwards compatibility e Packet type Possible values are TAC_PLUS_AUTHEN 0x01 Authentication TAC_PLUS_AUTHOR 0x02 Authorization TAC_PLUS_ACCT 0x03 Accounting e Sequence number The sequence number of the current packet for the current session e Flags This field contains various flags in the form of bitmaps The flag values
119. F 3 ia 4 gt 5 Es Magnum6K25 smtp sendmail server 10 21 1 2 to jack garrettcom com from support garrettcom com subject test body hello A test email is sent to Jack to test email connectivity This email will not work as SMTP was disabled Magnum6K25 smtp smtp enable SMTP Alert is enabled eee command after SMTP is enabled will Magnum6K25 smtp sendmail server 10 21 1 2 to jack garrettcom com from support garrettcom com subject test body hello Magnum6K25 smtp show smtp config SMTP Global Configuration Status Enabled SMTP Server IP 67 109 247 195 SMTP Server Port 25 Retry Count 3 Magnum6K25 smtp smtp disable SMTP Alert is disabled Magnum6K25 smtp show smtp config SMTP Global Configuration Status Disabled SMTP Server IP 67 109 247 195 SMTP Server Port 25 Retry Count 3 243 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Magnum6K25 smip exit Magnum6K25 FIGURE 132 setting SMTP to receive SNMP trap information via email Email alerts can be forwarded to be received by other devices such as Cell phones pagers etc Most interfaces to SMTP are already provided by the cell phone service provider or the paging service provider Serial Connectivity When using the serial connectivity with applications such as Hyper terminal etc it may be necessary to optimize the character delays so that the FIFO buffer used in the
120. GUIDE Syntax show rmon lt stats hist event alarm gt st the specific RMON data as defined by the group Hype Chapter 19 Miscellaneous Commands Syntax alarm enter the alarm configuration mode Syntax add event lt event id list range all gt enables alarm action in response to the specified event ID Syntax period time lt 1 10 gt sets the duration of relay action for the momentary type signal This may be needed to adjust to the behavior of the circuit or relay Default is 3 seconds Time is in seconds Syntax del event lt event id list range all gt disables alarm action in response to the specified event ID Syntax alarm lt enable disable gt g obally enables or disables the alarm action Syntax show alarm displays the current status of Alarm system Syntax smtp configure the SNMP alerts to be sent via email Syntax show smtp lt config recipients gt config displays the current SMTP global settings and recipients displays the currently configured recipients of email alerts Syntax add id lt 1 5 gt email lt email addr gt traps lt all none S R E gt events lt all none I A C F D gt ip lt ip addr gt port lt 1 65535 gt id mandatory the recipient ID range from 1 to 5 MNS 6K allows a maximum of 5 recipients email mandatory email address of the recipient traps optional this is the trap filter If value is all all traps of any type will be sent to t
121. IGMP L2 is used when there is no L3 device in the network Magnum6K25 igmp Magnum6K25 igmp igmp enable IGMP is enabled Magnum6K25 igmp show igmp IGMP State Enabled ImmediateLeave Disabled Querier Enabled Querier Interval 125 Querier Response Interval 10 Multicasting unknown streams Enabled Magnum6K25 igmp mcast disable 202 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE MCAST is disabled Magnum6K25 igmp show igmp IGMP State Enabled ImmediateLeave Disabled Querier Enabled Querier Interval 125 Querier Response Interval 10 Multicasting unknown streams Disabled Magnum6K25 igmp igmp disable IGMP is disabled Magnum6K25 igmp show igmp IGMP State Disabled ImmediateLeave Disabled Querier Disabled Querier Interval 2125 Querier Response Interval 10 Multicasting unknown streams Disabled Magnum6K25 igmp FIGURE 117 Enabling IGMP and query the status of IGMP The output of show igmp provide useful information The following information is provided IGMP State shows if IGMP is turned on Enable or off Disable Immediate Leave provides a mechanism for a particular host that wants to leave a multicast group It disables the port where the leave message is received ability to transmit multicast traffic Querier shows where the switch is acting a querier or a non querier In the example above the switch is the querier Querier Interval show
122. ITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Magnum6K25 auth show port reauth Port Reauth Status Reauth Period sec 1 Enabled 300 2 Enabled 3600 3 Enabled 3600 4 Enabled 3600 5 Enabled 3600 6 Enabled 3600 7 Enabled 3600 8 Enabled 3600 9 Enabled 3600 10 Enabled 3600 11 Enabled 3600 12 Enabled 3600 13 Enabled 3600 14 Enabled 3600 15 Enabled 3600 16 Enabled 3600 Magnum6K25 auth show stats port these statistics Port 3 Authentication Counters authEntersConnecting authEapLogoffsWhileConnecting authEntersAuthenticating authAuthSuccessesWhileAuthenticating authAuthTimeoutsWhileAuthenticating authAuthFailWhileAuthenticating authAuthReauthsWhileAuthenticating authAuthEapStartsWhileAuthenticating authAuthEapLogoffWhileAuthenticating authAuthReauthsWhileAuthenticated authAuthEapStartsWhileAuthenticated authAuthEapLogoffWhileAuthenticated backendResponses backendAccessChallenges backendOtherRequests ToSupplicant backendNonNakResponsesFromSupplicant backendAuthSuccesses backendAuthFails Magnum6K25 auth trigger reauth port 3 Successfully triggered re authentication ONNONNDVVDOVOOHODVONWOW FIGURE 59 securing the network using port access 84 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE List of commands in this chapter Syntax auth configuration mode to configure the 802 1x parameters Syntax show auth lt config ports gt show the 802 1 configuration or port status Syntax authserver ip lt ip add
123. K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE 9 UP 100 DOWN 11 6 DOWN 12 5 DOWN 13 UP 14 DOWN 15 DOWN 16 DOWN Magnum6K25 qos show portweight Port priority Weight set to 1 High 1 Low Magnum6K25 qos set weight weight 4 Magnum6K25 qos show portweight Port priority Weight set to 8 High 1 Low Magnum6K25 qos show qos PORT QOS STATUS 9 None UP 10 Port DOWN 11 Tag DOWN 12 Tag DOWN 13 None UP 14 None DOWN 15 None DOWN 16 None DOWN FIGURE 112 QoS configuration and setup List of commands in this chapter Syntax qos enter the QoS configuration mode Syntax setqos type lt port tag tos none gt port lt port list range gt priority lt high low gt tos lt 0 63 list range gt tag lt 0 7 list range gt depending on the type of OOS the corresponding field has to be set For example for OOS type tag the tag levels have to be set and for QOS type ToS the ToS levels have to be set If the priority field is not set it then defaults to low priority ToS has 64 levels and the valid values are 0 63 and a tagged packet has 8 levels and the valid values are 0 7 Syntax set weight weight lt 0 7 gt sets the port priority weight for All the ports Once the weight is set all the ports will be the same weight across the switch The valid value for weight is 0 7 Syntax show pottweight display the weight settings on a
124. L as follows ftp m6kuser m6kuser ftp garrettcom com 3 After successful login select the proper folder for downloading the proper MNS 6K software as shown in Figure 2 Select the MNS 6K software version based on the information provided in Table 1 305 UPDATING MNS 6K STEP 1 4 5 J ftp ftp garrettcom com Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Qax search Folders E7 Address ftp ftp garrettcom com Name Size Type Modified Folder Tasks GRel2 File Folder 4 19 2004 12 00 AM File Folder 8 27 2004 1 53 PM Rename this folder Move this folder D Copy this folder X Delete this folder FIGURE 142 Select the proper version to use after successful login Navigate to the folder MNS OK See Figure 3 There are other folders with additional software MIBs as well as additional useful information for the Magnum 6K switches which you may want to use later From the MNS 6K folder download the latest Release Notes as well as the file labeled Relx x bin where x x would be the release number For example for release 3 0 the file will be Rel3 0 bin The release numbers increase with new releases so the higher the number the recent the release is The release notes provide additional information on the latest features and functionality plus any other additional information not covered in the manuals ft ftp ftp garrettcom com Rel3 Microsoft Inte
125. LE 0 Not Configured 15 ENABLE NONE NONE DISABLE 0 Not Configured 16 ENABLE NONE NONE DISABLE 0 Not Configured Magnum6K25 port security FIGURE 50 Enabling learning on a port Note after the learning is enabled the port security can be queried to find the status of MAC addresses learnt If there were machines connected to this port the MAC address would be shown on port 11 as they are shown on port 9 Magnum6K25 port security allow mac 00 c1 00 7f ec 00 port 9 11 13 Specified MAC address es allowed on selected port s Magnum6K25 port security show port security port 9 11 13 PORT STATE SIGNAL ACTION LEARN COUNT MAC ADDRESS 9 ENABLE LOG NONE ENABLE 6 00 e0 29 2a f1 bd 68 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE 00 01 03 e2 27 89 00 07 50 ef 31 40 00 e0 29 22 15 85 00 03 47 ca ac 45 00 30 48 70 71 23 00 c1 00 7f ec 00 11 ENABLE NONE NONE ENABLE 0 00 c1 00 7f ec 00 13 ENABLE NONE NONE DISABLE 0 00 c1 00 7f ec 00 FIGURE 51 Allowing specific MAC address on specific ports After the MAC address is specified the port or specific ports or a range of ports can be queried as shown Magnum6K25 port security remove mac 00 c1 00 7f ec 00 port 13 Specified MAC address es removed from selected port s Magnum6K25 port security show port security port 13 PORT STATE SIGNAL ACTION LEARN COUNT MAC ADDRESS 13 ENABLE LOG NONE ENABLE 0 Not Configured Magnum6K25 port security
126. Magnum6K25 smtp Magnum6K25 smtp show smtp config SMTP Global Configuration Status Disabled SMTP Server IP 67 109 247 195 Note there are two recipients multiple SMTP Server Port 25 recipients can be added they have to be comma Retry Count 73 separated and there should be no spaces between each name Magnum6K25 smtp show smtp recipients ID E mail Address SMTP Server Port Traps Events Recipient successfully added Jsmith will only receive Critical or Fatal SNMP traps Magnum6K25 smtp show smtp recipients ID E mail Address SMTP Server Port Traps Events 1 rk gci sys gci com 67 109 247 195 25 All All 2 jsmith gci com 67 109 247 195 25 S CF 3 Be 2 4 an amp 5 be i au Magnum6K25 smtp delete id 2 Recipient successfully deleted Magnum6K25 smtp show smtp recipients ID E mail Address SMTP Server Port Traps Events 242 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Magnum6K25 smtp add id 2 email jsmith garrettcom com traps S events CF ip 192 168 10 13 Jsmith will receive Critical and Fatal SNMP traps on a different SMTP server than the other users You may Recipient successfully added want to do that if you expect a higher traffic load and don t want to throttle a SMTP server Magnum6K25 smtp show smtp recipients ID E mail Address SMTP Server Port Traps Events 1 rk gci sys gci com 67 109 247 195 25 All All 2 jsmith gci com 192 168 10 13 25 S C
127. N However the dynamic VLAN re appears after the reboot if GVRP is enabled and the switch again receives advertisements for that VLAN through a port configured to add dynamic VLANs By receiving advertisements from other devices running GVRP the switch learns of static VLANs from those devices and dynamically automatically creates tagged VLANs on the links to the advertising devices Similarly the switch advertises its static VLANs to other GVRP aware devices A GVRP enabled switch does not advertise any GVRP learned VLANs out of the port s on which it originally learned of those VLANs 216 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE List of commands in this chapter Syntax show gvtp shows whether GVRP is disabled along with the current settings for the maximum number of VLANs and the current Primary VLAN Syntax gvrp lt enable disable gt enable or disable GVRP Syntax show vlan ist all the VLANs including dynamic VLANs on the switch Syntax set ports port lt port list range gt state lt learn block disable gt set the state of the port to learn block or disable for GVRP Note the default state is disable Syntax static vian lt VID gt convert a dynamic VLAN to a static VLAN Syntax set forbid vlan lt tag vlanid gt forbid lt port number list range gt sets the forbid GVRP capability on the ports specified Syntax show forbid display the ports with GVRP forbid capabilities 217 Chapter
128. NENNENNN 866K of 2578K Elapsed 00 07 13 Remaining 00 14 17 Throughput 2046 cps FIGURE 154 File upload status window under Xmodem using HyperTerminal under Windows XP Once the transfer is complete the dialog is shown in Figure 15 315 UPDATING SOFTWARE STEP 3 Upgrade is Successful Please reboot Magnum 6Kxx to start the application Magnum6K25 reboot Proceed on rebooting the switch Y or N Y Do you wish to save current configuration Y or N Y Lhe switch will now reboot After the reboot the Magnum 6K switch may prompt you should the boot code need an update If prompted say Y to update the boot code After the reboot and login verify the MNS 6K software was upgraded Magnum6K25 show version MNS 6K Ver 3 4 Date Mar 31 2006 Time 17 06 23 Build ID 1143853580 FIGURE 155 upgrading the switch using the serial interface Network Access Prerequisites make sure the directory and the file name of the MNS OK software image downloaded in steps 1 and 2 is known To upgrade using TFTP or FTP ensure that the FTP or TFTP server is set up and the switch can ping the TFTP or the FTP server and vice versa Ensure that the server has access to the MNS 6K software image downloaded in step 2 Make sure the MNS OK software image file is copied to the default folder specified by the FTP or TFTP server If using FTP services make sure the FTP access information login name and password i
129. P CONFIGURATION Rapid STP STP Enabled Global YES RSTP STP Enabled Ports 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Protocol Normal RSTP Bridge ID 00 00 00 20 06 25 ed 89 Bridge Priority 0 Bridge Forward Delay 215 Bridge Hello Time 02 Bridge Max Age 20 Root Port 0 Root Path Cost 0 Designated Root 00 00 00 20 06 25 ed 89 138 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Designated Root Priority 0 Root Bridge Forward Delay 215 Root Bridge Hello Time 02 Root Bridge Max Age 20 Topology Change count 0 Time Since topology Chg 712 FIGURE 79 Enabling RSTP and reviewing the RSTP variables The variables listed by the show stp config command are Rapid Spanning Tree Enabled Global indicates whether STP is enabled or disabled globally i e if the values is YES all ports have STP enabled otherwise all ports have STP disabled Rapid Spanning Tree Enabled Ports indicates which ports have RSTP enabled Protocol indicates type of RSTP protocol active Bridge Priority specifies the switch bridge priority value This value is used along with the switch MAC address to determine which switch in the network is the root device Lower values mean higher priority Value ranges from 0 to 65535 Default value is 0 Bridge Forward Delay indicates the time duration the switch will wait from listening to learning states and from learning to forwarding states The value ranges from 4 to 30 seconds Default value is 15 Bri
130. Ring Operation Magnum6K25 show s ring Magnum Ring Status sRing Status ENABLED Port 1 Port 2 Status 1 7 CLOSED FIGURE 88 S Ring configuration commands for root switch If the BPDU stream is broken or it finds the Link Loss Learn signal the system will immediately force STP to put both ports in forwarding mode Should that happen the ring status will be displayed as OPEN If the ring sees BPDUs not belonging to itself on any of the ports it will set the ring to UNKNOWN state and stop all ring activity on that ring The ring activity has several timers and safeguards to prevent erroneous operation Ring faults are not expected to happen in quick successions If the ring system sees a sequence of changes in the duration of a less than a second each it will temporarily ignore the signals and leave STP to reconfigure the ring network using the normal IEEE 802 1d algorithms With S Ring it is also critical to setup and configure Link Loss Learn as the S ring can recover from fault situations a lot faster For configuring LLL use the commands listed below Syntax Ill lt enable disable gt enable or disable LLL on the switch If STP is enabled Link Loss Learn will not work even though it was enabled LLL is not enabled on the root node Syntax W add port lt port list range gt enable LLL on the list of specified ports Syntax Ill del port lt port list range gt disable LLL on the list o
131. S 6K information most notably clear addr clears the addresses learnt or clear log to clear the logs and the type of logs clear log clear logs or specific type of logs fatal alert crit error warn note info d ebug climode lt scripticonsolelshow gt set the interactive CLI mode on console or off script To see the mode use the show option com2sec lt add delete gt id lt id gt secname lt name gt source lt soutce gt community lt community gt a part of the View based Access control model VACM as defined in RFC 2275 This specifies the mapping from a source community pair to a security name On MNS 6K up to 10 entries can be specified command lt Enter gt options for a command community write lt write community gt read lt read community gt trap lt trap community gt set the necessary community strings configure access sets the access parameters e g disable telnet session cost port lt number list range gt value lt 0 65535 gt cost is specific to a port and the port s have to be specified configure port security sets the port authorization based on MAC addresses configure vlan type port enter the VLAN configuration commands cost port lt number list range gt value lt 0 65535 gt cost is specific to a port and the port s have to be specified deftrap community lt string gt
132. Seconds Eventlid Description 1 S RING OPEN 2 Cold Start 3 Warm Start 4 Link Up 5 Link Down 6 Authentication Failure 7 RMON Raising Alarm 8 RMON Falling Alarm 9 Intruder Alarm 10 Link Loss Learn Triggered 11 Broadcast Storm Detected 12 STP RSTP Reconfigured Magnum6K25 alarm alarm enable Alarm system Enabled Magnum6K25 alarm show alarm Alarm Events Configuration Alarm Status ENABLED Relay Closure Time Period 5 Seconds Eventlid Description S RING OPEN Cold Start Warm Start Link Up Link Down Authentication Failure RMON Raising Alarm NOOROD MOMENTARY MOMENTARY MOMENTARY MOMENTARY MOMENTARY MOMENTARY MOMENTARY MOMENTARY Mode SUSTAINED MOMENTARY MOMENTARY MOMENTARY MOMENTARY MOMENTARY MOMENTARY MOMENTARY MOMENTARY MOMENTARY MOMENTARY MOMENTARY Mode SUSTAINED MOMENTARY MOMENTARY MOMENTARY MOMENTARY MOMENTARY MOMENTARY 238 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE 8 RMON Falling Alarm MOMENTARY 9 Intruder Alarm MOMENTARY 10 Link Loss Learn Triggered MOMENTARY 11 Broadcast Storm Detected MOMENTARY 12 STP RSTP Reconfigured MOMENTARY Magnum6K25 alarm alarm disable Alarm system Disabled Magnum6K25 alarm del event 1 3 5 7 Alarm Event s Deleted 1 3 5 7 Magnum6K25 alarm show alarm Alarm Events Configuration Alarm Status DISABLED Relay Closure Time Period 5 Seconds Eventlid Description Mode 1 S RING OPEN NOT ENABLED 2 Co
133. Syntax alarm lt enable disable gt globally enables or disables the alarm action Syntax show alarm displays the current status of Alarm system Magnum6K25 alarm Magnum6K25 alarm add event 2 Alarm Event s Added 2 Magnum6K25 alarm add event 1 5 Event 2 is Already Enabled Alarm Event s Added 1 3 4 5 Magnum6K25 alarm add event 6 8 Alarm Event s Added 6 8 Magnum6K25 alarm add event all Event 1 is Already Enabled Event 2 is Already Enabled Event 3 is Already Enabled Event 4 is Already Enabled Event 5 is Already Enabled Event 6 is Already Enabled Event 8 is Already Enabled Alarm Event s Added 7 9 10 11 12 Magnum6K25 alarm del event 2 Alarm Event s Deleted 2 Magnum6K25 alarm period time 5 Relay closure Time Set Magnum6K25 alarm show alarm Alarm Events Configuration Alarm Status DISABLED Relay Closure Time Period 5 Seconds Eventld Description Mode 1 S RING OPEN SUSTAINED 2 Cold Start NOT ENABLED 3 Warm Start MOMENTARY 4 Link Up MOMENTARY 237 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE 5 Link Down 6 Authentication Failure 7 RMON Raising Alarm 8 RMON Falling Alarm 9 Intruder Alarm 10 Link Loss Learn Triggered 11 Broadcast Storm Detected 12 STP RSTP Reconfigured Magnum6K25 alarm add event 2 Alarm Event s Added 2 Magnum6K25 alarm show alarm Alarm Events Configuration Alarm Status DISABLED Relay Closure Time Period 5
134. TCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE VLANs must be disabled in GVRP unawarte devices to allow tagged packets to pass through A GVRP awate port receiving advertisements has these options e If there is no static VLAN with the advertised VID on the receiving port then dynamically create a VLAN with the same VID as in the advertisement and allow that VLAN s traffic e If the switch already has a static VLAN with the same VID as in the advertisement and the port is configured to learn for that VLAN then the port will dynamically join the VLAN and allow that VLAN s traffic e Ignore the advertisement for that VID and drop all GVRP traffic with that VID e Don t participate in that VLAN A port belonging to a tagged or untagged static VLAN has these configurable options e Send VLAN advertisements and also receive advertisements for VLANs on other ports and dynamically join those VLANs e Send VLAN advertisements but ignore advertisements received from other ports e Avoid GVRP participation by not sending advertisements and dropping any advertisements received from other devices Unknown Operations VLAN Mode Learn Enables the port to dynamically join any VLAN for which it recetves and advertisement and allows the port to forward the advertisement it receives Block Prevents the port from dynamically joining a VLAN that is not statically configured on the switch The port will still forward advertisements that were received by the swit
135. TEP 1 2 Enough disk space to store and retrieve the configuration files as well as copy software files from GarrettCom We recommend at least 15MB of disk space for this purpose 3 Connection to the Internet Make sure the connection does not block FTP file transfers 4 IP address of the switch that is being upgraded Along with that the manager level account name and password is also needed 5 Connection to the GarrettCom Magnum 6K switch Make sure the Intranet over which the software update will occur does not block FTP or TFTP traffic Selecting the proper version The first step is to ensure that you have the proper version of the MNS 6K software To access the proper software you will require access to the GarrettCom web site and ftp site through a network which does not block ftp file transfers If your site blocks ftp file transfer traffic please contact your system administrator to figure out how to access the GarrettCom site to download the necessary software First determine the version of the software on your switch To do that use the command show version after connecting to the switch and logging in as manager with the proper password If the password is lost or forgotten please contact GarrettCom Inc customer support at Phone 510 438 9071 email support garrettcom com The table below lists the current MNS 6K version number and software version upgrade path for the MNS 6K Table A4 1 Software upgrad
136. TP GarrettCom recommends that you employ RSTP or STP in your network Transition from STP to RSTP IEEE 802 1w RSTP is designed to be compatible with IEEE 802 1D STP Even if all the other devices in your network are using STP you can enable RSTP on your Magnum 6K family of switches The default configuration values of the RSTP available in MNS 6K software will ensure that your switch will interoperate effectively with the existing STP devices RSTP automatically detects when the switch ports are connected to non RSTP devices using spanning tree and communicates with those devices using 802 1d STP BPDU packets Even though RSTP interoperates with STP RSTP is so much more efficient at establishing the network path and the network convergence in case of a failure is very fast For this reason 136 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE GarrettCom recommends that all your network devices be updated to support RSTP RSTP offers convergence times typically of less than one second However to make best use of RSTP and achieve the fastest possible convergence times there are some changes that you should make to the RSTP default configuration GarrettCom Inc provides downloadable software Fault Timing Analyzer FTA for testing how quickly a network recovers from a fault once the redundancy feature such as STP or RSTP is configured on the switches bridges This software can be downloaded from the GarrettCom site This software is available
137. TP System Clock Set to Default Note 01 01 2001 12 01 32 A M WEB Session Started from SWM 192 168 5 2 Note 01 01 2001 12 01 47 A M WEB User manager Login From SWM 192 168 5 2 Note 01 01 2001 12 04 16 A M SYSMGR Loaded Application Ver 3 7 Note 01 01 2001 12 00 00 A M SYSMGR System Was Rebooted By HW Watchdog Note 01 01 2001 12 00 00 A M SNTP System Clock Set to Default Note 01 01 2001 12 01 13 A M WEB Session Started from SWM 192 168 5 2 Note 01 01 2001 12 01 25 A M WEB User manager Login From SWM 192 168 5 2 Note 04 23 2007 09 57 01 A M SNTP System Time Zone Set to 08 00 Note 04 23 2007 05 59 02 P M SNTP SNTP Client Started Note 04 23 2007 05 59 09 P M SNTP SNTP Time Synchronized Note 04 23 2007 05 59 10 P M SNTP SNTP Time Synchronized Note 04 23 2007 05 59 36 P M CLI Session Started from Telnet 192 168 5 2 Note 04 23 2007 05 59 39 P M SNTP SNTP Time Synchronized Note 04 23 2007 05 59 40 P M SNTP SNTP Time Synchronized Note 04 23 2007 05 59 49 P M CLI User manager Login From Telnet 192 168 5 2 Note 04 23 2007 06 11 32 P M CLI Session Timed Out for User manager on Telnet Note 04 23 2007 06 11 32 P M CLI Session Term User manager on Telnet Note 04 23 2007 06 18 05 P M CLI Session Started from Telnet 192 168 5 2 Note 04 23 2007 06 18 16 P M CLI User manager Login From Telnet 192 168 5 2 Magnum6K25 clear log Clear Logged Events Y or N Y Magnum6K25 show log Magnum6K25 72 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER G
138. This allows the buffer management of the serial port on the Magnum 6K family of switches Miscellaneous commands Some of the commands listed below may be useful in repeating several commands over and over again They are Syntax V repeat the last command Syntax lt n gt repeat the n th command as indicated by a show history Syntax show history show the last 25 commands executed if less than 25 commands are executed only those commands executed are shown If the user logs out or if the switch times out the history is erased The history count restarts when the user logs in again Syntax lt Up artow gt every time the key is pressed the last command is printed on the screen but not executed This allows for editing errors made in typing Syntax lt Down artrow gt opposite of Up arrow key Syntax show version displays the version of MNS 6K being used Magnum6K25 show version MNS 6K Ver 3 6 Date Oct 20 2006 Time 17 22 35 Build ID 1161390154 Magnum6K25 show setup Version Magnum 6K25 build 3 6 Oct 20 2006 17 22 35 MAC Address 00 20 06 25 ed 80 IP Address 67 109 247 197 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 224 Gateway Address 67 109 247 193 CLI Mode Manager System Name pierpaolo System Description 25 Port Modular Ethernet Switch System Contact Support garrettcom com System Location HQ Fremont CA System Objectld gt 1 3 6 1 4 1 553 12 6 Magnum6K25 show serial 245
139. U FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGURE 48 Enabling and disabling port security Yip etc When using the fip command use the host command discussed later in this section t define the ET SRL Ld RECERCAT REET LOTEST CAT CER TOT OT TORT RE 39 displaying configuration for different modules Note multiple modules can be eped OM LUC COM ANG UNE nsec Riviidics usriatsMen a a a nati a aa RE 40 Erasing configuration without erasing the IP address sssrin RE 41 Display the serial number factory code and other relevant setup information RE AZ COM Oia LP UG scsi cinta sens ciate alisideayas an ae een a RE 43 Changing password for a given account RE 44 Port security configuration mode RE 45 Port security configuration mode RE 46 Port security allowing specific MAC addresses on a specified port No spaces betiveen Specie MAC addresses anitiinanahananiienma ana aain RE 47 Port security the port learns the MAC addresses Note a maximum of 200 MAC addresses can be learnt per port and a maximum of 500 per switch Also the action on the port must be set to none before the port earns the MAC address INPOTAN ON iE EEEE REEE EEEE ETETE EEEE xii 42 ses OF FIGURE 49 Viewing port security settings on a switch On port 9 learning is enabled This port has 6 stations connected to it with the MAC addresses as shown Other ports have learning disable
140. UIDE Au FIGURE 55 Show log and clear log command The show log command indicates the type of log activity in the S column The log shows the most recent intrusion at the top of the listing If the log is filled when the switch detects a new intrusion the oldest entry is dropped off the listing As discussed in the prior section any port can be set to monitor security as well as make a log on the intrusions that take place The logs for the intrusions are stored on the switch When the switch detects an intrusion on a port it sets an alert flag for that port and makes the intrusion information available The default log size is 50 rows To change the log size use the set logsize command When the switch detects an intrusion attempt on a port it records the date and time stamp the MAC address the port on which the access was attempted and the action taken by MNS 6K software The event log lists the most recently detected security violation attempts This provides a chronological entry of all intrusions attempted on a specific port The event log records events as single line entries listed in chronological order and serves as a tool for isolating problems Each event log entry is composed of four fields Severity the level of severity see below Date date the event occurred on See Chapter 3 on setting the date and time on the switch Time time the event occurred on See Chapter 3 on setting the date an
141. UIDE Syntax set time hour lt 0 23 gt min lt 0 59 gt sec lt 0 59 gt zone GMT hh mm sets the time as well as the timezone Syntax set timeformat format lt 12 24 gt sets the display time in the 12 24 hour mode Syntax set daylight country lt country name gt sets the daylight saving time Syntax setsntp server lt ipaddress gt timeout lt 1 10 gt retry lt 1 3 gt setup the SNIP server Syntax syne hour lt 0 24 gt min lt 0 59 gt setup the frequency at which the SNTP server is queried Syntax sntp enable disable enables or disables the SNTP services Syntax saveconf mode lt serial tftp ftp gt lt ipaddress gt file lt name gt saves the configuration on the network using tftp fip or serial protocols Syntax loadconf mode lt serial tftp ftp gt lt ipaddress gt file lt name gt oads the previously saved configuration from the network using tftp fip or serial protocols Syntax kill config save module_name resets the system configuration The module_name option does not reset the specific module parameters The modules are system event port bridge stp ps mirror snip vlan gvrp and snmp Syntax show session display telnet sessions active on the switch Syntax kill session id lt session gt ki a specific telnet session Syntax set ftp mode lt normal passive gt set the fip mode of operation Syntax show ftp display the current fip operation mod
142. UM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE 14 TP 10 100 128 Disabled 80 00 00 20 06 25 ed 80 15 TP 10 100 128 Disabled 80 00 00 20 06 25 ed 80 16 TP 10 100 128 Disabled 80 00 00 20 06 25 ed 80 Magnum6K25 stp priority value 15535 Successfully set the bridge priority Magnum6K25 stp show stp config STP is now enabled Note the default values for the different variables discussed STP CONFIGURATION Spanning Tree Enabled Global YES Spanning Tree Enabled Ports YES 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Protocol Normal STP Bridge ID 80 00 00 20 06 25 ed 80 Bridge Priority 15535 Bridge Forward Delay 2 15 Bridge Hello Time 2 Bridge Max Age 20 Root Port 0 Root Path Cost 0 Designated Root 80 00 00 20 06 25 ed 80 Designated Root Priority 15535 Root Bridge Forward Delay 2 15 Root Bridge Hello Time 2 Root Bridge Max Age 20 RSTP CONFIGURATION Rapid STP STP Enabled Global NO Magnum6K25 stp priority port 13 value 20 Successfully set the priority for port 13 Magnum6K2 show st ts Sanumeneseth Note on Port 13 the priority changed however the Path STP Port Configuration e Cost did not till the cost command is issued Priority Path Cost State Forwarding 80 00 00 20 06 25 ed 80 Disabled 80 00 00 20 06 25 ed 80 Disabled 80 00 00 20 06 25 ed 80 Disabled 80 00 00 20 06 25 ed 80 Forwarding 80 00 00 20 06 25 ed 80 Disabled 80 00 00 20 06 25 ed 80 Disabled 80 00 00 20 06 25 ed 80 128 100 Disabled 80 0
143. a security name On MNS 6K up to 10 entries can be specified Syntax group lt add delete gt id lt id gt groupname lt name gt model lt v1 v2c usm gt com2secid lt com2sec id gt a part of the View based Access control model VACM as defined in RFC 2275 This command defines the mapping from sec model or a sec name to a group A sec model is one of v1 v2c or usm On MNS 6K up to 10 entries can be specified Syntax show gtroup id lt id gt display all or specific group entries id is optional and is the number corresponding to the group entry number in the table Syntax view lt add delete gt id lt id gt viewname lt name gt type lt included excluded gt subtree lt oid gt mask lt hex string gt a part of the View based Access control model VACM as defined in RFC 2275 This command defines a manager or group or manager stations what it can access inside the MIB object tree On MNS 6K up to 10 entries can be specified Syntax show view id lt id gt display all or specific view entries id is optional and is the number corresponding to the view entry number in the table Syntax user lt add delete gt id lt id gt username lt name gt usertype lt readonly readwrite gt authpass lt pass phrase gt privpass lt pass phrase gt level lt noauth auth priv gt subtree lt oid gt jor quickly adding or deleting v3 USM based security this command adds user entries MNS 6K allows u
144. able to delete MAC address from FDB BRIDGE Unable to insert MAC address to FDB BRIDGE Bridge init failed for ethx BRIDGE Bridge enable for ethx failed BRIDGE Bridge MIB init is done CLI Manager login at console CLI Operator login at console CLI Manager password changed CLI Operator password changed DEVICE Port x enabled DEVICE Port x disabled DEVICE Port X link down DEVICE _ Port X link up DEVICE Ethernet counters init failure DEVICE Unable to access ethernet counters DEVICE Failed to read saved system logs DEVICE Ethernet DMA init failure DEVICE Ethernet hardware error DEVICE Ethernet interrupt init failure DEVICE Unable to allocate ethernet memory DEVICE System started DEVICE Network Stack not yet configured DEVICE _ IP address a b c d configured DEVICE subnetmask a b c d configured DEVICE Default gateway a b c d configured DEVICE Switch rebooted by user DEVICE No saved system logs DEVICE Timezone set to x DEVICE Country set to x no DST DEVICE Country set to x DST valid DEVICE Time set tox y z HH MM SS tz a DEVICE Date set tox y z HH MM YYYY PRTMR Enabled by user monitor x sniffer y PRTMR Disabled by user PS INTRUDER a b c d e f port X port disabled PS INTRUDER a b c d e f port X port disabled PS Port security enabled PS port security dis
145. abled PS Resetting MAC a b c d e f at port X failed PS Unable to delete learnt MACs in hardware 251 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Subsystem Description Severity RMON Alarm internal error unable to get memory F RMON Alarm internal error unable to get memory for alarm entry F RMON History internal error unable to get memory for history control F entry RMON History internal error unable to get memory for history data F entry RMON History internal error unable to get memory F RMON Event unable to get memory for event entry F RMON Alarm unable to get memory for RMON logs F RMON rising alarm trap sent to a b c d by alarm entry X I RMON falling alarm trap sent to a b c d by alarm entry X I RMON RMON init is done I RMON history control entry X is set to valid I RMON history control entry X is set to invalid I RMON Event entry X is set to valid I RMON Event entry X is set to invalid I RMON Alarm entry X is set to valid I RMON Alarm entry X is set to invalid I SNMP Snmp snmpEnableAuthenTraps is set to enabled A SNMP Snmp snmpEnableAuthenTraps is set to disabled A SNMP System sysName configured A SNMP System sysLocation configured A SNMP System sysContact configured A SNMP Port X link up trap sent to a b c d A SNMP Port X Link down trap sent to a b c d A SNMP Configuring IP add
146. ack 7 30 30 2 and the authenticator will 8 30 30 2 retransmit an EAP request packet 9 30 30 2 5 times to the Supplicant before it 10 30 30 2 times out the authentication session 11 30 30 2 12 30 30 2 13 30 30 2 14 30 30 2 15 30 30 2 16 30 30 2 Magnum6K25 auth portaccess port 2 quiet 120 maxreauth 7 transmit 120 Successfully set port access parameter s Magnum6K25 auth show port access Port Quiet Period Max Reauth Tx Period sec sec SS SSS SSS SSS Ea The amount of time in seconds the 1 60 2 30 supplicant is held after an 2 120 7 120 authentication failure before the 3 60 2 30 authenticator retries the supplicant 4 60 2 30 for connection is changed to 120 5 60 2 30 seconds the number of re 6 60 2 30 authentication attempts that are 7 60 2 30 permitted before the Port becomes 8 60 2 30 Unauthorized is set to 7 and the 9 60 2 30 time in seconds the authenticator 10 60 2 30 waits to transmit another request 11 60 2 30 for identification from the 12 60 2 30 supplicant is changed to 120 13 60 2 30 seconds These values can be 14 60 2 30 changed on all ports depending on 15 60 2 30 devices being authenticated 16 60 2 30 Force the authentication Magnum6K25 auth reauth port 1 status enable period 300 20707 on port 1 every 3 minutes all other ports are force authenticated every hour as the show port reauth command shows Successfully set re authentication parameter s 83 MAGNUM 6K SW
147. age integrity and protection against message replays It includes both data integrity and data origin authentication Authoritative SNMP engine One of the SNMP copies involved in network communication designated to be the allowed SNMP engine which protects against message replay delay and redirection The security keys used for authenticating and encrypting SNMPv3 packets are generated as a function of the authoritative SNMP engine s engine ID and user passwords When an SNMP message expects a response for example get exact get next set request the receiver of these messages is authoritative When an SNMP message does not expect a response the sender is authoritative Data integrity A condition or state of data in which a message packet has not been altered or destroyed in an unauthorized manner Data origin authentication The ability to verify the identity of a user on whose behalf the message is supposedly sent This ability protects users against both message capture and replay by a different SNMP engine and against packets received or sent to a particular user that use an incorrect password or security level Encryption A method of hiding data from an unauthorized user by scrambling the contents of an SNMP packet Group A set of users belonging to a particular security model A group defines the access rights for all the users belonging to it Access rights define what SNMP objects can be read written to or created
148. agnum6K25 tag vian set port port 14 16 filter status enable WARNING PVID does not match the port 15 s VLAN ID s If you are using telnet session on this port setting ingress might stop the session 115 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Do you want to continue Y or N Y WARNING PVID does not match the port 14 s VLAN ID s If you are using telnet session on this port setting ingress might stop the session Do you want to continue Y or N Y WARNING PVID does not match the port 16 s VLAN ID s If you are using telnet session on this port setting ingress might stop the session Do you want to continue Y or N Y Ingress Filter Enabled Magnum6K25 tag vian show vlan type tag VLAN ID 1 Name Default VLAN Status Active UNTAGGED UNTAGGED UNTAGGED UNTAGGED UNTAGGED VLAN ID 10 Name engineering Status Active UNTAGGED UNTAGGED UNTAGGED VLAN ID 20 Name sales Status Active UNTAGGED UNTAGGED UNTAGGED 116 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE VLAN ID 30 VLANs are now active however as the packet traverses f VLANSs the packet should be tagged This now enabled next Name marketing Status Active UNTAGGED UNTAGGED UNTAGGED Magnum6K25 tag vian set port port 14 16 tagging id 10 status tagged Port tagging enabled Magnum6K25 tag vilan set port port 14 16 tagging id 20 status tagged Port tagging enabled Magnum6K25
149. al port to make a log entry or send a trap Magnum6K25 port security Magnum6K25 port security ps enable Port Security is already enabled Magnum6K25 port security learn port 11 enable Port Learning Enabled on selected port s Magnum6K25 port security show port security PORT STATE SIGNAL ACTION LEARN COUNT MAC ADDRESS 9 ENABLE LOG NONE ENABLE 6 00 e0 29 2a f1 bd 00 01 03 e2 27 89 00 07 50 ef 31 40 00 e0 29 22 15 85 00 03 47 ca ac 45 00 30 48 70 71 23 10 ENABLE NONE NONE DISABLE 0 Not Configured 11 ENABLE NONE NONE ENABLE 0 00 c1 00 7f ec 00 12 ENABLE NONE NONE DISABLE 0 Not Configured 13 ENABLE NONE NONE DISABLE 0 Not Configured 14 ENABLE NONE NONE DISABLE 0 Not Configured 15 ENABLE NONE NONE DISABLE 0 Not Configured 16 ENABLE NONE NONE DISABLE 0 Not Configured Magnum6K25 port security save Saving current configuration Configuration saved Magnum6K25 port security learn port 11 disable Port Learning Disabled on selected port s Magnum6K25 port security action port 11 drop Port security Action type set to Drop on selected port s Magnum6K25 port security show port security port 11 PORT STATE SIGNAL ACTION LEARN COUNT MAC ADDRESS 11 ENABLE NONE DROP DISABLE 0 00 c1 00 7f ec 00 Magnum6K25 port security signal port 11 logandtrap Port security Signal type set to Log and Trap on selected port s Magnum6K25 port security exit 70 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE
150. al port Access to the switch can be either through the console interface or remotely over the network The Command Line Interface CLI enables local or remote unit installation and maintenance The Magnum 6K family of switches provides a set of system commands which allow effective monitoring configuration and debugging of the devices on the network Console setup Connect the console port on the switch to the serial port on the computer using the serial cable listed above The settings for the HyperTerminal software emulating a VT100 are shown in Figure 1 below Make sure the serial parameters are set as shown or bps 38400 data bits 8 parity none stop bits 1 flow control none Port Settings Bits per second fssa00 USCS Data bits js w Parity Nme l Stop bits i f Flow control None S l Restore Defaults OK Cancel FIGURE 1 HyperTerminal screen showing the serial settings Console screen Once the console cable is connected to the PC and the software configured MNS 6K legal disclaimers and other text scrolls by on the screen 24 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE The switch has three modes of operation Operator least privilege Manager and Configuration The prompts for the switches change as the switch changes modes from Operator to Manager to Configuration The prompts are shown in Figure 2 below with a brief explanation of what the different prompts
151. al type field This is useful to specify whether a log file or host file is uploaded or downloaded This can also perform the task of exporting a configuration file or uploading a new image to the switch host lt hostname gt ip lt ipaddress gt file lt filename gt pass lt password gt parameters associated with ftp server for proper communications with the server user lt user gt upload and download information using fip command The IP address can be a IPv4 address or an IPv6 address 282 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES Command group lt add delete gt id lt id gt groupname lt name gt model lt v1 v2c usm gt com2secid lt com2sec id gt MNS 6K USER GUIDE Description a part of the View based Access control model VACM as defined in RFC 2275 This command defines the mapping from sec model or a sec name to a group A sec model is one of vt v2 or usm On MNS 6K up to 10 entries can be specified gvrp lt enable disable gt enable or disable GVRP host lt addleditldel gt name lt host name gt ip lt ipaddress gt user lt user gt pass lt password gt create a host entry for accessing host This is equivalent to creating a host table on many systems Maximum of 10 such entries are allowed help lt command string gt help for a specific command history def owner lt string gt def define the RMON history group and the comm lt string gt com
152. all or specific view entries id is optional and is the number corresponding to the view entry number in the table Syntax uset lt add delete gt id lt id gt username lt name gt usertype lt readonly readwrite gt authpass lt pass phrase gt privpass lt pass phrase gt level lt noauth auth priv gt subtree lt oid gt jor quickly adding or deleting v3 USM based security this command adds user entries MNS 6K allows up to 5 users to be added Right now the MNS 6K agent only support noauth and auth md5 for v3 authentication and auth des for priv authentication Syntax show uset id lt id gt display all or specific view entries id is optional and is the number corresponding to the view entry number in the table Syntax rmon enter the RMON configuration mode to setup RMON groups and communities Syntax history def owner lt string gt def comm lt string gt define the RMON history group and the community string associated with the group Syntax statistics def owner lt string gt def comm lt string gt define the RMON statistics group and the community string associated with the group Syntax alarm def owner lt string gt def comm lt string gt define the RMON alarm group and the community string associated with the group Syntax event def owner lt string gt def comm lt string gt define the RMON event group and the community string associated with the group 274 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER
153. and operator level as defined on the TACACS server for the respective level of login 92 Chapter 8 Port Mirroring and Setup Setup the ports for network speeds performance as well as for monitoring his section explains how individual characteristics of a port on the GarrettCom Magnum 6K family of switches are setup For monitoring a specific port the traffic on a port can be mirrored on another port and viewed by protocol analyzers Other setup includes automatically setting up broadcast storm prevention thresholds Port monitoring and mirroring An Ethernet switch sends traffic from one port to another port unlike a hub or a shared network device where the traffic is broadcast on each and every port Capturing traffic for protocol analysis or intrusion analysis can be impossible on a switch unless all the traffic for a specific port is reflected on another port typically a monitoring port The Magnum 6K family of switches can be instructed to repeat the traffic from one port onto another port This process when traffic from one port is reflecting to another port is called port mirroring The monitoring port is also called a sniffing port Port monitoring becomes critical for trouble shooting as well as for intrusion detection Port mirroring Monitoring a specific port can be done by port mirroring Mirroring traffic from one port to another port allows analysis of the traffic on that port The set of co
154. ands in these telnet windows are executed in a round robin Le if one window takes a long time to finish a command the other windows may encounter a delay before the command is completed For example if one window is executing a file download the other windows will not be able to execute the command before the file transfer is completed Another example if a outbound telnet session is started from the switch through a telnet window then the other windows will not be able to execute a command till the telnet session is completed Setting serial port parameters To be compliant with IT or other policies the console parameters can be changed from the CLI interface This is best done by setting the IP address and then telnet over to the switch Once connected using telnet the serial parameters can be changed If you are using the serial port remember to set the VT 100 emulation software properties to match the new settings Syntax set serial baud lt rate gt data lt 5 6 7 8 gt parity lt none odd even gt stop lt 1 1 5 2 gt flowctrl lt none xonxoff gt Where lt rate gt standard supported baud rates 40 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Warning changing these parameters through the serial port will cause loss of connectivity the parameters of the terminals software e g Hyper Terminal etc will also have to be changed to match the new settings To see the current settings of the seria
155. ands sorted alphabetically 278 APPENDIX 3 Daylight Savings 299 Daylight Savings TiMe sseseseesresseserresresriesesrisereseseeseesrrsereeree 299 APPENDIX 4 Updating MNS 6K Softwate 066 301 1e Getting Stact 302 Selecting the proper Version 303 Downloading the MNS 6K software 303 Next Steps orn arnasa tents pA EET A 307 2 Preparing to load the so tware 308 Accessing the SWitCh 308 Serial Connectoren n a a E N a A 308 Network Acceessss 309 Saving the Configuration 309 Serial CONNeCHOn sissies ncaa 310 NetWork ACCES Sinai hanah a a aa ia 312 Next ste 313 3 Loading the MNS 6K SO tware 314 Before loading the MNS 6K software wees 314 Accessing the swite iA teenie 314 Se al COMME CHO Siaia a aia aa a trata E 315 Network Aceesss a a 316 NEXT SEC DS insine n EE E EAER A 317 4 Optional Step Restoring the configuration 318 Accessing the iteeeeeee tied iad vaved oc entosstieaeTiveuls 318 Reloading the configuration 318 List of Figures FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU RE 1 HyperTerminal screen showing the serial gettings 24 RE 2 Prompt indicating the switch model number as well as mode of operation note the commands to switch between the levels is not shown Defe sssssssss
156. ands to set the flow of incoming and outgoing traffic These commands are defunct GarrettCom recommends using the set port command instead The commands for setting Tag VLANs are Syntax set port port lt number list range gt default id lt number gt sets the default VLAN id termed PVID in previous versions Default VLAN id is the VLAN id assigned to the untagged packets received on that port For Magnum 6K family of switches the default VLAN id as 1 Syntax set pott port lt number list range gt filter status lt enable disable gt enables or disables the VLAN filtering function When enabled the switch will drop the packets coming in through a port if the port is not a member of the VLAN For example if port 1 is a member of VLANs 10 20 and 30 if a packet with VLAN id 40 arrives at port 1 it will be dropped Syntax set port port lt number list range gt tagging id lt number gt status lt tagged untagged gt defines whether the outgoing packets from a port will be tagged or untagged This definition is on a per VLAN basis For example the command set port port 1 tagging id 10 status tagged will instruct the switch to tag all packets going out of port 1 to belong to VLAN 10 Syntax set port port lt numbert list range gt join id lt number gt adds the specified port s to the specified VLAN id This command works with active or pending VLANs 111 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Syntax set port port lt number
157. ange gt mode lt auto forward block gt set the port characteristics Block drops the unregistered mutticasts Forward forwards unregistered multicasts Syntax show potrt display the port characteristics for IGMP Syntax show router displays detected IGMP enabled router ports Syntax set leave lt enable disable gt enables or disables the switch to immediately process a host sending a leave message rather that wait for the timer to expire Syntax set querier lt enable disable gt enables or disables a switch as IGMP querier 204 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Syntax set qi interval lt value gt The IGMP querier router periodically sends general host query messages These messages are sent to ask for group membership information This is sent to the all system multicast group address 224 0 0 1 The default value is 125 seconds The valid range can be from 60 to 127 seconds Syntax set qri interval lt value gt The query response interval is the maximum amount of time that can elapse between when the querier router sends a host query message and when it receives a response from a host The Default value is 10 seconds The Range can be from 2 to 270 seconds Restrictions apply to the maximum value because of an internal calculation that is dependent on the value of the Query Interval Magnum6K25 igmp Magnum6K25 igmp set port port 10 12 mode forward Port mode is set Magnum6K25 igmp set port port
158. assed to the root bridge before they can be propagated to the network Topology changes in RSTP can be originated from and acted upon by any designated switch bridge leading to more rapid propagation of address information e STP recognizes one state blocking for ports that should not forward any data or information RSTP explicitly recognizes two states or blocking roles alternate and backup port including them in computations of when to learn and forward and when to block e STP relays configuration messages received on the root port going out of its designated ports If an STP switch bridge fails to recetve a message from its neighbor it cannot be sure where along the path to the root a failure occurred 135 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE RSTP switches bridges generate their own configuration messages even if they fail to receive one from the root bridge This leads to quicker failure detection e RSTP offers edge port recognition allowing ports at the edge of the network to forward frames immediately after activation while at the same time protecting them against loops e An improvement in RSTP allows configuration messages to age more quickly preventing them from going around in circles in the event of a loop RSTP has three states They are discarding learning and forwarding The discarding state is entered when the port is first taken into service The port does not learn addresses in this state and does not parti
159. ast command is printed on the screen but not executed This allows for editing errors made in typing Syntax lt Down artow gt opposite of Up arrow key Syntax set ftp mode lt normal passive gt set the fip mode of operation Syntax show ftp display the current ftp operation mode Syntax show version displays the version of MNS 6K being used Syntax ping lt ipaddress gt count lt 1 999 gt timeout lt 1 256 gt use the ping command to test connectivity Syntax set prompt lt prompt string gt set the prompt for switch The prompt has predefined variables These are n System Name c System Contact l System Location i System IP m System MAC v Version Character r New Line b Space 277 APPENDIX 2 alphabetically APPENDIX Commands sorted Command Description iji repeat the last command lt n gt repeat the n th command as indicated by a show history lt command string gt lt TAB gt options for a command lt Down atrow gt opposite of Up arrow key lt first character of the command gt lt TAB gt listing commands starting with the character lt TAB gt listing all commands available at the privilege level lt Up arrow gt every time the key is pressed the last command is printed on the screen but not executed This allows for editing errors made in typing access setup access configuration parameters action po
160. at http www garrettcom com ftaform htm Under some circumstances it is possible for the rapid state transitions employed by RSTP to result in an increase in the rates of frame duplication and the order in which the frames are sent and received In otder to allow RSTP switches to support applications and protocols that may be sensitive to frame duplication and out of sequence frames RSTP may have to be explicitly set to be compatible with STP This explicit setting is called setting the Force Protocol Version parameter to be STP compatible This parameter should be set to all ports on a given switch As indicated above one of the benefits of RSTP is the implementation of a larger range of port path costs which accommodates higher network speeds New default values have also been implemented for the path costs associated with the different network speeds This could create incompatibility between devices running the older implementations of STP a switch running RSTP If you are using tagged VLANs at least one untagged VLAN must be available for the BPDU s to propagate through the network to update STP status RSTP is needed for RS Ring on the GarrettCom Magnum 6K family of switches Configuring RSTP The commands to setup and configure RSTP on MNS 6K are Syntax set stp type lt stp rstp gt Set the switch to support RSTP or change it back to STP Need to save and reboot the switch after this command Syntax rstp enter t
161. atus DISABLED Dual Homing Ports Primary 10 Secondary 11 Magnum 6K25 dualhome dualhome enable Dual Homing Enabled Magnum 6K25 dualhome show dualhome Dual Homing Status ENABLED Dual Homing Ports Primary 10 Secondary 11 Dual Homing Active On Port 10 Magnum 6K25 dualhome exit Magnum 6K25 FIGURE 96 configuring dual homing 172 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE List of commands in this chapter Syntax dualhome enter the dual homing configuration sub system Syntax dualhome lt enable disable gt enable or disable dual homing Syntax dualhome add portl lt port gt port2 lt port gt dual homing setup similar to that of unmanaged switches such as ESD42 OR Syntax dualhome add primary lt port gt secondary lt port gt dual homing setup as primary secondary mode Syntax dualhome del Delete the dual homing setup Syntax show dualhome Display dual homing status 173 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Chapter 14 Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP Increase Network throughput and reliability specification IEEE 802 3ad that allows several physical ports to be grouped or bundled together to form a single logical channel This increases the throughput across two devices and provides improved reliability Lz aggregation Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP is part of an IEEE LACP concepts The IEEE802 3ad standard provides for the formati
162. ax traps lt add delete gt type lt Snmp Rmon Snmp Rmon Enterprise Snmp Enterprise Rmon Enterprise AU gt ip lt ipaddress gt add v1 traps as well as define the trap receiver Syntax mgrip lt add delete gt ip lt IPaddress gt adds or deletes a management station specified by the IP address which can query SNMP variables from the switch This is done to protect the switch from being polled by unauthorized managers Valid for SNMP v Maximum of five stations allowed Syntax set snmp type lt v1 all gt define the version of SNMP to use the option all supports all versions v1 v2 and v3 v1 restricts SNMP to v1 only By default SNMP v1 only is enabled Syntax show snmp displays the SNMP configuration information Syntax setvar sysname syscontact syslocation lt string gt sets the system name contact and location All parameters are optional but a user must supply at least one parameter Syntax quickefg quick setup for snmpv3 configuration It automatically configures a default VACM view based access control model This allows any manager station to access the Magnum 6K switch either via SNMP v1 v2c or v3 The community name is public This command is only intended for first time users and values can be changed by administrators who want more strict access Syntax engineid string lt string gt Every agent has to have an enginelD name to be able to respond to SINMPv3 messages The default
163. bid capabilities Magnum6K25 gvrp Magnum6K25 gvrp show gvrp GVRP Status Enabled Magnum6K25 gvrp gvrp disable GVRP is now disabled Magnum6K25 gvrp gvrp enable GVRP enabled Magnum6K25 gvrp show vlan VLAN ID NAME VLAN STATUS 1 Default VLAN Static Active 2 Blue Static Active 10 dyn10 Dynamic Active Magnum6K25 gvrp static vian 10 Magnum6K25 gvrp show vlan 215 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE VLAN ID NAME VLAN STATUS 1 Default VLAN Static Active 2 Blue Static Active 10 dyn10 Static Active Magnum6K25 gvrp set forbid vlan 2 forbid 11 15 Magnum6K25 gvrp show forbid VLAN ID FORBIDDEN PORTS 1 None 2 11 12 13 14 15 FIGURE 127 GVRP configuration example GVRP Operations Notes A dynamic VLAN must be converted to a static VLAN before it can have an IP address After converting a dynamic VLAN to a static VLAN use the save command to save the changes made on a reboot the changes can be lost without the save command Within the same broadcast domain a dynamic VLAN can pass through a device that is not GVRP awate This is because a hub or a switch that is not GVRP aware will flood the GVRP multicast advertisement packets out all ports GVRP assigns dynamic VLANs as tagged VLANs To configure the VLAN as untagged first convert the tagged VLAN to a static VLAN Rebooting a switch with a dynamic VLAN deletes that VLA
164. bling port security Magnum6K25 port security show port security PORT STATE SIGNAL ACTION LEARN COUNT MAC ADDRESS 9 ENABLE LOG NONE ENABLE 6 00 e0 29 2a f1 bd 00 01 03 e2 27 89 00 07 50 ef 31 40 00 e0 29 22 15 85 00 03 47 ca ac 45 00 30 48 70 71 23 67 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE 10 ENABLE NONE NONE DISABLE 0 Not Configured 11 ENABLE NONE NONE DISABLE 0 Not Configured 12 ENABLE NONE NONE DISABLE 0 Not Configured 13 ENABLE NONE NONE DISABLE 0 Not Configured 14 ENABLE NONE NONE DISABLE 0 Not Configured 15 ENABLE NONE NONE DISABLE 0 Not Configured 16 ENABLE NONE NONE DISABLE 0 Not Configured Magnum6K25 port security FIGURE 49 Viewing port security settings on a switch On port 9 learning is enabled This port has 6 stations connected to it with the MAC addresses as shown Other ports have learning disabled and the MAC addresses are not configured on those ports Magnum6K25 port security learn port 11 enable Port Learning Enabled on selected port s Magnum6K25 port security show port security PORT STATE SIGNAL ACTION LEARN COUNT MAC ADDRESS 9 ENABLE LOG NONE ENABLE 6 00 e0 29 2a f1 bd 00 01 03 e2 27 89 00 07 50 ef 31 40 00 e0 29 22 15 85 00 03 47 ca ac 45 00 30 48 70 71 23 10 ENABLE NONE NONE DISABLE 0 Not Configured 11 ENABLE NONE NONE ENABLE 0 Not Configured 12 ENABLE NONE NONE DISABLE 0 Not Configured 13 ENABLE NONE NONE DISABLE 0 Not Configured 14 ENABLE NONE NONE DISAB
165. bps Full Duplex Possible port settings for 100FX fiber ports are e 100FDx default 100 Mbps Full Duplex e 100HDx 100 Mbps Half Duplex Possible port settings for 10FL fiber ports are e 10HDx default 10 Mbps Half Duplex e 10FDx 10 Mbps Full Duplex Gigabit fiber optic ports Gigabit SX and Gigabit LX e 1000FDx default 1000 Mbps 1 GBPS Full Duplex only e Auto The port operates at 1000FDx and auto negotiates flow control with the device connected to the port Flow Control Flow control is for full duplex operation and the controls provided indicates the number of buffers allowed for incoming traffic before a Rxon or Rxoff information is sent RXon is sent when the number of buffers used by the traffic falls below the specified level default is 4 Rxoff is sent when the number of buffers used goes above the specified value default is 6 The flowcontrol command is used to set the above thresholds It DOES NOT enable or DISABLE flow control Disabled default The port will not generate flow control packets and drops received flow control packets Enabled The port uses 802 3x Link Layer Flow Control generates flow control packets and processes received flow control packets With the port speed set to auto the default and flow control set to enabled the switch negotiates flow control on the indicated port If the port speed is not set to auto or if flow control is disabled on the port then flow contro
166. c The second version of SNMP it supports centralized and distributed network management strategies and includes improvements in the Structure of Management Information SMI protocol operations management architecture and security 218 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Simple Network Management Protocol Version 3 SNMPv3 The third version of SNMP the enhancements made to secure access different levels of access and security SNMP engine A copy of SNMP that can either reside on the local or remote device SNMP group A collection of SNMP users that belong to a common SNMP list that defines an access policy in which object identification numbers OIDs are both read accessible and write accessible Users belonging to a particular SNMP group inherit all of these attributes defined by the group SNMP user A person for which an SNMP management operation is performed The user is the person on a remote SNMP engine who receives the information SNMP view A mapping between SNMP objects and the access rights available for those objects An object can have different access rights in each view Access rights indicate whether the object is accessible by either a community string or a user Write view A view name not to exceed 64 characters for each group that defines the list of object identifiers OIDs that are able to be created or modified by users of the group Authentication The process of ensuring mess
167. ceived packets to be transmitted as tagged from the priority queue Chapter 16 IGMP Syntax igmp IGMP configuration mode Syntax igmp lt enable disable gt enable or disable IGMP on the switch Syntax show igmp IGMP operation status Syntax mcast lt enable disable gt enable or disable unknown multicast streams The default is enabled Syntax set igmp mode lt normal 12 gt set the IGMP mode Normal is when a L3 device is in the network and is the IGMP root The IGMP L2 is used when there is no L3 device in the network Syntax show gtoup shows the multicast groups Syntax set port port lt port list range gt mode lt auto forward block gt set the port characteristics Block drops the unregistered mutticasts Forward forwards unregistered multicasts Syntax show potrt display the port characteristics for IGMP Syntax show router displays detected IGMP enabled router ports Syntax set leave lt enable disable gt enables or disables the switch to immediately process a host sending a leave message rather that wait for the timer to expire Syntax set querier lt enable disable gt enables or disables a switch as IGMP querier 271 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Syntax set qi interval lt value gt The IGMP querier router periodically sends general host query messages These messages are sent to ask for group membership information This is sent to the all system multicast group address
168. ch on other ports Block should typically be used on ports in insecure networks where there is exposure to attack such as ports where intruders can connect to Disable Causes the port to ignore and drop all the advertisements it receives from any source FIGURE 123 Port settings for GVRP operations The CLI command show vlan shows a switch s current GVRP configuration including the unknown VLANs 212 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Magnum6K25 gvrp Magnum6K25 gvrp show vlian VLAN ID NAME VLAN STATUS 1 Default VLAN Static Active 2 Blue Static Active 10 dyn10 Dynamic Active Magnum6K25 gvrp FIGURE 124 Command to check for dynamically assigned VLANs Note that port 10 must be enabled and configured to learn for it to be assigned to the dynamic VLAN To send advertisements one or more tagged or untagged static VLANs must be configured on one or more switches with GVRP enabled MNS 6K allows a dynamic VLAN to be converted to a static VLAN The command to use is Syntax static vian lt VID gt convert a dynamic VLAN to a static VLAN Note show vlan type tag will display VID in case the VID is not known Magnum6K25 gvrp Magnum6K25 gvrp show vlan VLAN ID NAME VLAN STATUS 1 Default VLAN Static Active 2 Blue Static Active 10 dyn10 Dynamic Active Magnum6K25 gvrp static vian 10 Magnum6K25 gvrp show vlan VLAN ID NAME VLAN ST
169. checking for other possible events No other ports to look at No 30 second delay before taking action RS Ring takes immediate corrective action for quick recovery from the fault in the ring The ring becomes two strings topologically and there is a path through the two strings for all normal LAN traffic to move as needed to maintain LAN operations When the fault is cured the re emergence of the ring structure enables the BPDU packets to flow again between the ring s port pair This flow of packets may take as long as 6 seconds in most situations This is recognized by RS Ring as well as by RSTP and one of the ports in the defined ring port pair is changed to the blocking state RS Ring takes the recovery action immediately not waiting for the 30 second STP analysis 163 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Rings are simple structures Either one port of a pair is forwarding or both are Not complicated not much to go wrong Configuring RS Ring RS Ring is a licensed software feature from GarrettCom Inc Before using the RS Ring capabilities authorize the use of the software with the S Ring license key The same license key is used for either the S Ring or RS Ring To obtain the license key please contact GarrettCom Inc Sales for purchasing the S Ring feature or Technical Support to obtain the 12 character key If the S Ring capability was purchased along with the switch the software license code will be included with the switch
170. cipate in frame transfer The port looks for STP traffic in order to determine its role in the network When it is determined that the port will play an active part in the network the state will change to learning The learning state is entered when the port is preparing to play an active member of the network The port learns addresses in this state but does not participate in frame transfer In a network of RSTP switches bridges the time spent in this state is usually quite short RSTP switches bridges operating in STP compatibility mode will spend between 6 to 40 seconds in this state After learning the bridge will place the port in the forwarding state While in this state the port both learns addresses and participates in frame transfer while in this state The result of these enhanced states is that the IEEE 802 1d version of spanning tree STP can take a fairly long time to resolve all the possible paths and to select the most efficient path through the network The IEEE 802 1w Rapid reconfiguration of Spanning Tree significantly reduces the amount of time it takes to establish the network path The result is reduced network downtime and improved network robustness In addition to faster network reconfiguration RSTP also implements greater ranges for port path costs to accommodate the higher connection speeds that are being implemented Proper implementations of RSTP by switch vendors is designed to be compatible with IEEE 802 1d S
171. co GarrettGom MAGNUM 6K FAMILY OF SWITCHES Managed Network Software MNS for Magnum 6K family of Switches MNS 6K Release 3 7 1 CLI User Guide Preface This guide describes how to use the Command Line Interface CLI for the Magnum 6K family of switches For the Web Management Interface please refer to the Web Management Guide Some simple guidelines which will be useful for configuring and using the Magnum 6K family of switches If you need information on a specific command in the CLI type the command name after you type the word help help lt command gt or just type lt command gt Enter If you need information on a specific feature in Web Management Interface use the online help provided in the interface If you need further information or data sheets on GarrettCom Magnum 6K family of switches refer to the GarrettCom web links at http www garrettcom com managed_switches htm except MP62 switch shown on the page GarrettCom Inc 47823 Westinghouse Drive Fremont CA 94539 7437 Phone 510 438 9071 Fax 510 438 9072 Email Tech support support garrettcom com Email Sales sales garrettcom com WWW http www garrettcom com Trademarks GarrettCom Inc reserves the right to change specifications performance characteristics and or model offerings without notice GarrettCom Magnum S Ring Link Loss Learn Converter Switch Convenient Switch and Personal
172. config IP Address 192 168 1 11 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Gateway Address 192 168 1 1 Magnum6K25 telnet 192 168 1 1 port 2097 FIGURE 23 Example of a telnet session While MNS 6K times out an idle telnet session it may be useful to see who is currently connected to the switch It may also be useful for a person to remotely terminate a telnet session To facilitate this MNS 6K supports two commands Syntax show session Syntax kill session id lt session gt terminate a telnet session 39 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Magnum6K25 user Magnum6K25 user useraccess user peter service telnet enable Telnet Access Enabled Magnum6K25 user exit Magnum6K25 show session Current Sessions SL Sessionld Connection User Name User Mode 1 1 163 10 10 14 manager Manager 2 2 163 11 11 15 peter Manager 3 3 163 12 12 16 operator Operator Magnum6K25 kill session id 3 Session Terminated Magnum6K25 FIGURE 24 managing and viewing multiple telnet sessions In the above example the user with user id peter is given telnet access which was disabled earlier in Chapter 2 Then multiple users telnet into the switch This is shown using the show session command The user operator session is then terminated using the kill session command The default port port 23 is used for telnet A maximum of four simultaneous telnet sessions are allowed at any time on the switch The comm
173. d and the MAC addresses are not configured on those ports FIGURE 50 Enabling learning on a port Note after the learning is enabled the port security can be queried to find the status of MAC addresses learnt If there were machines connected to this port the MAC address would be shown on port 11 as they are shown on PORE inii enii nia a a aaan a a a ea tanod aan i FIGURE 51 Al owing specific MAC address on specific ports After the MAC address is FIGURE 52 Removing a MAC address from port security FIGURE 53 Setting the logging on a pott FIGURE 54 Steps for setting up port security on a Specific pott FIGURE 55 Show log and clear log command The show log command indicates the type of log FIGURE 56 Steps to allow deny or remove Specific Services FIGURE 57 O21 XNOR LOMPONCNEE saosin sia cos cha stissei sieved uateudie a A A AR FIGURE 58S 02 Pixs authentication detail ansasinen picek Sesiapa FIGURE 59 securing the network using port ACCOSS FIGURE 60 F ow chart describing the interaction between local users and TACACS FIGURE 64 POr snp ama ae AA RE AE EA AU Aa Ge ead ree aoe FIGURE 65 Setting up back pressure and flow control on POortS FIGURE 66 Setting up broadcast storm protection Also shows how the threshold can be lowered FOP USPC LE DORE vais h ata ng ta Si ey titans Sa Gen eaaa ai FIGURE 67 VLAN as two separate collision domains The t
174. d time on the switch Log Description description of event as detected by the switch Severity is one of 8 severities described at the beginning of this section thorized managers Just as port security allows and disallows specific MAC addresses from accessing a network the MNS 6K software can allow or block specific IP addresses or a range of IP addresses to access the switch The command used for that is Syntax access access configuration mode Syntax allow ip lt ipaddress gt mask lt netmask gt service lt name list gt authorize managers Syntax deny ip lt ipaddress gt mask lt netmask gt service lt name list gt deny access to a specific IP address s or a subnet 73 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Syntax remove ip lt ipaddress gt mask lt netmask gt remove specific IP address s or subnet Syntax temoveall remove all managers Syntax show ip access display list of authorized managers access context ate the access commands allow allow specified services for specified IP addresses IP addresses can be individual stations a group of stations or subnets The range is determined by the IP address and netmask settings deny deny specified services for specified IP addresses IP addresses can be individual stations a group of stations or subnets The range is determined by the IP address and netmask settings remove eliminate specified entry from the authorized manager l
175. ddress has the necessary services running on it For serial connections x modem or other alternative methods can be used File name in many situations has to be a unique file name as over writing files is not permitted by most ftp and tftp servers or services Only alpha numeric characters are allowed in the file name special characters like amp L ot other control characters e g G are not allowed Magnum6K25 saveconf mode tftp 192 168 10 1 file mag6Kmain Do you wish to upload the configuration Y or N Y FIGURE 32 Saving the configuration on a tftp server The saveconf and loadconf commands are used often to update new software to the Magnum 6K family of switches These commands will be obsoleted in the next release and replaced with the ftp or tftp or xmodem commands listed below It is advised to start using these commands instead of saveconf and loadconf Before the 45 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE software is updated it is advised to save the configurations The re loading of the configuration is not usually necessary however in certain situations it maybe needed and it is advised to save configurations before a software update The loadconf command requires a reboot for the new configuration to be active Without a reboot the older configuration is used by the Magnum 6K family of switches When Reboot is selected the user is p
176. deo to be given priority over time insensitive packets such as data Differentiated Services DiffServ or DS are a set of technologies defined by the IETF Internet Engineering Task Force to provide quality of service for traffic on IP networks DiffServ and QoS DiffServ is designed for use at the edge of an Enterprise where corporate traffic enters the service provider environment DiffServ is a layer 3 protocol and requires no specific layer 2 capability allowing it to be used in the LAN MAN and WAN DiffServ works by tagging each packet at the originating device or an intermediate switch for the requested level of service it requires across the network IP Header Type 4 N 7 N 7 N Diffserv Code Points DSCP FIGURE 109 ToS and DSCP DiffServ inserts a 6 bit DiffServ code point DSCP in the Type of Service ToS field of the IP header as shown in the picture above Information in the DSCP allows nodes to determine the Per Hop Behavior PHB which is an observable forwarding behavior for each packet PHBs are defined according to e Resources required e g bandwidth buffer size e Priority based on application or business requirements e Traffic characteristics e g delay jitter packet loss Nodes implement PHBs through buffer management and packet scheduling mechanisms This hop by hop allocation of resources is the basis by which DiffServ provides quality of service for different types of communicati
177. dge Hello Time when the switch is the root device this is the time between messages being transmitted The value is from 1 to 10 seconds Default value is 2 seconds Bridge Max Age this is the maximum time a message with STP information is allowed by the switch before the switch discards the information and updates the address table again Value ranges from 6 to 40 seconds with default value of 20 seconds Root Port indicates the port number which is elected as the root port of the switch A root port of 0 indicates STP is disabled Root Path Cost a path cost is assigned to individual ports for the switch to determine which ports are the forwarding points A higher cost means more loops a lower cost means fewer loops More loops equal more traffic and a tree which takes a long time to converge resulting in a slower system Designated Root shows the MAC address of the bridge in the network elected or designated as the root bridge Designated Root Priority shows the designated root bridge s priority Default value is 0 139 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Root Bridge Forward Delay indicates the designated root bridge s forward delay This is the time the switch waits before it switches from the listening to the forwarding state The default is 15 seconds This value can be set between 4 30 seconds Root Bridge Hello Time indicates the designated root bridge s hello time Hello information is sent out every 2
178. different color and this font Switch prompt shown in Bold font with a or gt at the end For the document we will use Magnum6K25 as the default prompt Syntax rules Optional entries are shown in square brackets Parameter values within are shown in lt pointed brackets gt Optional parameter values are shown again in square brackets Thus Syntax command parameterl lt value1 gt parameter2 lt value2 gt patameter3 lt value3 value4 gt In the example above Parameter 1 and Parameter 2 are optional values Parameter 2 can be used optionally only if Parameter 1 is specified Parameter 3 is mandatory Parameter 1 has value1 IP address Parameter 2 has value2 string Parameter 3 has value3 or value4 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Related Topics Related topics show that GarrettCom strongly recommends reading about those topics You may choose to skip those if you already have prior detailed knowledge on those subjects Tool box Necessary software and hardware components needed or recommended to have as a prerequisite These include serial ports on a computer serial cables TFTP or FTP software serial terminal emulation software etc Caution or take notice Things to watch out for in case of problems or potential problems This is also used to draw attention to a special issue capability or fact Terminology Whenever the word PC is used it implies a UNIX Linux Windows o
179. e Syntax ftp lt get put list del gt type lt app config oldconf script hosts log gt host lt hostname gt ip lt ipaddress gt file lt filename gt user lt user gt pass lt password gt upload and download information using fip command Where lt get put list del gt different ftp operations type lt app config oldconf script hosts log gt optional type field This is useful to specify whether a log file or host file is uploaded or downloaded This can also perform the task of exporting a configuration file or uploading a new image to the switch host lt hostname gt ip lt ipaddress gt file lt filename gt user lt user gt pass lt password gt parameters associated with ftp server for proper communications with the server 56 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Syntax tftp lt get put gt type lt app config oldconf script hosts log gt host lt hostname gt ip lt ipaddress gt file lt filename gt upload and download information using tftp command Where lt get put gt different tftp operations get a file from the server or put the information on the server type lt app config oldconf script hosts log gt optional type field This is useful to specify whether a log file or host file is uploaded or downloaded This can also perform the task of exporting a configuration file or uploading a new image to the switc
180. e disable gt control lt auto forceauth forceunauth gt initialize lt assert deassert gt MNS 6K USER GUIDE Description setting the port characteristic for an 802 1x network setport port lt port list range gt name lt name gt speed lt 10 100 gt duplex lt half full gt auto lt enable disable gt flow lt enable disable gt bp lt enable disable gt status lt enable disable gt configure port settings set ports port lt port list range gt state lt learn block disable gt set the state of the port to learn block or disable for GVRP Note the default state is disable set prompt lt prompt string gt The length of the prompt is limited to 60 characters The predefined variables are n System Name c System Contact I System Location i System IP m System MAC v Version Character r New Line b Space Set the prompt string 289 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES Command set qi interval lt value gt Description MNS 6K USER GUIDE The IGMP querier router periodically sends general host query messages These messages are sent to ask for group membership information This is sent to the all system multicast group address 224 0 0 1 The default value is 125 seconds The valid range can be from 60 to 127 seconds set qos type lt port tag tos none gt port lt port list range gt priority lt
181. e MNS 6K can now use the ftp tftp or xmodem commands to upload and download information to the server running the proper services One useful capability provided in MNS 6K is the capability to export the CLI commands as described in this manual used to configure the switch To do that for example using the tftp command the sequence of commands are shown below Magnum 6K25 show ftp Current FTP Mode NORMAL Magnum 6K25 set ftp mode passive FTP Set to Passive Mode Magnum 6K25 show ftp Current FTP Mode PASSIVE Magnum 6K25 set ftp mode normal FTP Set to Normal Mode Magnum 6K25 show ftp Current FTP Mode NORMAL Magnum6K25 ftp put type config ip 192 168 5 2 file config Do you wish to export configuration file Y or N Y Successfully exported the configuration Magnum6K25 FIGURE 34 commands to save the configuration using fip Similar options will be specified using tftp ete When using the fip command use the host command discussed later in this section to define the fip server After saving the contents of the saved configuration file are as follows FEET EE EE A a Copyright c 2001 2005 GarrettCom Inc All rights reserved RESTRICTED RIGHTS Use duplication or disclosure is subject to U S Government restrictions as set forth in Sub division b 3 ii of the 48 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at 52 227
182. e MAC address is assigned to For example if the packet with MAC address 00 0c F1 B9 D1 DC 2 above appears with this MAC address in the DST field the packet will be sent to port number 3 Also notice that there are other MAC addtesses associated with port 3 indicating that the port has a hub or a switch connected to it List of commands in this chapter Syntax alarm enter the alarm configuration mode Syntax add event lt event id list range all gt enables alarm action in response to the specified event ID Syntax period time lt 1 10 gt sets the duration of relay action for the momentary type signal This may be needed to adjust to the behavior of the circuit or relay Default is 3 seconds Time is in seconds Syntax del event lt event id list range all gt disables alarm action in response to the specified event ID Syntax alarm lt enable disable gt g obally enables or disables the alarm action Syntax show alarm displays the current status of Alarm system Syntax smtp configure the SNMP alerts to be sent via email 254 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Syntax show smtp lt config recipients gt config displays the current SMTP global settings and recipients displays the currently configured recipients of email alerts Syntax add id lt 1 5 gt email lt email addr gt traps lt all none S R E gt events lt all none I A C F D gt ip lt ip addr gt port lt 1 65535 gt id
183. e a aai 134 FIGURE 79 Enabling RSTP and reviewing the RSTP variables ccccccsscsssssssssssseseseseseseeeenssees 139 FIGURE 80 Reviewing the RSTP port parameters 140 Figure 81 Path cost as defined in IEEE 802 1d STP and 802 1w RSTP nossen 141 FIGURE 82 RSTP information from a network with multiple switches Note the show stp ports command can be executed from the manager level prompt or from rstp configuration state as shown in the screen captures eurlier P 141 FIGURE 83 Confrguring RSTP on MNXV 147 FIGURE 84 Normal RSTP STP operations in a series of switches Note this normal status is desionated RING CEOSED rrenan 155 FIGURE 85 A fault in the ring interrupts traffic The blocking port now becomes forwarding so that traffic can reach all switches in the network Note the mP62 as well as the ESD42 switches support LLL and can participate in S Ring as an access gwitoh sesser 156 FIGURE 86 More than one S Ring pair can be selected and more than one S Ring can be defined per snitch Note the mP62 as well as the ESD42 switches support LLL and can parhapate tS Ring asan ACCOR SDIT ON sc iai a A A E AA A 157 FIGURE 87 Activating S Ring on the switch ssssssssssssssssssessesresresressessesseessessesseereoreereestesessessesseeseesee 159 FIGURE 88 S Ring configuration commands for root gwitol 161 FIGURE 89 Link Loss Learn LLL setup Setup LLL on ports connected to other sw
184. e gt manually initiate a re authentication of supplicant Magnum6K25 show auth config Make sure there is no 802 1x or Radius server 802 1X Authenticator Configuration defined Note only one RADIUS server can be a LM defined for the whole network Status Disabled RADIUS Authentication Server The RADIUS server is on port 2 This port is IP Addr 0 0 0 UD ne s i i authenticated manually If the RADIUS server is Shared Secret several hops away it may be necessary to authenticate the interconnection ports Note make sure this command is executed before auth enable command Magnum6K25 auth Magnum6K25 auth setport port 2 status enable control forceauth initialize assert Successfully set port control parameter s 81 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE This command is not necessary however is shown for completeness in case there was a RADIUS server Magnum6K25 auth auth disable 802 1X Authenticator is disabled defined and a previously set authentication scheme Magnum6K25 auth authserver ip 192 168 1 239 secret secret Successfully set RADIUS Authentication Server parameter s Magnum6K25 auth auth enable ____ 802 1X Authenticator is enabled Port not available Magnum6K25 auth show auth ports Magnum6K25 auth show auth config 802 1x Authenticator Configuration IP Address 192 168 1 239 UDP Port 1812 Shared Secret secre
185. e make the decisions Syntax timers forward delay lt 4 30 gt hello lt 1 10 gt age lt 6 40 gt change the STP Forward Delay Hello timer and Aging timer values 134 Chapter 11 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP Create and manage alternate paths to the network network Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP IEEE 802 1w is an evolution of the Spanning Tree Protocol STP 802 1d standard and provides for faster spanning tree convergence after a topology change R apid Spanning Tree Protocol RTSP like STP was designed to avoid loops in an Ethernet RSTP concepts The IEEE 802 1d Spanning Tree Protocol STP was developed to allow the construction of robust networks that incorporate redundancy while pruning the active topology of the network to prevent loops While STP is effective it requires that frame transfer must halt after a link outage This halt is until all bridges in the network are sure to be aware of the new topology Using STP IEEE 802 1d recommended values this period lasts 30 seconds Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1w is a further evolution of the 802 1d Spanning Tree Protocol It replaces the settling period with an active handshake between switches bridges that guarantees topology information to be rapidly propagated through the network RSTP converges in less than one second to six seconds RSTP also offers a number of other significant innovations These include e Topology changes in STP must be p
186. e managed Magnum 6K switch Only one RS Ring per Magnum 6K switch can be configured Managed Switches RS Ring requires all devices in the ring are managed Magnum 6K family of switches If there are non managed devices RS Ring cannot be used 4 It is technically possible to have S Ring and RS Ring on the same Magnum 6K Switch GarrettCom Inc does not recommend nor support such configurations 152 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Comparing resiliency methods So far we have briefly covered S Ring with LLL RS Ring RSPT as well as STP The table below summarizes some decision criteria on selecting RSPT vs STP vs S Ring and LLL vs RS Ring Same license key as S Ring One license key needs to be enabled on each Magnum 6K switch A license key is needed One key per ring manager switch Included in MNS 6K Works with RSTP Works with RSTP or STP devices Managed Magnum 6K family of switches Managed or certain non managed Magnum switches Requires at least one Magnum 6K switch as ring manager Distributed across all switches in the ring Works with RSTP in each switch Centralized to Ring Manager LLL provides triggers to recomputed topology for ring members Also works with RSTP or STP Typically done using BPDU Can take time Typically done using BPDU Can take time Single ring multiple rings no overlapping rings or ring of rings Single ring multiple ri
187. e matrix Existing software Upgrade Path What to do version Version 1 0 to Version 2 5 Contact GarrettCom customer support to upgrade the software Version 2 5 x or higher Latest Version of Download latest version of MNS 6K MNS 6K from ftp ftp garrettcom com following the steps listed below Downloading the MNS 6K software To download the MNS 6K software follow these simple steps 1 Access GarrettCom s FTP site through any standard browser ftp ftp garrettcom com a Note Make sure the browser has enable the ftp view option checked For Internet Explorer it can be enabled by using the menu Tools gt Internet options gt Advanced If you are running a personal firewall or other firewall software please ensure that ftp protocol is allowed on the computer or the network 303 UPDATING MNS 6K STEP 1 2 b If the site uses another socket number for ftp connections use the socket number at the end of the URL For example if the network administrator has setup a firewall to use socket number 1684 the URL would be as follows ftp ftp garrettcom com 1684 c NOTE You can use any other FTP program available on the Internet including the ftp command available on most operating systems instead of the browser for downloading the software Remember the file name and the directory where the MNS 6K software is stored This will be needed later for the upgrade irrespective of whether the MNS 6K s
188. e network using tftp fip or serial protocols Syntax kill config save module_name resets the system configuration The module_name option does not reset the specific module parameters The modules are system event port bridge stp ps mirror snip vlan gurp and snmp Syntax show session display telnet sessions active on the switch Syntax kill session id lt session gt ki a specific telnet session Syntax set ftp mode lt normal passive gt set the fip mode of operation Syntax show ftp display the current fip operation mode 259 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Syntax ftp lt get put list del gt type lt app config oldconf script hosts log gt host lt hostname gt ip lt ipaddress gt file lt filename gt user lt user gt pass lt password gt upload and download information using fip command Where lt get put list del gt different ftp operations type lt app config oldconf script hosts log gt optional type field This is useful to specify whether a log file or host file is uploaded or downloaded This can also perform the task of exporting a configuration file or uploading a new image to the switch host lt hostname gt file lt filename gt pass lt password gt parameters associated with ftp communications with the server ip lt ipaddress gt user lt user gt server for proper Syntax tftp lt get put gt type lt app co
189. e trunk group belongs to two different VLANS However on each switch the set of ports can belong to same VLANs as shown in the figure below While the ports belong to the same VLANs there is no common VLAN between the switches and hence the LACPDU cannot be transmitted This configuration will not work in the LACP mode GarrettCom VLAN 10 Switch 1 Switch 2 c D GarrettCom FIGURE 100 In che figure above there is no common VLAN between the two sets of ports so packets from one VLAN to another cannot be forwarded There should be at least one VLAN common between the two switches and the LACP port groups 177 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE GarrettCom Switch 1 VLAN 1 10 Switch 2 GarrettCom FIGURE 101 This configuration is similar to the previous configuration except there is a common VLAN VLAN 1 between the two sets of LACP ports This is a valid configuration Switch 1 A B D GarrettCom Switch 2 D 2 4 6 8 GarrettCom GarrettConr Switch 3 FIGURE 102 In the architecture above using RSTP and LACP allows multiple switches to be configured together in a meshed redundant link architecture First define the RSTP configuration on the switches Then define the LACP ports Then finally connect the ports together to form the meshed redundant link topology as shown above 178 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE i Using the Magnum edge switch with dual homing a
190. ecific port from a VLAN Syntax show pott port lt port list range gt shows all parameters related to tag vlan for the list of ports If the port parameter is omitted it will display all ports 266 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Chapter 10 Spanning Tree Protocol STP Syntax show stp lt config ports gt regardless of whether STP is enabled or disabled default this command lists the switch s full STP configuration including general settings and port settings Syntax stp STP Configuration mode Syntax stp lt enable disable gt Start Enable or stop Disable STP Syntax priority port lt number list range gt value lt 0 255 0 65535 gt specifies the port or switch level priority When a port s are specified the priority is associated with ports and their value is O 255 If no ports are specified then the switch bridge priority is specified and its value is 0 65535 Syntax cost port lt number list range gt value lt 0 65535 gt cost is specific to a port and the port s have to be specified Syntax port port lt number list range gt status lt enable disable gt specific ports may not need to participate in STP process These ports typically would be end stations If you are not sure let MNS 6K software make the decisions Syntax timers forward delay lt 4 30 gt hello lt 1 10 gt age lt 6 40 gt change the STP Forward Delay Hello timer and Aging timer values Cha
191. ecified ports from the LACP membership Syntax edit port lt number list range gt priority lt priority gt edit the membership of the ports specified The priority can be from 0 65535 Syntax show lacp displays the status and other relevant LACP information Chapter 15 Quality of Service Syntax qos enter the QoS configuration mode 270 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Syntax setqos type lt port tag tos none gt port lt port list range gt priority lt high low gt tos lt 0 63 list range gt tag lt 0 7 list range gt depending on the type of OOS the corresponding field has to be set For example for QOS type tag the tag levels have to be set and for QOS type ToS the ToS levels have to be set If the priority field is not set it then defaults to low priority ToS has 64 levels and the valid values are 0 63 and a tagged packet has 8 levels and the valid values are 0 7 Syntax set weight weight lt 0 7 gt sets the port priority weight for All the ports Once the weight is set all the ports will be the same weight across the switch The valid value for weight is 0 7 Syntax show pottweight display the weight settings on a port Syntax show qos type lt port tag tos gt port lt port list range gt displays the QoS settings Syntax set untag port lt port list range gt priority lt high low gt tag lt 0 7 gt The 802 1p user priority assigned to untagged re
192. ed 79 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE The Magnum MNS O6K software implements the 802 1x authenticator It fully conforms to the standards as described in IEEE 802 1x implementing all the state machines needed for port based authentication The Magnum MNS 6K Software authenticator supports both EAPOL and EAP over RADIUS to communicate to a standard 802 1x supplicant and RADIUS authentication setver The Magnum MNS 6K software authenticator has the following characteristics e Allows control on ports using STP based hardware functions EAPOL frames are Spanning Tree Protocol STP link Bridge PDUs BPDU with its own bridge multicast addtess e Relays MD5 challenge although not limited to authentication protocol to RADIUS server e Limits the authentication of a single host per port e The Magnum 6K family of switches provides the IEEE 802 1x MIB for SNMP management Configuring 802 1x On enabling 802 1x ports make sure the port which connects to the RADIUS servers needs to be manually authenticated To authenticate the port use the setport command The CLI commands to configure and perform authentication with a RADIUS server are Syntax auth configuration mode to configure the 802 1x parameters Syntax show auth lt config ports gt show the 802 1x configuration or port status Syntax authserver ip lt ip addr gt udp lt num gt secret lt string gt define the RADIUS server use UDP socket number if the
193. ed 00 0e 15 TP 10 100 128 2000000 Disabled 00 0f 16 TP 10 100 128 2000000 Disabled 00 10 Magnum6K25 rstp cost port 13 value 250000 Magnum6K25 rstp show stp ports RSTP Port Configuration Port Type Priority Path Cost State Des Bridge Des Port 09 TP 10 100 128 2000000 Forwarding 00 00 00 20 06 25 ed 89 00 09 10 TP 10 100 128 2000000 Disabled 00 0a 11 TP 10 100 128 2000000 Disabled 00 0b 12 TP 10 100 128 2000000 Disabled 00 0c 13 TP 10 100 100 250000 Forwarding 00 00 00 20 06 25 ed 89 00 0d 14 TP 10 100 128 2000000 Disabled 00 0e 15 TP 10 100 128 2000000 Disabled 00 0f 16 TP 10 100 128 2000000 Disabled 00 10 Magnum6K25 rstp port port 9 status disable Magnum6K25 rstp show stp ports RSTP Port Configuration Port Type Priority Path Cost State Des Bridge Des Port 09 TP 10 100 128 2000000 NOSTP 00 09 10 TP 10 100 128 2000000 Disabled 00 0a 11 TP 10 100 128 2000000 Disabled 00 0b 12 TP 10 100 128 2000000 Disabled 00 0c 13 TP 10 100 100 250000 Forwarding 00 00 00 20 06 25 ed 89 00 0d 14 TP 10 100 128 2000000 Disabled 00 0e 15 TP 10 100 128 2000000 Disabled 00 0f 16 TP 10 100 128 2000000 Disabled 00 10 Magnum6K25 rstp port port 9 status enable Magnum6K25 rstp show stp ports RSTP Port Configuration Port Type Priority Path Cost State Des Bridge Des Port 09 TP 10 100 128 2000000 Forwarding 00 00 00 20 06 25 ed 89 00 09 10 TP 10 100 128 2000000 Disabled 00 0a 146 MAGNUM 6K SWIT
194. ed as the primary port If traffic analysis is required it is recommended to mirror the primary port and physically disconnect the other ports if all traffic needs to be captured If multiple ports have the same priority the first port physically connected becomes the primary port In case the ports are already connected the port with the lowest port count becomes the primary port i e if ports 4 5 6 are designated as the LACP group port 4 would become the primary port If the primary port fails the next available secondary port is designated as the primary port So in the example above if port 4 fails port 5 will be designated as the primary port Magnum 6K25 show lacp LACP is Disabled Need to enable LACP before ports can be added to the trunk Magnum 6K25 lacp group Magnum 6K25 lacp add port 14 15 16 Error LACP is disabled Magnum 6K25 lacp lacp enable LACP Enabled Magnum 6K25 lacp add port 13 16 Port s added successfully Magnum 6K25 lacp show lacp Orphan Ports Priority Trunk 32768 Link Down 32768 Link Down Indicates no LACP BPDU can be received from 32768 Link Down this port This port was in use and was an error to 32768 Peer Not a Trunk add this The next few steps delete this port and add the proper port See other messages below Magnum 6K25 lacp del port 16 Port s deleted successfully Magnum 6K25 lacp show lacp Orphan Ports 182 MAGNUM 6K
195. ee Appendix 3 for additional information on Daylight Savings Time The lists of countries for the time zone are Australia Belgium Canada Chile Cuba Egypt France Finland Germany Greece Iraq Italy London Namibia Portugal Russia Spain Sweden Switzerland Syria USA Network time Many networks synchronize the time using a Network time server The network time server provides time to the different machines using the Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP To specify the SNTP server one has to 1 Set the IP parameters on the switch 2 Define the SNTP parameters To set the SNTP parameter enter the SNTP configuration mode from the manager The setsntp sync sntp commands can then be used to setup the time synchronization automatically from the SNTP server Note it is not sufficient to setup the SNTP variables Make sure to setup the synchronization frequency as well as enable SNTP The list of relevant commands is listed below Syntax setsntp setver lt ipaddress gt timeout lt 1 10 gt retry lt 1 3 gt Syntax syne hour lt 0 24 gt min lt 0 59 gt default 24 hours The time zone and daylight savings time information have to be set for SNTP server to set the proper time Syntax sntp enable disable For example to set the SNTP server to be 204 65 129 2012 with a time out of 3 seconds and a number of retries set to 3 times allowing the synchronization to be ever 5 hours the following commands are u
196. eeseeereess 31 Context eas td tu nessadiaiaetons 32 EXS nnes rad aa EA E RRE RAR 33 List of commands in this Chapter s ccisscsudesetiengnonhhe nu 33 3 IP Address and System Information eee 35 Tell te E E ite Dae tsattt tes tineratvtoctes dead teabiess 35 Importance of an IP address 35 B E PIESE 36 Bootp Data bases cai sionti av iiconaiain niii iieii 36 Configuring Auto DHCP Bootp Manwal 37 TD Ly ete E theta tian eace 38 Setting Serial POLL parameters 40 Systemi parameter S roiie oae E i a es 41 Date and inienn ace a snc catch 6 43 Network Umenia anir a 44 Saving and loading configuration 45 Caio ie na e ieatgcsncseesoasieartessnseencesatai 48 Displaying configuration sssssesessesresresreseesesseererreresreseeseesresees 50 IPAS ING COM MOUTATON eener ienien i 53 Displaying Serial Number ssssssssssessesessesseesessesreeresrrssesrrsersresees 54 List of commands in this chapter sssessessesseeseereessresreseesresees 55 Other commands usciranno aaia 57 We D ba A E E A shed dense snatecavanssees 59 P T a AA AAA A A AAA 59 Introduction to IPVG P 59 What s changed in IPVGP P 60 TVG Addtessine innorat Eae aa A eeu AE 61 Conhounno IPye 61 List of commands in this Chapter s csceisceasoesiedearvoensitoeretd 62 5 Access Considerations siasivsescscendesverseatiavsnnsideadesneveeantsnes 64 Securing ACCESS 64 SOO EGS re ees toerist ged econ cos clad le cae deca cea 64 P
197. efined in steps 1 2 and 3 Use the upgrade command as shown in Figure 17 and reboot the switch Magnum6K25 upgrade mode bl The BOOT Flash image will be replaced by the version embedded in this application Do you wish to upgrade the image Y or N Y Uncompressing image and programming flash memory This will take up to a minute to complete Boot loader upgrade is successful Magnum6K25 reboot Proceed on rebooting the switch Y or N Y Do you wish to save current configuration Y or N Y FIGURE 157 Updating the boot code over the network using the upgrade command Make sure to reboot the switch after the boot loader upgrade is completed 11 This question is asked on the console port serial connection only 12 Note If the response is not given the switch will not load the new boot code 319 UPDATING SOFTWARE STEP 4 Make sure there is no power failure during the boot loader update If the boot code does not load properly please contact GarrettCom Inc technical support at 510 438 9071 email Supt Ort Qg arrettcom com Intentionally left blank 320 INDEX Index I I 276 l n gt 277 802 1d 123 127 135 136 138 141 148 268 802 1q 209 802 1Q 103 106 123 802 1w 135 136 141 150 151 802 1x 77 78 79 80 85 263 access 50 73 74 75 229 262 action 66 67 70 75 262 action port 66 add 29 33 69 108 109 114 122 181 183
198. eless Bridges The list of commands to configure edit and manage LACP on the Magnum 6K family of switches is the following Syntax lacp enable the LACP configuration module within CLI Syntax lacp lt enable disable gt enable or disable LACP Syntax add port lt numbet list range gt priority lt 0 65535 gt add the specified list of ports to form the logical LACP trunk Default value for priority is 32768 The lower the value assigned to priority the higher the priority The port with the highest priority is the primary port Syntax del port lt number list range gt delete specified ports from the LACP membership Syntax edit port lt number list range gt priority lt priority gt edit the membership of the ports specified The priority can be from O 65535 Syntax show lacp displays the status and other relevant LACP information 7 Before enabling please ensure that the correct ports are configured If network connectivity is lost due to a port being configured as a LACP port you will need to physically access the switch via the console to correct this error 181 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Some other definitions are worth noting are primary port Primary port is the port over which specific traffic like Multicast IGMP unknown Unicast and broadcast traffic is transmitted As shown by the add port command the port with the lowest priority value has the highest priority and is designat
199. elow are available tested and working before you start For serial port updates directly through the serial console port 7 A female female null modem cable This cable is available from GarrettCom Inc as well as from LANstore Inc http www lanstore com 8 Serial port if your PC does not have a serial port you may want to invest in a USB to serial converter This is again available from LANstore or from GarrettCom Alternately a USB to serial cable can also be used This cable is available also available from LAN store or GarrettCom Inc 9 A PC or a workstation computer with a terminal emulation program such as HyperTerminal included with Windows or Teraterm pro or other equivalent software Make sure that the software supports Xmodem protocol 10 Enough disk space to store and retrieve the configuration files as well as copy software files from GarrettCom We recommend that at least 15MB of disk space is available for this purpose 11 Manager level account name and password of the switch being upgraded 12 Connection to the Internet Make sure the connection does not block ftp file transfers For remote updates over the network 1 APC or a workstation computer with a FTP as well as TFTP server software This software is widely available as a free download on the Internet If you need assistance in finding one contact GarrettCom tech support at 510 438 9071 email support garrettcom com 302 UPDATING MNS 6K S
200. elpful if there was a visual indication for faults on components on the network Normally these would be performed by LED s While the Magnum 6K family of switches has the necessary LED s to provide the information needed it also has a provision for tripping or activating an external relay to electrically trigger any circuit desired These could be an indicator light a flashing strobe light an audible alarm or any other such devices The Magnum 6K family of switches has a software optional controlled relay contact that can be use to report alarm conditions The relay is held open no connection in normal circumstances and will go to close position during alarm conditions Two types of alarm signals are defined in the alarm system e SUSTAINED e MOMENTARY The SUSTAINED mode is used to report a continuing error condition The MOMENTARY mode is used to report a single event The following pre defined events are currently supported on the MNS 6K and the relay which can be triggered by software 235 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE 1 S RING OPEN SUSTAINED 2 Cold Start MOMENTARY 3 Warm Start MOMENTARY 4 Link Up MOMENTARY 5 Link Down MOMENTARY 6 Authentication Failure MOMENTARY 7 RMON Rising Alarm MOMENTARY 8 RMON Falling Alarm MOMENTARY 9 Intruder Alarm MOMENTARY 10 Link Loss Learn Triggered MOMENTARY 11 Broadcast Storm Detected MOMENTARY 12 STP RSTP Reconfigured MOMENTARY
201. end advertisements for that VLAN In the figure below tagged VLAN ports on switch A and switch C advertise VLANs 22 and 33 to ports on other GVRP enabled switches that can dynamically join the VLANs A port can learn of a dynamic VLAN through devices that are not aware of GVRP Switch B Switch C Switch C GVRP On Port5 dynamically joined VLAN 22 Switch A Ports 11 12 belong to Tagged VLAN 33 VLAN 22 Tagged VLAN 22 Switch D GVRP On Dynamic VLAN 33 Switch B No GVRP Tagged Switch E VLAN 22 Port 2 dynamically joined VLAN 33 Ports 7 dynamically joined VLAN 33 Switch D Port 3 dynamically joined VLAN 33 Ports 6 dynamically joined VLAN 33 FIGURE 122 VLAN Assignment in GVRP enabled switches Non GVRP enabled switches can impact VLAN settings on other GVRP enabled switches An unknown VLAN is a VLAN that the switch learns of by GVRP For example suppose that port 1 on switch A is connected to port 5 on switch C Because switch A has VLAN 22 statically configured while switch C does not have this VLAN statically configured VLAN 22 is handled as an Unknown VLAN on port 5 in switch C Conversely if VLAN 22 was statically configured on switch C but port 5 was not a member port 5 would become a member when advertisements for VLAN 22 were received from switch A GVRP provides a pet port join request option which can be configured 211 MAGNUM 6K SWI
202. engine ID value is 6K_v3 Engine This command allows the user to change the engine ID Syntax authtrap lt enable disable gt enables or disables authentication traps generation Syntax show authtrap displays the current value of authentication trap status Syntax deftrap community lt string gt defines the default community string to be used when sending traps When user does not specify the trap community name when setting a trap station using the trap command the default trap community name is used Syntax show deftrap displays the current value of default trap 232 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Syntax trap lt add delete gt id lt id gt type lt v1 v2 inform gt host lt host ip gt community lt string gt port lt 1 65534 gt define the trap and inform manager stations The station can receive v1 v2 traps and or inform notifications An inform notification is an acknowledgments that a trap has been received A user can add up to 5 stations Syntax show trap id lt id gt shows the configured trap stations in tabular format id is optional and is the number corresponding to the trap entry number in the table Syntax com2sec lt add delete gt id lt id gt secname lt name gt source lt source gt community lt community gt a part of the View based Access control model VACM as defined in RFC 2275 This specifies the mapping from a source community pair to a security name On
203. er 56 259 set untag 194 271 setvar 42 55 222 226 232 247 259 273 set weight 190 193 271 show 19 27 31 32 36 38 39 41 42 43 46 48 54 56 57 58 61 62 63 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 74 75 80 81 82 85 90 93 94 95 97 98 99 100 101 102 108 109 110 112 113 114 116 117 122 124 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 138 139 140 141 143 144 145 146 147 148 160 161 162 165 166 167 181 184 185 191 192 193 194 202 203 205 206 207 213 215 221 222 223 226 228 231 232 234 237 239 240 242 243 245 246 248 249 254 256 259 261 262 263 265 266 267 INDEX 268 269 270 271 272 273 275 277 291 show ip access 74 show ipconfig 62 261 show active snmp 221 223 225 232 272 show active stp 127 138 143 148 160 165 166 167 268 269 show active vlan 113 show address table 253 254 show alarm 237 238 239 275 show auth config 81 show auth ports 82 show backpressure 97 98 102 265 show broadcast protect 100 101 show config 33 50 51 52 57 257 261 show console 38 39 58 261 show date 43 58 261 show daylight 43 show dualhome 171 172 173 270 291 show flowcontrol 97 98 102 265 show ftp 46 48 56 248 256 271 291 show gvrp 215 272 show history 245 256 277 show host 57 show igmp 202 203 205 206 207 271 show ip access 74 show ipco
204. ervices or the FTP services The field is needed if either the TFTP or FTP is the mode chosen File lt name gt is needed for saving the configuration If mode lt tftp ftp gt is used be aware that most FTP and TFTP services as a default do not over write files If the file transfer fails check to see if the file name already exists or use a different file name with the saveconf command Also make sure the ftp or TFIP FTP services are running before the saveconf command is used on the switch Serial Connection To save the configuration using the serial connection use the saveconf command as shown below In this example we will show the saveconf interaction using the Hyper Terminal software available on most Windows systems Magnum6K25 saveconf mode serial file 6kconfig 10 11 Do you wish to upload the configuration Y or N Y Use XMODEM to download configuration file FIGURE 147 Example of saveconf command using serial interface At this point switch to the VT100 emulation software e g HyperTerminal on Windows platform and invoke the Xmodem file receive Figure 8 shows the Xmodem process for HyperTerminal application Intentionally left blank for image continuity image shown on next page 310 UPDATING SOFTWARE STEP 2 e gci HyperTerminal File Edit View Call iichSm Help Send File Receive File al ture Text Send Text File Capture to Printer
205. essed via the serial port or through the network using telnet For using telnet make sure the switch is configured with the proper IP address netmask and default gateway information If needed refer to Chapter 1 of the User Guide on how to set IP address and related parameters on the Magnum 6K switch Make sure the Manager level login name and password associated with that switch is also known Without the proper access login name and password the switch cannot be upgraded Serial Connection Connect the serial port on the switch to the serial port on the computer using the serial cable listed in step 1 The settings for the HyperTerminal software emulating a VT100 are shown in Figure 5 below Make sure the serial parameters are set as shown or bps 38400 data bits 8 parity none stop bits 1 flow control none 308 UPDATING SOFTWARE STEP 2 zixl Port Settings Bits per second fssa00 OUS Sd Data bits js w Parity Nowe S l Stop bits i ws Flow control None S l Restore Defaults OK Cancel FIGURE 145 HyperTerminal screen showing the serial settings Network Access Prerequisites a PC or workstation computer with telnet software and the IP address of the Magnum 6K switch or DNS name associated with the switch to be upgraded Access the Magnum 6K switch by using the telnet command For example if the switch has the IP address 192 168 10 11 the command is as shown in Fi
206. essure Disable Magnum6K25 device setport port 11 flow enable bp enable Magnum6K25 device show port Keys E Enable D Disable H Half Duplex F Full Duplex M Multiple VLAN s NA Not Applicable LI Listening LE Learning F Forwarding B Blocking Port Name Control Dplx Media Link Speed Part Auto VianID GVRP STP 9 Bi E H 10Tx UP 10 No E 1 10 B2 E H 10Tx DOWN 10 No E 1 11 JohnDoe E H 10Tx DOWN 10 No E 1 12 JaneDoe E H 10Tx DOWN 10 No E 1 13 B5 E F 100Tx UP 100 No E 1 14 B6 E H 10Tx DOWN 10 No E 1 15 B7 E H 10Tx DOWN 10 No E 1 16 B8 E H 10Tx DOWN 10 No E 1 Magnum6K25 device show port 11 Configuration details of port 11 Port Name JohnDoe Port Link State DOWN Port Type TP Port Port Admin State Enable Port VLAN ID 1 Port Speed 10Mbps Port Duplex Mode half duplex Port Auto negotiation State Enable Port STP State NO STP Note the flow control and back pressure is Port GVRP State No GVRP shown as enabled for the specific port The Port Priority Type None global show port command does not show Port Security Enable this detail The back pressure and flow control Port Flow Control Enable parameters are global i e the same for all Port Back Pressure Enable the ports Magnum6K25 device exit Magnum6K25 FIGURE 65 Setting up back pressure and flow control on ports Broadcast Storms One of the best features of the Magnum 6K family of switches is its
207. est again A few additional facts about IGMP L2 e GarrettCom Magnum 6K family of switches configured for IGMP L2 can perform the Join aggregation required by IGMP 201 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE e Multicast forwarding is done based on MAC addresses so datagram to IP addresses 224 1 2 3 and 239 129 2 3 can be forwarded on the same port groups It is not possible to do forwarding based on IP addresses as the Magnum 6K family of switches operate at Layer 2 e Magnum 6K family of switches configured for IGMP 12 are aware of IP address range 224 0 0 x as well as MAC address range 01 00 5e 00 00 xx aware as required by RFC 4541 e The Magnum 6K family of switches configured for IGMP L2 support forwarding to ports on which multicast routers are attached in addition to the ports where IGMP joins have been received Thus IGMP 12 and IGMP L3 networks can co exist e The Magnum 6K family of switches configured for IGMP L2 are aware of topology changes so new queries can be sent or tables updated to ensure robustness Configuring IGMP Syntax igmp IGMP configuration mode Syntax igmp lt enable disable gt enable or disable IGMP on the switch Syntax show igmp IGMP operation status Syntax mcast lt enable disable gt enable or disable unknown multicast streams The default is enabled Syntax set igmp mode lt normal 12 gt set the IGMP mode Normal is when a L3 device is in the network and is the IGMP root The
208. etween 0 the default and 7 As the precedence value increases the algorithm allocates more bandwidth to that traffic to make sure that it is served more quickly when congestion occurs Magnum 6K family of switches can assign a weight to each flow which determines the transmit order for queued packets In this scheme lower weights set on all ports are provided more service IP precedence serves as a divisor to this weighting factor For instance traffic with an IP precedence field value of 7 gets a lower weight than traffic with an IP Precedence field value of 3 and thus has priority in the transmit order Once the port weight is set the hardware will interpret the weight setting for all ports as outlined below assuming the queues are sufficiently filled if there are no packets for example in the high priority queue packets are serviced on a first come first served FCFS basis from the low priority queue Setting Hardware traffic queue behavior E 0 No priority traffic is sent alternately from each queue and packets are queued alternately in each queue 1 Two packets are sent from the HIGH priority queue and one packet from LOW priority queue 2 Four packets are sent from the HIGH priority queue and one packet from LOW priority queue 3 Six packets are sent from the HIGH priority queue and one packet from LOW priority queue 4 Eight packets are sent from the HIGH priority queue and one packet
209. f specified ports Syntax show Ill display the status of LLL 161 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Magnum6K25 stp Magnum6K25 stp IIl enable Link Loss Learn Enabled Magnum6K25 stp Ill add port 1 2 3 Added Ports 1 2 3 Magnum6K25 stp show III Link Loss Learn Status LLL Status ENABLED LLL Enabled on Ports 1 2 3 Magnum6K25 stp Ill del port 2 3 Deleted Ports 2 3 Magnum6K25 stp IIl disable Link Loss Learn Disabled FIGURE 89 Link Loss Learn LLL setup Setup LLL on ports connected to other switches participating in S Ring RSTP Operation with RS Ring When the managed Magnum 6K family of switches is used in the network and the RS Ring feature is enabled each of the managed Magnum 6K switch knows of the neighbor and the related associations and topologies The RS Ring capability overrides the normal RSTP analysis for the ring pair ports on each switch providing quick recovery of the ring fault without conflicting with standard RSTP Unlike S Ring the decision is made by each individual switch and not by the ring master For RS Ring the user must select the two ports port pairs and enable RS Ring on each of the switches in the ring 5 Note S Ring license also enables use of RS Ring 162 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE FIGURE 90 More than one RS Ring cannot be defined per managed Magnum 6K switch Note unmanaged switches cannot participate in RS Ring
210. for specific purposes and it is recommended they not be used There are a maximum of 32 VLANs per switch which can be defined and supported Magnum6K25 vlan type port Magnum6K25 port vian show vlan type port VLAN ID 1 Name Default VLAN Status Active 112 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE VLAN ID 10 Name engineering Status Active VLAN ID 20 Name sales Status Active VLAN ID 30 Name marketing Status Active Magnum6K25 port vian stop vian all All active VLAN s stopped Magnum6K25 port vlan exit Magnum6K25 set vlan type tag VLAN set to Tag based Magnum6K25 show active vlian Tag VLAN is currently active Magnum6K25 show vian type tag VLAN ID 1 Name Default VLAN Status Active UNTAGGED UP UNTAGGED DOWN To switch to TAG VLAN the port VLAN has to be disabled or stopped Only one type of VLAN can co exist at the same time Exit out of Port VLAN configuration mode and set the VLAN type to be Tag VLAN 113 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE UNTAGGED DOWN UNTAGGED DOWN UNTAGGED UP a Note ports 14 16 are DOWN the UNTAGGED DOWN VLAN configuration is preferably done before UNTAGGED DOWN devices are plugged in to avoid connectivity UNTAGGED DOWN repercussions Magnum6K25 vlan type tag Magnum6K25 tag vian add id 10 name mkt port 14 16 Tag based vlan Added Successfully Vilanid 10 Vlan name mkt The edit co
211. free MNS 6K will poll the network for DHCP server then BootP server then check if the IP address 192 68 1 2 is freed up bootimg lt enable disable gt valiad with type bootp only Allows the switch to load the image file from the BootP server This is useful when a new switch is put on a network and the IT policies are set to load only a specific MNS 6Kimage which is supported and tested by IT personnel bootcfg lt enable disable gt valiad with type bootp only Allows the switch to load the configuration file from the BootP server This is useful when a new switch is put on a network and the specific configurations are loaded from a centralized BootP server telnet lt enable disable gt enables or disables telnet sessions telnet lt ipaddress gt port lt port number gt ze net from the switch set serial baud lt rate gt data lt 5 6 7 8 gt parity lt none odd even gt stop lt 1 1 5 2 gt flowctrl lt none xonxoff gt sets serial port parameters snmp enter the snmp configuration mode setvar sysname syscontact syslocation lt string gt sets the system name contact and location information set timezone GMT or hour lt 0 14 gt min lt 0 59 gt sets the timezone set date year lt 2001 2035 gt month lt 1 12 gt day lt 1 31 gt format lt mmddyyyy ddmmyyyy yyyymmdd gt sets the date and the format in which the date is displayed 55 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER G
212. from LOW priority queue 5 Ten packets are sent from the HIGH priority queue and one packet from LOW priority queue 6 Twelve packets are sent from the HIGH priority queue and one packet from LOW priority queue 7 All packets are sent from the HIGH priority queue and none are sent from LOW priority queue FIGURE 111 Port weight settings and the meaning of the setting 190 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Syntax show qos type lt port tag tos gt port lt port list range gt displays the QoS settings Sometimes it is necessary to change the priority of the packets going out of a switch For example when a packet is received untagged and has to be transmitted with an addition of the 802 1p priority tag the tag can be assigned depending on the untag value set For example if the untag command is set to port 1 tag 2 priority low untagged packets received on that port will be tagged with a priority low upon transmit Syntax set untag port lt port list range gt priority lt high low gt tag lt 0 7 gt The 802 1p user priority assigned to untagged received packets to be transmitted as tagged from the priority queue Magnum6K25 show port Keys E Enable D Disable H Half Duplex F Full Duplex M Multiple VLAN s NA Not Applicable LI Listening LE Learning F Forwarding B Blocking Port Name Control Dplx Media Link Speed Part Auto VianID GVRP STP 9 B1 E H 10Tx UP 10 No E 1 10 B2 E H
213. g show setup parameters configured Syntax enable lt user name gt changing the privilege level Syntax add uset lt name gt level lt number gt adding a user Syntax delete user lt name gt deleting a user Syntax passwd user lt name gt changing a password for a user Syntax chlevel user lt name gt level lt number gt changing the user privilege level Syntax usetaccess user lt name gt service lt telnet web gt lt enable disable gt Syntax help lt command string gt help for a specific command 257 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Syntax command lt Enter gt options for a command Syntax lt TAB gt fisting all commands available at the privilege level Syntax lt command string gt lt TAB gt options for a command Syntax lt first character of the command gt lt TAB gt isting commands starting with the character Syntax logout logout from the CLI session Chapter 3 IP Address and System Information Syntax set bootmode type lt dhcp bootp manual auto gt bootimg lt enable disable gt bootcfg lt enable disable gt assign the boot mode for the switch Where lt dhcp bootp manual auto gt where dhcp look only for DHCP servers on the network for the IP address Disable bootp or other modes bootp look only for bootp servers on the network Disable dhcp or other mode manual do not set the IP address automatically auto the switch will first look f
214. ge which shows the completion of the file transfer from saveconf command Network Access Prerequisites PC or workstation computer with telnet software and a PC or workstation computer with FTP or TFTP server software For simplicity the two PC s or workstations computers can be one and the same To save using TFTP or FTP first ensure that you have the FTP or TFTP server set up and the switch can ping the TFTP or the FTP server For ftp services make sure the server can support anonymous login or make sure the login password information is available For saving the configuration use the same saveconf command listed above In the example below assume the IP address of the TFIP or FTP server is 192 168 10 99 and is connected to the switch with proper network connectivity Le the switch can ping the TFTP or FTP server as well Example using TFTP Magnum6K25 saveconf mode tftp 192 168 10 99 file 6kconfig 10 11 Do you wish to upload the configuration Y or N Y FIGURE 152 Example of saveconf command for tfip 312 UPDATING SOFTWARE STEP 2 This will save the file 6kconfig 10 11 to the specified IP address 192 168 10 99 in the default TFTP folder Using FTP would be the same as Figure 12 except replace mode tftp with mode ftp 8 gur pt rep tp In some situations e g routed networks TFTP or FTP services may be blocked Check for network connectivity using the ping command
215. ger for S Ring to act for either fault recovery or ring restoration The interruption or the restoration of the flow of BPDU packets is one trigger link loss is another and action is taken by S Ring based on whichever occurs first Ring learn features One of the S Ring software commands s ring learn causes the scanning of all ports in the Magnum 6K family of switches for the presence of rings This command can be a handy tool in setting up the S Ring product for correct initial operation During a ring learn scan if any port receives a BPDU packet that was also originated by the same switch the source and destination ports are designated as a ring port pair and they are automatically added to the S Ring port pair list for that 6K Switch The user can enable or disable ports pairs that are on the S Ring list by CLI commands in order to exercise final control if needed This feature is not available with RS Ring 158 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Configuring S Ring S Ring is a licensed software feature from GarrettCom Inc Before using the S Ring capabilities authorize the use of the software with the license key To obtain the license key please contact GarrettCom Inc Sales for purchasing the S Ring feature or Technical Support to obtain the 12 character key If the S Ring capability was purchased along with the switch the software license code will be included with the switch Syntax authorize lt module gt ke
216. gged port on another device GarrettCom Inc recommends that you use Tagged VLANs for the static VLANs A dynamic VLAN continues to exist on a port for as long as the port continues to receive advertisements of that VLAN from another device connected to that port or until you e Convert the VLAN to a static VLAN e Reconfigure the port to Block or Disable e Disable GVRP e Reboot the switch The time to live for dynamic VLANs is 10 seconds That is if a port has not received an advertisement for an existing dynamic VLAN during the last 10 seconds the port removes itself from that dynamic VLAN 214 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Configuring GVRP The commands used for configuring GVRP are Syntax show gvtp shows whether GVRP is disabled along with the current settings for the maximum number of VLANs and the current Primary VLAN Syntax gvrp lt enable disable gt enable or disable GVRP Syntax show vlan Uist all the VLANs including dynamic VLANs on the switch Syntax set ports port lt port list range gt state lt learn block disable gt set the state of the port to learn block or disable for GVRP Note the default state is disable Syntax static vilan lt VID gt convert a dynamic VLAN to a static VLAN Syntax set forbid vlan lt tag vlanid gt forbid lt port number list range gt sets the forbid GVRP capability on the ports specified Syntax show forbid display the ports with GVRP for
217. gh Chapter 6 focuses on security and access consideration Bad passwords trump any security setup so setup the manager passwords carefully as described in Chapter 2 Chapter 4 describes how to setup port access using MAC address security Chapter 5 describes how a RADIUS server can be used for authentication and access Chapter 6 essentially is similar to Chapter 5 and talks about using a TACACS server instead of a RADIUS server Chapter 7 talks about port mirroring and preventing broadcast storms Port mirroring is necessary in a network to reflect traffic from one port onto another port so that the traffic can be captured for protocol analysis or intrusion analysis Chapter 8 deals with VLANs VLANs provide security as well as traffic separation This chapter shows how VLANs can be setup and managed At this stage the network and the switch are secured It is now critical to make the network more reliable The User Guide switches gears and talks about STP RSTP and S Ring technologies which can be used for making the network reliable These technologies allow resiliency in a network Chapters 9 through Chapter 12 discuss some resiliency techniques Chapter 9 shows how STP can be setup and used Today RSTP is preferred over STP Chapter 10 shows how RSTP is setup and used as well as how RSTP can be used with legacy devices which support STP only Chapter 11 focuses on S Ring and setup of S Ring optional This chapter also talks about
218. gnated Root Designated Root Priority Root Bridge Forward Delay Root Bridge Hello Time Root Bridge Max Age YES YES 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Normal STP 80 00 00 20 06 25 ed 80 15535 20 15 30 0 0 80 00 00 20 06 25 ed 80 133 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE RSTP CONFIGURATION Rapid STP STP Enabled Global NO Magnum6K25 stp FIGURE 78 Configuring STP parameters List of commands in this chapter Syntax show stp lt config ports gt regardless of whether STP is enabled or disabled default this command lists the switch s full STP configuration including general settings and port settings Syntax stp STP Configuration mode Syntax stp lt enable disable gt Start Enable or stop Disable STP Syntax priority port lt number list range gt value lt 0 255 0 65535 gt specifies the port or switch level priority When a port s are specified the priority is associated with ports and their value is O 255 If no ports are specified then the switch bridge priority is specified and its value is 0 65535 Syntax cost port lt number list range gt value lt 0 65535 gt cost is specific to a port and the port s have to be specified Syntax port port lt number list range gt status lt enable disable gt specific ports may not need to participate in STP process These ports typically would be end stations If you are not sure let MNS 6K softwar
219. gnum6K25 user FIGURE 62 Configuring TACACS List of commands in this chapter Syntax show tacplus lt status servers gt show status of TACACS or servers configured as TACACS servers Syntax tacplus lt enable disable gt order lt tac local local tac gt enable or disable TACACS authentication specifying the order in which the server or local database is looked up where tac local implies first the LACAS server then local logins on the device Syntax tacsetvet lt add delete gt id lt num gt ip lt ip addr gt port lt tcp port gt encrypt lt enable disable gt key lt string gt mgrlevel lt level gt oprlevel lt level gt adds a list of up to five TACACS servers where lt add delete gt mandatory adds or delete a TACACS server id lt num gt mandatory the order in which the TACACS servers should be polled for authenticaton ip lt ip addr gt mandatory for add the IP address of the TACACS server 91 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE port lt tcp port gt optional for add TCP port number on which the server is listening encrypt lt enable disable gt optional for add enable or disable packet encryption key lt string gt optional for add mandatory with encrypt when encryption is enabled the secret shared key string must be supplied mgrlevel lt level gt and oprlevel lt level gt optional specifies the manager
220. gt quiet lt 0 65535 gt maxreauth lt 0 10 gt transmit lt 1 65535 gt set port access parameters for authenticating PCs or supplicants 284 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES Command port mirror lt enter gt MNS 6K USER GUIDE Description configure port mirror settings port security configure port security settings ptiority port lt number list range gt value lt 0 255 0 65535 gt Specifies the port or switch level priority When a port s are specified the priority is associated with ports and their value is 0 255 If no ports are specified then the switch bridge priority is specified and its value is 0 65535 ptiority port lt number list range gt value lt 0 255 0 65535 gt specifies the port or switch level priority When a port s are specified the priority is associated with ports and their value is 0 255 If no ports are specified then the switch bridge priority is specified and its value is 0 65535 prttmr lt enable disable gt enable or disable port mirror settings ps lt enable disable gt enable or disable port security qos enter the QoS configuration mode quickcfg quick setup for snmpv3 configuration It automatically configures a default VACM view based access control model This allows any manager station to access the Magnum 6K switch either via SNMP v1 v2c or v3 The community name is public This command is only intended
221. gure 6 below C gt telnet 192 168 10 11 Trying connected FIGURE 146 Using telnet command to connect to a Magnum 6K switch with IP address 192 168 10 11 If the telnet command does not work check for network connectivity using the ping command Please ensure that a personal firewall or other firewall settings are not affecting ping or telnet commands If telnet services fail then the alternative is to locate the Magnum 6K switch and update the MNS 6K software through the serial port following the serial update process described in this document Saving the Configuration Before saving the configuration please ensure that one of the three capabilities listed below are available 10 telnet services can fail due to a number of reasons Please check with your system and or network administrator for additional help 309 UPDATING SOFTWARE STEP 2 1 Serial file transfer capability such as X modem or equivalent 2 IFIP server 3 FIP server As a good practice GarrettCom recommends that you should have all these capabilities available on your local computer if you plan to upgrade additional switches as well as switches in the future The command used for saving the existing configuration of the Magnum 6K switch is saveconf Syntax saveconf mode lt serial tftp ftp gt lt ipaddress gt file lt name gt Where the ipaddress is the IP Address of the server running the TFTP s
222. h host lt hostname gt ip lt ipaddress gt file lt filename gt parameters associated with tftp server for proper communications with the server Syntax xmodem lt get put gt type lt app config oldconf script hosts log gt upload and download information using xmodem command and console connection Where lt get put gt different xmodem file transfer operations get a file from the server or put the information on the server type lt app config oldconf script hosts log gt optional type field This is useful to specify whether a log file or host file is uploaded or downloaded This can also perform the task of exporting a configuration file or uploading a new image to the switch Syntax host lt addleditldel gt name lt host name gt ip lt ipaddress gt user lt user gt pass lt password gt create a host entry for accessing host This is equivalent to creating a host table on many systems Maximum of 10 such entries are allowed Syntax show host displays the host table entries Syntax climode lt scripticonsolelshow gt set the interactive CLI mode on console or off script To see the mode use the show option Syntax more lt enable disable show gt enable or disable the scrolling of lines one page at a time Syntax show config module lt module name gt displays the configuration Other commands Syntax configure access sets the access parameters eg
223. h 1 must be unblocked IP Multicast Filters IP multicast addresses occur in the range from 224 0 0 0 through 239 255 255 255 which corresponds to the Ethernet multicast address range of 01005e 000000 through 01005e 7fffff in hexadecimal Reserved Addresses Excluded from IP Multicast IGMP Filtering Traffic to IP multicast 198 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE groups in the IP address range of 224 0 0 0 to 224 0 0 255 will always be flooded because addresses in this range are well known or reserved addresses Thus if IP Multicast is enabled and there is an IP multicast group within the reserved address range traffic to that group will be flooded instead of filtered by the switch IGMP Support Magnum 6K family of switches support IGMP version 1 and version 2 The switch can act either as a querier or a nonquerier The querier router periodically sends general query messages to solicit group membership information Hosts on the network that are members of a multicast group send report messages When a host leaves a group it sends a leave group message The difference between Version 1 and Version 2 is that version 1 does not have a Leave mechanism for the host Magnum 6K family of switches do pruning when there is a leave message or a time expires on a port we prune the multicast group membership on that port 1 The Magnum 6K family of switches can snoop up to 256 Multicast groups It can be enabled within a po
224. h 1 with static VLANs VID 1 2 amp 3 Port 2 is a member of VIDs 1 2 amp 3 1 2 90 10 Port 2 advertises VIDs 1 2 amp 3 On Switch 2 Port 1 receives advertisement of VIDs 1 2 amp 3 AND becomes a member of VIDs 1 2 amp 3 As discussed above a GVRP enabled port can forward advertisement for a VLAN it learnt about So port 3 advertises VIDs 1 2 amp 3 but port 3 is NOT a member of VIDs 1 2 amp 3 at this point nor will it join the VLAN until and advertisement is received On Switch 3 port 4 receives advertisement of VIDs 1 2 amp 3 and becomes a member of VIDs 1 2 amp 3 Port 5 advertises VIDs 1 2 amp 3 but port 5 is NOT a member of VIDs 1 2 amp 3 at this point Port 6 on the end device is statically configured to be a member of VID 3 Port 6 advertises VID 3 Port 5 receives advertisement Port 4 advertises VID 3 Port 3 receives advertisement of VID 3 AND becomes a member of VID 3 Still not a member of VIDs 1 amp 2 as it did not receive any advertisements for VID 1 or 2 Port 1 advertises VID 3 AND becomes a member of VID 3 Port 1 is still not a member of VIDs 1 amp 2 210 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE 11 Port 2 receives advertisement of VID 3 Port 2 was already statically configured for VIDs 1 2 3 If a static VLAN is configured on at least one port of a switch and that port has established a link with another device then all other ports of that switch will s
225. h ping the default gateway specified ensure you are connected to the network to check for connectivity to ensure network connectivity Syntax ipconfig ip lt ip address gt mask lt subnet mask gt dgw lt gateway gt add del Magnum6K25 ipconfig ip 192 168 1 150 mask 255 255 255 0 dgw 192 168 1 10 Magnum6K25 save FIGURE 3 Setting IP address on the switch This document assumes the reader is familiar with IP addressing schemes as well as how net mask is used and how default gateways and routers are used in a network 26 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Reboot gives an opportunity to save the configuration prior to shutdown For a reboot simply type in the command reboot Note even though the passwords are not changed they can be changed later Magnum6K25 reboot Proceed on rebooting the switch Y or N Y Do you wish to save current configuration Y or N Y Magnum6K25 FIGURE 4 Rebooting the switch MNS 6K forces an answer the prompts with a Y or a N to prevent accidental keystroke errors and loss of work The parameters can be viewed at any time by using the show command The show command will be covered in more detail later in various sections throughout the document Magnum6K25 show setup Version Magnum 6K25 build 3 7 1 Sep 27 2007 16 41 37 MAC Address 00 20 08 03 05 09 IP Address 192 168 5 5 Subnet Mask 25
226. h the connections are from one module to another this is still not a valid configuration for LACP using 4 ports as the trunk group belongs to two dillerent VEAN G vibrattesibints gob RE 100 In the figure above there is no common VLAN between the two sets of ports so packets from one VLAN to another cannot be forwarded There should be at least one VLAN common between the two switches and the LACP port groups RE 101 This configuration is similar to the previous configuration except there is a common VLAN VLAN 1 between the two sets of LACP ports This is a valid configuration RE 102 In the architecture above using RSTP and LACP allows multiple switches to be configured together in a meshed redundant link architecture First define the RSTP configuration on the switches Then define the LACP ports Then finally connect the ports together to form the meshed redundant link topology as Shown above sssri FIGURE 103 LACP along with RSTP STP brings redundancy to the network core or FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU backbone Using this reliable core with a dual homed edge switch brings reliability and redundancy to the edge OF the MADOTR RE 104 This architecture is mot recommended RE 105 Creating a reliable infrastructure using wireless bridges between two facilities and LACP A indicates a Wi Fi wireless Bridge or other wireles
227. he section on Port VLAN for additional information 106 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE The reasons Private VLANs are constructed are for security For example if some confidential data were residing on VLAN 5 then only the people connected to that switch on VLAN 5 can have access to that information No one else can access that VLAN Similarly if another switch had video surveillance equipment on VLAN 20 then only ports with access to VLAN 20 can have access to the video surveillance information Finally one port can belong to multiple VLANs so depending on the function and use different VLANs information can be shared across a port Such a port is said to be in promiscuous mode for private VLANs Using Port VLANs Port VLANs ate rarely used in networks which uses the same VLANs across multiple switches Port VLANs are used when VLANs are setup up on a single switch and connectivity between the system on different VLANs is needed Broadcast traffic is not isolated to one VLAN in Port VLANs General steps for using port VLANs are 1 Plan your VLAN strategy and create a map of the logical topology that will result from configuring VLANs Include consideration for the interaction between VLANs 2 Configure at least one VLAN in addition to the default VLAN 3 Assign the desired ports to the VLANs 4 Decide on trunking strategy how will the VLAN information be propagated from one switch to another and also what VLAN inf
228. he RSTP configuration mode Syntax rstp lt enable disable gt enable RSTP by default this is disabled and has to be manually activated 137 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Syntax port port lt number list range gt status lt enable disable gt migration lt enable gt edge lt enable disable gt p2p lt on off auto gt Example port port lt number list range gt p2p off Set the point to point value to off on all ports that are connected to shared LAN segments i e connections to hubs The default value is auto P2P ports would typically be end stations or computers on the network Example port pott lt number list range gt edge enable enable all ports connected to other hubs bridges and switches as edge ports Example port port lt number list range gt migration enable sez this for all ports connected to other devices such as hubs bridges and switches known to support IEEE 802 1d STP services but cannot support RSTP services Syntax show active stp status whether STP or RSTP is running Syntax show stp lt config ports gt display the RSTP or STP parameters Magnum6K25 rstp Magnum6K25 rstp show rstp config RSTP CONFIGURATION Rapid STP STP Enabled Global NO Magnum6K25 rstp rstp enable Successfully set the RSTP status Magnum6K25 rstp show active stp Current Active Mode RSTP RSTP is Enabled Magnum6K25 rstp show stp config RST
229. heck SMTP settings the email sent out by specifying the email subject field server address to field and the body of the text See example fo the body of the text message later in this chapter server mandatory SMTP server IP v4 address to mandatory the recipient email address from mandatory the sender email address subject mandatory email subject or title body mandatory email body Syntax server ip lt ip addr gt port lt 1 65535 gt retry lt 0 3 gt configure the global SMTP server settings ip mandatory SMTP server IP address port mandatory TCP port to be used for SMTP communications default is 25 retry optional specifies how many times to retry if an error occurs when sending email Range from 0 to 3 Default is 0 Syntax smtp lt enable disable gt enables or disables SMTP to send SNMP alerts by email Syntax exportlog mode lt serialltftplftp gt lt ipaddress gt file lt name gt doctype lt rawlhtml gt facilitates the export of the event log information as a text file or as an HTML file Syntax V repeat the last command 276 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Syntax lt n gt repeat the n th command as indicated by a show history Syntax show history show the last 25 commands executed if less than 25 commands are executed only those commands executed are shown Syntax lt Up attow gt every time the key is pressed the l
230. his recipient If value is none no traps are sent to this recipient Value can also be a combination of S SNMP R RMON and E ENTERPRISE For example trap SR means that SNMP and RMON traps will be sent via email to the recipient If this option is not defined the recipient will have a default value of all events optional this is the event filter Value can be all all event severity types will be sent to recipient none no event will be sent to recipient or a combination of T informational A activity C critical F fatal and D debug With 275 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE event ACF implies that events of severity types activity critical and fatal will be sent to recipients by email If this option is not defined a value of all is taken ip optional SMTP server IP address This is the SMTP server to connect to for this particular user If this option is not defined the global default SMTP server is used port optional TCP port of the SMTP server If this is not defined the global default TCP port is used Syntax delete id lt 1 5 gt delete the specific id specified The deleted id no longer receives the traps via email The id is added using the add command Syntax sendmail server lt ip addr gt to lt email addr gt from lt email addr gt subject lt string gt body lt string gt customize and also to send a test email to c
231. host This is equivalent to creating a host table on many systems Maximum of 10 such entries are allowed Syntax show host displays the host table entries 260 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Syntax climode lt scripticonsolelshow gt set the interactive CLI mode on console or off script To see the mode use the show option Syntax more lt enableldisablelshow gt enable or disable the scrolling of lines one page at a time Syntax configure access sets the access parameters eg disable telnet session Syntax show ipconfig shows IP parameters set Syntax show console reviews console settings Syntax show serial reviews serial settings Syntax show setup reviews system parameters Syntax show sysconfig reviews settable system parameters Syntax show time shows the system time Syntax show timezone shows the system timezone Syntax show date shows the system date Syntax show uptime shows the amount of time the switch has been operational Syntax show config module lt module name gt displays the configuration Syntax show setup display the setup serial number factory code information and more Chapter 4 IPv6 Syntax ipconfig ip lt ip address gt mask lt subnet mask gt dgw lt gateway gt add del configure and IPv6 address The add delete option can be used to add or delete IPv4 IPv6 addresses Syntax show ipconfig display the IP configuratio
232. how flowcontrol XOnLimit 4 XOffLimit 6 Magnum6K25 device flowcontrol xonlimit 10 xofflimit 15 XOn Limit set successfully XOff Limit set successfully Magnum6K25 device show flowcontrol XOnLimit 10 XOffLimit 15 Magnum6K25 device show backpressure Rx Buffer Threshold 28 Magnum6K25 device backpressure rxthreshold 45 Rx Buffer Threshold set successfully Magnum6K25 device show backpressure Rx Buffer Threshold 45 Magnum6K25 device show port Keys E Enable D Disable H Half Duplex F Full Duplex M Multiple VLAN s NA Not Applicable LI Listening LE Learning F Forwarding B Blocking Port Name Control Dplx Media Link Speed Part Auto VianID GVRP STP 9 B1 E H 10Tx UP 10 No E 1 10 B2 E H 10Tx DOWN 10 No E 1 11 JohnDoe E H 10Tx DOWN 10 No E 1 12 JaneDoe E H 10Tx DOWN 10 No E 1 13 B5 E F 100Tx UP 100 No E 1 14 B6 E H 10Tx DOWN 10 No E 1 15 B7 E H 10Tx DOWN 10 No E 1 16 B8 E H 10Tx DOWN 10 No E 1 Magnum6K25 device show port 11 Configuration details of port 11 Port Name JohnDoe Port Link State DOWN Port Type TP Port Port Admin State Enable Port VLAN ID et Port Speed 10Mbps Port Duplex Mode half duplex Port Auto negotiation State Enable Port STP State NO STP Port GVRP State No GVRP Port Priority Type None Port Security Enable 98 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Port Flow Control Disable Port Back Pr
233. igned to priority the higher the priority The port with the highest priority is the primary port over which certain types of traffic like IGMP is transmitted Syntax del pott lt number list range gt delete specified ports from the LACP membership Syntax edit port lt number list range gt priority lt priority gt edit the membership of the ports specified The priority can be from O 65535 Syntax show lacp displays the status and other relevant LACP information 185 Chapter 15 Quality of Service Prioritize traffic in a network uality of Service QoS refers to the capability of a network to provide different priorities to different types of traffic Not all traffic in the network has the same priority Being able to differentiate different types of traffic and allowing this traffic to accelerate through the network improves the overall performance of the network and provides the necessary quality of service demanded by different users and devices The primary goal of QoS is to provide priority including dedicated bandwidth QoS concepts The Magnum 6K family of switches supports QoS as specified in the IEEE 802 1p and IEEE 802 1q standards QoS is important in network environments where there are time critical applications such as voice transmission or video conferencing which can be adversely effected by packet transfer delays or other latency in a network Most switches today implement buffers to queue inc
234. ill work with the primary LACP port only All IGMP traffic is sent via a primary port If needed this port can be mirrored for traffic analysis LACP Configuration For LACP to work on the Magnum 6K family of switches only one trunk per module can be created Some valid connections are shown in the picture below 175 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE A B c D 1 5 7 1 5 7 Eol A B c D GarrettCom GarrettCom Switch 1 Switch 1 Switch 2 Switch 2 A B c D GarrettCom GarrettCom FIGURE 97 Some valid LACP configurations Should trunks be created so as to span multiple ports a trunk mismatch error message is printed on the console An example of an incorrect configuration is shown below GarrettCom Switch 1 Switch 2 GarrettCom FIGURE 98 an incorrect LACP connection scheme for Magnum 6K family of switches All LACP trunk ports must be on the same module and cannot span different modules Another example is highlighted below where some ports belong to VLAN 10 shown in red and other ports belong to VLAN 20 shown in blue If the port groups do not have a common VLAN between them LACP does not form a connection 176 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE GarrettCom Switch 1 VLAN 10 Switch 2 GarrettCom FIGURE 99 In this figure even though the connections are from one module to another this is still not a valid configuration for LACP using 4 ports as th
235. ime longer than the IPv4 addresses the IPv6 header is only twice the size of the IPv4 header Improved Support for Options Changes in the way IP header options are encoded allows for more efficient forwarding less stringent limits on the length of options and greater flexibility for introducing new options in the future Quality of Service Capabilities A new capability is added to enable the labeling of packets belonging to particular traffic flows for which the sender requests special handling such as non default quality of service or real time service Authentication and Privacy Capabilities IPv6 includes the definition of extensions which provide support for authentication data integrity and confidentiality This is included as a basic element of IPv6 and will be included in all implementations 60 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE IPv6 Addressing IPv6 addresses are 128 bits long and are identifiers for individual interfaces and sets of interfaces IPv6 addresses of all types are assigned to interfaces not nodes Since each interface belongs to a single node any of that node s interfaces unicast addresses may be used as an identifier for the node A single interface may be assigned multiple IPv6 addresses of any type There are three types of IPv6 addresses These are unicast anycast and multicast Unicast addresses identify a single interface Anycast addresses identify a set of interfaces such that a packet
236. imers forward delay lt 4 30 gt hello lt 1 10 gt age lt 6 40 gt change the STP Forward delay Hello timer and Aging timer values Priority specifies the switch bridge priority value This value is used along with the switch MAC address to determine which switch in the network is the root device Lower values mean higher priority Value ranges from 0 to 65535 Default value is 32768 Cost A path cost is assigned to individual ports for the switch to determine which ports are the forwarding points A higher cost means the link is more expensive to use and falls in the passtve mode compared to the link with a lower cost Value ranges from 0 to 65535 Default value is 32768 Status Enables or disables a port from participating in STP discovery It s best to only allow trunk ports to participate in STP End stations need not participate in STP process Forward Delay indicates the time duration the switch will wait from listening to learning states and from learning to forwarding states The value ranges from 4 to 30 seconds Default value is 15 Hello When the switch is the root device this is the time between messages being transmitted The value is from 1 to 10 seconds Default value is 2 seconds 142 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Age This is the maximum time a message with STP information is allowed by the switch before the switch discards the information and updates the address table again Value ranges from 6 to
237. indicate Magnum6K gt Operator Level for running operations queries Magnum6K Manager Level for setting and reviewing commands Magnum6K Configuration Level for changing the switch parameter values FIGURE 2 Prompt indicating the switch model number as well as mode of operation note the commands to switch between the levels is not shown here The prompt can be changed by the user See the Chapter on Miscellaneous Commands sub section Prompt for more details This manual was documented on a Magnum 6K25 switch and for clarity the prompt shown in the manual will be Magnum6K25 For additional information on default users user levels and more see User Management in this guide Logging in for the first time For the first time use the default user name and passwords assigned by GarrettCom for the Magnum 6K family of switches They are Username manager Password manager Username operator Password operator We recommend you login as manager for the first time to set up the IP address as well as change user passwords or create new users Setting the IP parameters To setup the switch the IP address and other relevant TCP IP parameters have to be specified A new GarrettCom Magnum switch looks for a DHCP or a BootP server If a DHCP or a BootP server is present the switch will be assigned an IP address from those servers Failing to find these servers the IP address is automatically as
238. ined in the IEEE 802 1q and GARP in the IEEE 802 1p standards In order to utilize the capabilities of GVRP GarrettCom Inc strongly recommends that the user is familiar with the concepts and capabilities of IEEE 802 1q eneric Attribute Registration Protocol GARP and VLAN registration over GARP is GVRP concepts GVRP makes it easy to propagate VLAN information across multiple switches Without GVRP a network administrator has to go to each individual switch and enable the necessary VLAN information or block specific VLAN s so that the network integrity is maintained With GVRP this process can be automated It is critical that all switches share a common VLAN This VLAN typically is the default VLAN VID 1 on most switches and other devices GVRP uses GVRP Bridge Protocol Data Units GVRP BPDUs to advertise static VLANs We refer to GVRP BPDU as an advertisement GVRP enables the Magnum 6K family of switches to dynamically create 802 1q compliant VLANs on links with other devices running GVRP This enables the switch to automatically create VLAN links between GVRP aware devices A GVRP link can include intermediate devices that are not GVRP aware This operation reduces the chances for errors in VLAN configuration by automatically providing VLAN ID VID consistency across the network GVRP can thus be used to propagate VLANs to other GVRP aware devices instead of manually having to set up VLANs across the ne
239. ing add port lt portl port2 gt define ports which make up the RS ring ports Note as discussed earlier you can create multiple RS rings on a switch Syntax ts ring del port lt portl port2 gt remove the switch from RS ring topology by eliminating the end ports on the switch 269 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Chapter 13 Dual Homing Syntax dualhome enter the dual homing configuration sub system Syntax dualhome lt enable disable gt enable or disable dual homing Syntax dualhome add portl lt port gt port2 lt port gt dual homing setup similar to that of unmanaged switches such as ESD42 OR Syntax dualhome add primary lt port gt secondary lt port gt dual homing setup as primary secondary mode Syntax dualhome del Delete the dual homing setup Syntax show dualhome Display dual homing status Chapter 14 Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP Syntax lacp enable the LACP configuration module within CLI Syntax lacp lt enable disable gt enable or disable LACP Syntax add port lt number list range gt priority lt 0 65535 gt add the specified list of ports to form the logical LACP trunk Default value for priority is 32768 The lower the value assigned to priority the higher the priority The port with the highest priority is the primary port over which certain types of traffic like IGMP is transmitted Syntax del pott lt number list range gt delete sp
240. ion ng gt setvar sets the system name contact and location All sysname syscontact syslocation lt stri ng gt parameters are optional but a user must supply at least one parameter set weight weight lt 0 7 gt sets the port priority weight for All the ports Once the weight is set all the ports will be the same weight across the switch The valid value for weight is 0 7 show address table displays which mac address is associated with which port for packet switching show active stp status whether STP or RSTP is running Show active snmp display the version of SNMP currently in use show alarm displays the current status of Alarm system show auth lt config ports gt show the 802 1 x configuration or port status show backpressure display backpressure buffers show config show setup parameters configured show console displays the console settings show date displays the date show dualhome Display dual homing status show flowcontrol display flow control buffers show ftp display the current fip operation mode show gvrp shows whether GVRP is disabled along with the current settings for the maximum number of VLANs and the current Primary VLAN show history show the last 25 commands executed if less than 25 commands are executed only those commands executed are shown 291 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE
241. ional specifies the manager and operator level as defined on the TACACS server for the respective level of login Chapter 8 Port mirroring and setup Syntax show port mirror display port mirror settings Syntax port mirror lt enter gt configure port mirror settings Syntax setport monitor lt monitor port number gt sniffer lt sniffer port number gt set port mirror settings Syntax prtmr lt enable disable gt enable or disable port mirror settings Syntax device configure device and port specific settings Syntax setport port lt port list range gt name lt name gt speed lt 10 100 gt duplex lt half full gt auto lt enable disable gt flow lt enable disable gt bp lt enable disable gt status lt enable disable gt configure port settings Syntax show port lt Port number gt display port settings Syntax flowcontrol xonlimit lt value gt xofflimit lt value gt configure flow control buffers Syntax show flowcontrol display flow control buffers Syntax backpressure rxthreshold lt value gt configure backpressure buffers Syntax show backpressure display backpressure buffers 265 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Syntax broadcast protect lt enable disable gt protect switch from broadcast storms Syntax tate threshold port lt port list range gt rate lt frames sec gt change the allowed broadcast rate threshold Chapter 9 VLAN Syntax
242. is connected to a different switch or a different module in the Magnum 6K switch The output of the LACP command in the network shown below Switch 1 A B c D 1 Jea i 1 3 5 L g m GarrettCom Switch 2 GarrettCom Ett GarrettConr Switch 3 FIGURE 107 The network for the show lacp command listed below In the figure shown above Switch 1 has ports 11 and 15 forming the first trunk connecting to Switch 3 Switch 1 also has ports 17 and 23 forming the second trunk on Switch 2 The show lacp command was executed on Switch 1 Magnum 6K lacp ee ees trunk Trunk Id 71 Trunk Status Trunk Active Primary Port 711 MAC address of Trunk Partner 00 20 06 25 11 40 Switch 3 Member Ports 11 32768 Primary Port trink 15 32768 Member Port Trunk Id 2 Trunk Status Trunk Active Primary Port 17 184 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Trunk Partner 00 20 06 25 72 90 Member Ports Port Priority Trunk 17 32768 Primary Port 23 32768 Member Port FIGURE 108 LACP information over a network List of commands in this chapter Syntax lacp enable the LACP configuration module within CLI Syntax lacp lt enable disable gt enable or disable LACP Syntax add port lt number list range gt priority lt 0 65535 gt add the specified list of ports to form the logical LACP trunk Default value for priority is 32768 The lower the value ass
243. isabled and has to be manually activated save save changes made to the configuration saveconf mode lt serial tftp ftp gt lt ipaddress gt file lt name gt saving the configuration on the network using Yip fip or serial protocols sendmail server lt ip addr gt to lt email addr gt from lt email addr gt subject lt string gt body lt string gt customize and also to send a test email to check SMTP settings the email sent out by specifying the email subject field server address to field and the body of the text See example fo the body of the text message later in this chapter setvet ip lt ip addr gt retry lt 0 3 gt port lt 1 65535 gt configure the global SMTP server settings set bootmode type lt dhcp bootp manual auto gt bootimg lt enable disable gt bootcfg lt enable disable gt assign the boot mode for the switch set date yeatr lt 2001 2035 gt month lt 1 12 gt day lt 1 31 gt format lt mmddyyyy ddmmyyyy yyyy mmdd gt sets the date and the format in which the date is displayed set daylight country lt country name gt set the daylight saving time 286 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES Command set ftp mode lt normal passive gt MNS 6K USER GUIDE Description set the ftp mode of operation set igmp mode lt normal 12 gt set the IGMP mode Normal is when a L3 device is in the network and is the IGMP
244. ist removeall remove all authorized managers setvice the services allowed or denied are telnet web and SNMP It is assumed here that the user is familiar with IP addressing schemes e g Class A B C etc subnet masking and masking issues such as how many stations are allowed for a given subnet mask In the examples any computer on 192 168 5 0 network is allowed note how the subnet mask is used to indicate that Also a specific station with IP address 192 168 15 25 is allowed again note how the subnet mask is used to allow only one specific station in the network Older station with IP address 192 168 15 15 is removed Magnum6K25 access Magnum6K25 access allow ip 192 168 5 0 mask 255 255 255 0 service telnet Service s allowed for specified address Magnum6K25 access allow ip 192 168 15 25 mask 255 255 255 255 service telnet Service s allowed for specified address Magnum6K25 access remove ip 192 168 15 15 mask 255 255 255 255 Access entry removed Magnum6K25 access exit 74 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Magnum6K25 show ip access IP Address Mask Telnet Web SNMP 192 168 5 0 255 255 255 0 ALLOWED DENIED DENIED 192 168 15 25 255 255 255 255 ALLOWED DENIED DENIED FIGURE 56 Steps to allow deny or remove specific services List of commands in this chapter Syntax Syntax Syntax Syntax Syntax Syntax Syntax Syntax Syntax Syntax
245. itches DOP ARIE DAE ss dens hae 162 FIGURE 90 More than one RS Ring cannot be defined per managed Magnum 6K switch Note unmanaged switches cannot participate in RS Ring coccinea 163 FIGURE 91 Activating RS Ring on the Wid ais asintibiiniridvisidtinndarnsduiiadaiiidinbaibiaess 164 FIGURE 92 RS R ng configuration commands 166 FIGURE 93 Dual homing using ESD42 switch and Magnum 6K family of switches In case of a connectivity break the connection switches to the standby path or standby nR veesvscesesveveee 169 FIGURE 94 Dual homing using Magnum 6K family of switches Note the end device video surveillance camera can be powered using PoE options on Magnum 6K family of switches xiv FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU In case of a connectivity break the connection switches to the standby path or standby UI EEN OEE aac yh a ete cil eas cia st lath wa etal otk min Lis Seth wt oak oa hs a oN it ote Bees RE 95 Using S Ring RS Ring and dual homing it is possible to build networks resilient not only to a single link failure but also for one device failing on the network sss RE 96 configuring dual homini iieiaei i aaa a as RE 97 Some valid LACP configurations RE 98 an incorrect LACP connection scheme for Magnum 6K family of switches All LACP trunk ports must be on the same module and cannot span different modules wc RE 99 In this figure even thoug
246. ity port lt number list range gt value lt 0 255 0 65535 gt specifies the port or switch level priority When a port s are specified the priority is associated with ports and their value is 0 255 If no ports are specified then the switch bridge priority is specified and its value is 0 655 35 Syntax cost port lt number list range gt value lt 0 65535 gt cost is specific to a port and the port s have to be specified Syntax port pott lt number list range gt status lt enable disable gt specific ports may not need to participate in STP process These ports typically would be end stations If you are not sure let MNS 6K software make the decisions Syntax timers forward delay lt 4 30 gt hello lt 1 10 gt age lt 6 40 gt change the STP Forward Delay Hello timer and Aging timer values 128 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Priority specifies the switch bridge priority value This value is used along with the switch MAC address to determine which switch in the network is the root device Lower values mean higher priority Value ranges from 0 to 65535 Default value is 32768 Cost A path cost is assigned to individual ports for the switch to determine which ports are the forwarding points A higher cost means the link is more expensive to use and falls in the passive mode compared to the link with a lower cost Value ranges from 0 to 65535 Default value is 32768 Status Enables or disables a
247. ity mode Syntax show forceversion the current forced version Syntax show timers show the values of the timers set for RSTP Syntax priority port lt number list range gt value lt 0 255 0 65535 gt specifies the port or switch level priority When a port s are specified the priority is associated with ports and their value is Q 255 If no ports are specified then the switch bridge priority is specified and its value is 0 655 35 Syntax cost port lt number list range gt value lt 0 65535 gt cost is specific to a port and the port s have to be specified Syntax port port lt number list range gt status lt enable disable gt specific ports may not need to participate in STP process These ports typically would be end stations If you are not sure let MNS 6K software make the decisions Syntax timers forward delay lt 4 30 gt hello lt 1 10 gt age lt 6 40 gt change the STP Forward delay Hello timer and Aging timer values Chapter 12 RS Ring S Ring and Link Loss Learn Syntax authorize lt module gt key lt security key gt activate the S Ring capabilities Don t forget to use the save command to save the Rey Syntax stp STP Configuration mode Syntax stp lt enable disable gt Start Enable or stop Disable STP 268 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Syntax set stp type lt stp rstp gt set the spanning tree protocol to be IEEE 802 1d or 802 1w Spanning Tree Pro
248. l 1 pass operator FAB lt additional lines deleted for succinct viewing gt FIGURE 35 Contents of the config file Note 1 the config file only allows certain portions of the file to be edited by a user Changing any other part of the file will not allow the file to be loaded as the CRC 49 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE computed and stored in the file will not be matched Should you want to edit edit the System portion of the file only GarrettCom recommends editing the script file see below Note 2 File names cannot have special characters such as amp space and control characters To ease the process of uploading and executing a series of commands the MNS 6K commands are Syntax host lt addleditidel gt name lt host name gt ip lt ipaddress gt user lt user gt pass lt password gt create a host entry for accessing host This is equivalent to creating a host table on many systems Maximum of 10 such entries are allowed Syntax show host displays the host table entries Magnum6K25 access Magnum6K25 access host Usage host lt addledit del gt name lt host name gt ip lt ipaddress gt user lt user gt pass lt password gt Magnum6K25 access host add name server ip 192 168 5 2 Host added successfully Magnum6K25 access show host No Host Name IP Address User Password 1 server 192 168 5 2 2 ES 3 an 4 gs 5 x a
249. l is not used To set flow control Syntax flowcontrol xonlimit lt value gt xofflimit lt value gt 96 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE where xonlimit can be from 3 to 30 default value is 4 xofflimit from 3 to 127 default value is 6 Syntax show flowcontrol Back Pressure Back Pressure is for half duplex operations and the controls provided indicates the number of buffers allowed for incoming traffic before a xon xoff message is sent Disabled default The port will not use back pressure based flow control mechanisms Enabled The port uses 802 3 Layer 2 back off algorithms Back pressure based congestion control is possible only on half duplex 10 Mbps Ethernet ports Other technologies are not supported on Magnum 6K family of switches Syntax backpressure rxthreshold lt value gt where rxthreshold value can be from 3 to 127 default is 28 Syntax show backpressure Backpressure and Flow control are to be used in networks in which all devices and switches can participate in the flow control and back pressure recognition In most networks these techniques are not used as not all devices can participate in the flow control methods and notifications Alternately QoS and other techniques ate widely used today In the example below the Magnum 6K family of switches are setup with flow control and back pressure 97 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Magnum6K25 device Magnum6K25 device s
250. l port use the show serial command Magnum6K25 show serial Baud Rate 38400 Data 8 Parity No Parity Stop 1 Flow Control None FIGURE 25 Querying the serial port settings System parameters The system parameters can be queried and changed To query the system parameters two commands are used frequently They are show sysconfig and show setup Both the commands are shown below Magnum6K25 show setup Version Magnum 6K25 build 3 7 1 Sep 27 2007 16 41 37 MAC Address 00 20 08 03 05 09 IP Address 192 168 5 5 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Gateway Address 192 168 5 1 CLI Mode Manager System Name Magnum 6K25 System Description 25 Port Modular Ethernet Switch System Contact Support garrettcom com System Location Fremont CA System Objectld 1 3 6 1 4 1 553 12 6 System Seriial No 43576812 Original Factory Config Code 6K25 8TP Magnum6K25 FIGURE 26 System parameters using the show setup command Most parameters here cannot be changed 41 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Magnum6K25 show sysconfig System Name Magnum6K25 System Contact support garrettcom com System Location HO Fremont CA Boot Mode manual Inactivity Timeout min 10 Address Age Interval min 300 Inbound Telnet Enabled Yes Web Agent Enabled Yes Time Zone GMT O8hours 00minutes Day Light Time Rule USA System UpTime 7 Days 12 Hours 30 Mins 46 Sec
251. lculate how to re configure the LAN to recover from the fault After the standard RSTP STP reconfiguration time period typically 20 to 30 seconds the RSTP STP analysis concludes that recovery is achieved by changing the blocking port of the ring port pair to the forwarding state 155 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Forwarding Forwarding Port Pott Q x FIGURE 85 A fault in the ring interrupts traffic The blocking port now becomes forwarding so that traffic can reach all switches in the network Note the mP62 as well as the ESD42 switches support LLL and can participate in S Ring as an access switch When this change is made by RSTP STP and both of the ring manager switch s ring ports are forwarding the fault is effectively bypassed and there is a path for all LAN traffic to be handled properly This abnormal status is designated RING_OPEN and may continue indefinitely until the ring fault is repaired At that time RSTP STP will change one of the ring control ports to be a blocking port again This recovery operation may take thirty seconds to a few minutes depending on the number of switches and other RSTP STP parameters in operation RSTP STP Operation with S Ring When the Magnum 6K family of switches is used in the network and the S Ring feature is enabled the result of a ring fault is the same but the recovery is faster The S Ring capability overrides the normal RSTP STP analysis for the ring pair ports
252. ld Start MOMENTARY 3 Warm Start NOT ENABLED 4 Link Up MOMENTARY 5 Link Down NOT ENABLED 6 Authentication Failure MOMENTARY 7 RMON Raising Alarm NOT ENABLED 8 RMON Falling Alarm MOMENTARY 9 Intruder Alarm MOMENTARY 10 Link Loss Learn Triggered MOMENTARY 11 Broadcast Storm Detected MOMENTARY 12 STP RSTP Reconfigured MOMENTARY Magnum6K25 alarm exit Magnum6K25 FIGURE 131 Setting up the external electrical relay and alerts Email SMTP RFC 821 is a TCP IP protocol used in sending email However since it is limited in its ability to queue messages at the receiving end it s usually used with one of two other protocols POP3 or Internet Message Access Protocol IMAP that lets the user save messages in a server mailbox and download them as needed from the server In other words users typically use a program that uses SMTP for sending emails out going e g replying to an email message and 239 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE either POP3 or IMAP for receiving messages that have been arrived from the outside world While SMTP and its related protocols such as POP3 IMAP etc are useful transports for sending and receiving emails it is extremely beneficial for a network administrator to receive emails in case of faults and alerts The Magnum 6K family of switches can be setup to send an email alert when a trap is generated If this capability is used please ensure that SPAM filters and other filters are
253. le 137 RSTP Path cost 141 RTSP 135 save 26 27 33 46 53 69 70 122 164 216 257 266 INDEX saveconf 45 53 56 259 saveconf mode 56 259 script 46 47 260 282 297 sendmail 241 243 255 276 serial number 54 server 241 256 276 service 74 set 24 25 28 31 32 33 35 37 40 42 43 44 46 48 55 56 57 58 64 67 69 70 72 13 75 93 94 95 96 107 109 113 122 127 137 147 160 165 166 167 200 221 223 232 246 247 248 256 257 258 259 261 262 266 267 269 272 277 286 287 289 set bootmode 37 set date 43 55 259 set daylight 43 56 259 set ftp mode 46 48 56 248 256 277 287 set igmp 200 set logsize 72 73 75 262 set password 61 62 63 64 262 set prompt 246 247 256 277 289 set serial 40 55 259 set snmp 221 223 232 272 set stp 127 137 147 160 165 166 167 267 269 set time 43 56 259 set timeformat 43 56 259 set timezone 43 55 259 set vlan 107 109 113 122 266 set egress 111 set forbid 215 216 272 325 set ingress 111 set leave 205 206 208 271 setport 80 81 85 93 94 95 99 101 263 265 set port 111 112 115 117 122 204 205 266 271 setport monitor 93 101 265 setport port 94 101 265 set ports 215 272 set qi 205 206 208 272 setqos 189 191 192 193 271 set qri 205 207 208 272 set querier 204 206 setsntp 44 45 56 259 setsntp serv
254. led Default Trap Comm public V3 Engine ID 6K_v3Engine Magnum6K25 FIGURE 128 Configuring SNMP most of the command here are SNMP v3 commands Configuring RMON The switch supports RMON Remote Monitoring on all connected network segments This allows for troubleshooting and optimizing your network The Magnum 6K family of switches provides hardware based RMON counters The switch manager or a network management system can poll these counters periodically to collect the statistics in a format that complies with the RMON MIB definition The following RMON groups are supported e Ethernet Statistics Group maintains utilization and error statistics for the switch port being monitored e History Group gathers and stores periodic statistical samples from previous Statistics Group e Alarm Group allows a network administrator to define alarm thresholds for any MIB variable e Log and Event Group allows a network administrator to define actions based on alarms SNMP Traps are generated when RMON Alarms ate triggered 230 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE The following RMON communities when defined enable the specific RMON group as show above Syntax rmon enter the RMON configuration mode to setup RMON groups and communities Syntax history def owner lt string gt def comm lt string gt define the RMON history group and the community string associated with the group Syntax statistics def o
255. llows the edge devices a to have link level redundancy as well bringing the fault tolerance from the network to the edge Switch 1 D A B 1 i ei o 3 S fal GarrettCom Switch 2 maamin Com D GarrettCon Switch 3 38 Dual Homed Edge Switch FIGURE 103 LACP along with RSTP STP brings redundancy to the network core or backbone Using this reliable core with a dual homed edge switch brings reliability and redundancy to the edge of the network It is recommended not to use LACP with S Ring at this time Since S Ring and LACP use the same BPDUs called LACPDUs the architecture shown below is not supported in this release 179 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE FIGURE 104 This architecture is not recommended LACP can be used for creating a reliable network between two facilities connected via a wireless bridge As shown in the figure below four trunk ports are connected to four wireless bridge pairs This increases the effective throughput of the wireless connections and also increases the reliability If one of the bridges were to stop functioning the other three will continue to operate providing a very reliable infrastructure 180 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Facility 1 Facility 2 FIGURE 105 Creating a reliable infrastructure using wireless bridges between two facilities and LACP A indicates a Wi Fi wireless Bridge or other wir
256. lobal settings and recipients displays the currently configured recipients of email alerts Syntax add id lt 1 5 gt email lt email addr gt traps lt all none S R E gt events lt all none I A C F D gt ip lt ip addr gt port lt 1 65535 gt id mandatory the recipient ID range from 1 to 5 MNS 6K allows a maximum of 5 recipients 240 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE email mandatory email address of the recipient traps optional this is the trap filter If value is all all traps of any type will be sent to this recipient If value is none no traps are sent to this recipient Value can also be a combination of S SNMP R RMON and E ENTERPRISE For example trap SR means that SNMP and RMON traps will be sent via email to the recipient If this option is not defined the recipient will have a default value of all events optional this is the event filter Value can be all all event severity types will be sent to recipient none no event will be sent to recipient or a combination of T informational A activity C critical F fatal and D debug With event ACF implies that events of severity types activity critical and fatal will be sent to recipients by email If this option is not defined a value of all is taken ip optional SMTP server IP address This is the SMTP server to connect to for this particular u
257. lt number list range gt status lt enable disable gt migration lt enable gt edge lt enable disable gt p2p lt on off auto gt set the port type for RSTP Example port port lt number list range gt p2p off Set the point to point value to off on all ports that are connected to shared LAN segments i e connections to hubs The default value is auto P2P ports would typically be end stations or computers on the network Example port pott lt number list range gt edge enable enable all ports connected to other hubs bridges and switches as edge ports Example port port lt number list range gt migration enable set this for all ports connected to other devices such as hubs bridges and switches known to support IEEE 802 1d STP services but cannot support RSTP services Syntax show active stp status whether STP or RSTP is running Syntax show stp lt config ports gt display the RSTP or STP parameters Syntax forceversion lt stp rstp gt set the STP or RSTP compatibility mode Syntax show forceversion the current force version Syntax show timers show the values of the timers set for RSTP Syntax priority port lt number list range gt value lt 0 255 0 65535 gt specifies the port or switch level priority When a port s are specified the priority is associated with ports and their value is Q 255 If no ports are specified then the switch bridge priority is specified and its va
258. lue is 0 655 35 Syntax cost port lt number list range gt value lt 0 65535 gt cost is specific to a port and the port s have to be specified Syntax port port lt number list range gt status lt enable disable gt specific ports may not need to participate in STP process These ports typically would be end stations If you are not sure let MNS 6K software make the decisions Syntax timers forward delay lt 4 30 gt hello lt 1 10 gt age lt 6 40 gt change the STP Forward delay Hello timer and Aging timer values 148 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE 12 Chapter RS Ring S Ring and Link Loss Learn LLL Speed up recovery from faults in Ethernet networks S Ring and RS Ring use ring topology to provide fast recovery from faults These are based on industry standard STP and RSTP technologies These technologies have been adapted to ring recovery applications by GarrettCom Inc and these rings are called S Ring In addition LLL enables a switch to rapidly re learn MAC addresses in order to participate in S Ring configurations In the last two chapters we looked at how RSTP or STP can be used to bring resiliency to a meshed network This chapter s focus is to look at ring topologies and how these topologies can be used to provide faster recovery times than what STP or RSTP can offer Both RSTP and STP are industry standard protocols and can be used with networking switches from differen
259. m6K25 igmp set qri interval 11 206 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Query response interval successfully set Magnum6K25 igmp show igmp IGMP State Enabled ImmediateLeave Disabled Querier Disabled Querier Interval 125 Querier Response Interval 11 FIGURE 119 Configuring IGMP For setting IGMP L2 mode make sure the set of commands listed below are executed on all the Magnum switches participating in the L2 Magnum 6K25 igmp Magnum 6K25 igmp mode L2 IGMP set to L2 Mode Magnum 6K25 igmp show igmp IGMP State Disabled ImmediateLeave Disabled Querier L2 Mode Querier Interval 125 Querier Response Interval 10 Multicasting unknown streams Disabled Magnum 6K25 igmp mode normal IGMP set to Normal Mode Magnum 6K25 igmp exit Magnum 6K25 FIGURE 120 Setting IGMP L2 List of commands in this chapter Syntax igmp IGMP configuration mode Syntax igmp lt enable disable gt enable or disable IGMP on the switch Syntax show igmp IGMP operation status Syntax mcast lt enable disable gt enable or disable unknown multicast streams The default is enabled 207 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Syntax set igmp mode lt normal 12 gt set the IGMP mode Normal is when a L3 device is in the network and is the IGMP root The IGMP L2 is used when there is no L3 device in the network Syntax show gtoup shows the multicast groups Syn
260. meter is now redefined as the max size of the log that is saved to flash More events might appear in the log as they happen but the whole list will be trimmed to the specified max size when a save command is issued or the system rebooted These logs are in compliance with the definitions of RFC 3164 though not all the nuances of the syslog are implemented as specified by the RFC 71 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE The show log command displays the log information and the clear log command clears the log entries Syntax show log fatal alert crit error warn note info debug display the log Syntax clearlog fatal alert crit error warn note info debug cear the log Syntax set logsize size lt 1 1000 gt set the number of line to be collected in the log before the oldest record is re written Magnum6K25 show log S Date Time Log Description Note 04 17 2007 09 57 27 P M CLI Session Timed Out for User manager on Telnet Note 04 17 2007 09 57 27 P M CLI Session Term User manager on Telnet Note 04 17 2007 10 00 06 P M CLI Session Started from Telnet 192 168 5 2 Note 04 17 2007 10 00 12 P M CLI User manager Login From Telnet 192 168 5 2 Note 04 17 2007 10 08 58 P M CLI User manager Logout From Telnet 192 168 5 2 Note 04 17 2007 10 08 58 P M CLI Session Term User manager on Telnet Note 01 01 2001 12 00 00 A M SYSMGR System Was Rebooted By power cycle Note 01 01 2001 12 00 00 A M SN
261. mmand can be used to reset the names or Ports 14 16 a other values Magnum6K25 tag vian edit id 10 name engineering port 14 16 Tag based vlan edited Successfully Vianid 10 Vlan name engineering Ports 14 16 Magnum6K25 tag vlan add id 20 name sales port 14 16 Tag based vlan Added Successfully Vlanid 20 Intentionally done to show the effect of adding a Vlan name sales duplicate VLAN Ports 14 16 Magnum6K25 tag vlan add id 20 name marketing port 14 16 ERROR Duplicate Vlan Id Magnum6K25 tag vlan add id 30 name marketing port 14 16 Tag based vlan Added Successfully Vlanid 30 Vlan name marketing Ports 14 16 Magnum6K25 tag vlan show vlan type tag VLAN ID 1 Name Default VLAN Status Active UNTAGGED UP UNTAGGED DOWN UNTAGGED DOWN 114 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE UNTAGGED UNTAGGED UNTAGGED UNTAGGED UNTAGGED VLAN ID 10 Name Le Note the VLANS are not started as yet Adding the Status Pending VLAN does not start it by default UNTAGGED UNTAGGED UNTAGGED VLAN ID 20 Name sales Status Pending UNTAGGED UNTAGGED UNTAGGED VLAN ID 30 Name marketing Status Pending UNTAGGED UNTAGGED UNTAGGED Magnum6K25 tag vlan start vian all Enable filtering on the ports required Note the MNS 6K software will prompt you to be sure that connectivity is not All pending VLAN s started disrupted M
262. mmands for port mirroring are Syntax show port mitrror displays the status of port mirroring Syntax port mirror enter the port mirror configuration mode Syntax setport monitor lt monitor port number gt sniffer lt sniffer port number gt Setup a prot mirrior port Syntax prtmr lt enable disable gt enable and disable port mirroring 93 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE The set of commands show how port 11 is mirrored on port 13 Any traffic on port 11 is also sent on port 13 Magnum6K25 show port mirror Sniffer Port 0 Monitor Port 0 Mirroring State disabled Magnum6K25 port mirror Magnum6K25 port mirror setport monitor 11 sniffer 13 Port 11 set as Monitor Port Port 13 set as Sniffer Port Magnum6K25 port mirror prtmr enable Port Mirroring Enabled Magnum6K25 port mirror exit Magnum6K25 show port mirror Sniffer Port 13 Monitor Port 11 Mirroring State enabled Magnum6K25 FIGURE 63 Enabling port mirroring Once port monitoring is completed for security reasons GarrettCom strongly recommends that the port mirroring be disabled using the prtmr diable command 1 Only one port can be set to port mirror at a time 2 Both the ports monitored port and sniffer port have to belong to the same VLAN 3 The mirrored port shows both incoming as well as outgoing traffic 4 When port mirror is active to change mirrored port first disable port mirror and then assign
263. modified VLAN tvlan vlan X deleted VLAN tvlan vlan X enabled VLAN tvlan vlan X disabled VLAN tvlan tag based VLAN stopped VLAN tvlan tag based VLAN started FIGURE 139 Listing of severity sorted by subsystem and severity O Please refer to the related chapters in this manual to find more information For example for the VLAN subsystem refer to the chapter on VLAN MAC Address Table Syntax show address table displays the MAC addresses associated with ports shows the MAC addresses on the ports and displays to which port the packet with the specified MAC addresses will be switched to 253 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Sometimes it is useful to see which port a specific packet will be switched to by examining the internal MAC address table The show address table command displays the internal switching table Magnum6K25 show address table Sl MAC Address Port 01 00 5e 00 00 fb 0 00 0c f1 b9 d1 dc 3 33 33 00 00 00 02 0 01 00 0c cc cc cc 0 01 00 5e 00 00 16 0 00 07 50 ef 31 40 3 00 e0 81 52 85 96 3 01 40 96 ff ff ff 0 01 40 96 ff ff 00 0 0 00 40 96 33 51 81 3 S OONDORWND Magnum6K25 FIGURE 140 Display of the internal switching decision table Where SI is the sequential listing form the memory and is just a sequence of the data as it appears in the memory Port is the port number which th
264. munity string associated with the group igmp IGMP configuration mode igmp lt enable disable gt enable or disable IGMP on the switch ipconfig ip lt ip address gt mask lt subnet mask gt dgw lt gateway gt to set IP address on the switch kill config save system resets the system configuration The module_name option does not reset the specific module parameters The modules are system event port bridge stp ps mirror sntp vlan wrp and snmp kill session id lt session gt terminate a telnet session See also show session lacp enable the LACP configuration module within CLI lacp lt enable disable gt enable or disable LACP learn port lt number list gt lt enable disable gt learn MAC addresses connected to the Magnum 6K switch 283 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES Command Ill lt enable disable gt MNS 6K USER GUIDE Description enable or disable LLL on the switch Il add port lt port list range gt enable LLL on the list of specified ports Il del port lt port list range gt disable LLL on the list of specified ports loadconf mode lt serial tftp ftp gt lt ipaddress gt file lt name gt loading the previously saved configuration from the network using tftp fip or serial protocols logout logout from the CLI session mcast lt enable disable gt enable or disable unknown multicast streams
265. n information including IPv6 address Syntax ping6 lt IPv6 address gt pings an IPv6 station Syntax show ipv6 displays the IPv6 information Syntax ftp lt IPv6 address gt fip to an IPv6 station 261 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Syntax telnet lt IPv6 address gt e net to an IPv6 station Chapter 5 Access Considerations Syntax Syntax Syntax Syntax Syntax Syntax Syntax Syntax Syntax Syntax Syntax Syntax Syntax Syntax set password set or change password configure port security sets the port authorization based on MAC addresses port security configure port security settings allow mac lt address list range gt port lt num list range gt specify a specific MAC address or MAC address list learn port lt number list gt lt enable disable gt arn MAC addresses connected to the Magnum 6K switch show port security display port security settings action port lt num list range gt lt none disable drop gt action to perform in case of breach of port security signal port lt num list range gt lt none log trap logandtrap gt port to monitor and signal to send in case of breach of port security ps lt enable disable gt enable or disable port security remove mac lt all address list range gt port lt num list range gt remove a MAC address entry show log fatal alert crit error warn note
266. nabled by means of a software key 2 Only one switch is the Ring Master That switch has S Ring Software authorized enabled for that device Thus only one license key is needed per ring and not per switch 3 There can be multiple S Rings on a given Magnum 6K switch There can be multiple ring topologies in a network Each ring has to be a separate ring Ring of rings or overlapping rings are not supported at this time 4 S Ring topologies support one failure in the network A second failure may create isolated network islands 5 At least one untagged VLAN must be available for the BPDU s to propagate through the network to update RSTP STP status 6 S Ring faults can be software signaled to alarm contacts RS Ring concepts Today more and mote situations demand a network to be built using managed switches These situations also demand a faster recovery time in case of a network failure The topologies have to be simple for maintenance and other reasons In these situations a ting topology provides fault tolerance with the simplicity RS Ring feature can be used on managed Magnum 6K family of switches RS Ring provides the simple ring topology and provides faster recovery times than S Ring or STP RSTP RS Ring is built upon networking software standards such as Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP based on IEEE 802 1w RS Ring defines two ports on each switch which participates in the ring topology and works with the RSTP tree struc
267. ndicates the port number Value ranges from 01 to max number of ports in the switch Type indicates the type of port TP indicates Twisted Pair 126 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Priority STP uses this to determine which ports are used for forwarding Lower the number means higher priority Value ranges from 0 to 255 Default is 128 Path Cost This is the assigned port cost value used for the switch to determine the forwarding points Values range from 1 to 65535 State indicates the STP state of individual ports Values can be Listening Learning Forwarding Blocking and Disabled Des Bridge This is the port s designated root bridge Des Port This is the port s designated root port ce To enable or disable STP enter the STP configuration mode and use the stp lt enable disable gt command Syntax stp STP Configuration mode Syntax stp lt enable disable gt Start Enable or stop Disable STP Syntax set stp type lt stp rstp gt set the spanning tree protocol to be IEEE 802 1d or 802 1 y Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Syntax show active stp Display which version of STP is currently active Incorrect STP settings can adversely affect network performance GarrettCom Inc recommends starting with the default STP settings Changing the settings requires a detailed understanding of STP For more information on STP please refer to the IEEE 802 1d standard Magnum6K25 show active
268. net can also be disabled for a specific user by using the useraccess command discussed in Chapter 2 Multiple telnet sessions started from the CLI interface or the command line are serviced by MNS O6K in a round robin fashion i e one session after another If one telnet session started from MNS 6K interface is downloading a file the other windows will not be serviced till the file transfer is completed Syntax telnet lt enable disable gt Magnum6K25 configure access Magnum6K25 access telnet enable Access to Telnet already enabled Magnum6K25 access exit Magnum6K25 FIGURE 21 Changing telnet access note in this case the enable command was repeated without any effect to the switch The show console command can show the status of the telnet client as well as other console parameters 38 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Magnum6K25 show console Console Serial Link Inbound Telnet Enabled Yes Outbound Telnet Enabled Yes Web Console Enabled Yes SNMP Enabled Yes Terminal Type VT100 Screen Refresh Interval sec 3 Baud Rate 38400 Flow Control None Session Inactivity Time min 10 Magnum6K25 FIGURE 22 Reviewing the console parameters note telnet is enabled Users can telnet to a remote host from the Magnum 6K family of switches Syntax telnet lt ipaddtess gt port lt port number gt The default port for telnet is 23 Magnum6K25 show ip
269. nfig oldconf script hosts log gt host lt hostname gt ip lt ipaddress gt file lt filename gt upload and download information using tftp command Where lt get put gt different tftp operations get a file from the server or put the information on the server type lt app config oldconf script hosts log gt optional type field This is useful to specify whether a log file or host file is uploaded or downloaded This can also perform the task of exporting a configuration file or uploading a new image to the switch host lt hostname gt ip lt ipaddress gt file lt filename gt parameters associated with tftp server for proper communications with the server Syntax xmodem lt get put gt type lt app config oldconf script hosts log gt upload and download information using xmodem command and console connection Where lt get put gt different xmodem file transfer operations get a file from the server or put the information on the server type lt app config oldconf script hosts log gt optional type field This is useful to specify whether a log file or host file is uploaded or downloaded This can also perform the task of exporting a configuration file or uploading a new image to the switch Syntax host lt addleditldel gt name lt host name gt ip lt ipaddress gt user lt user gt pass lt password gt create a host entry for accessing
270. nfig 36 39 58 261 show ipv6 61 63 261 show lacp 181 182 183 184 185 270 326 show III 161 167 269 show log 71 72 75 249 262 show port 95 98 101 191 265 show port mirror 93 101 265 show port security 66 67 68 69 70 75 262 show gos 191 192 193 194 271 show rmon 231 show rs ring 165 166 show serial 41 58 245 261 show session 39 40 56 259 show setup 27 33 41 54 58 245 257 261 show smtp 240 242 243 255 275 show snmp 222 226 232 273 show s ring 160 165 166 167 269 show stp 124 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 138 139 140 141 143 144 145 146 147 148 267 268 show sysconfig 27 42 58 261 show tacplus 90 91 264 show time 43 58 261 show timezone 43 58 261 show uptime 58 261 show version 245 256 277 show vlan 108 110 112 113 114 116 117 122 213 266 show access 229 show authtrap 222 226 232 273 show com2sec 227 show deftrap 222 226 232 273 show forbid 215 216 272 INDEX show forceversion 142 144 148 268 show group 204 208 223 228 233 271 274 show port 83 84 112 122 204 205 208 266 271 show portweight 190 193 194 271 show router 204 205 208 271 show stats 84 86 264 show timers 142 145 148 268 show trap 222 227 233 273 show user 223 229 230 233 274 show view 223 228 233 274 show vlan 215 272 signal 66 6
271. nformation Base for Version 2 of the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMPv2 SNMPv2 Working Group RFC 1908 Coexistence between Version 1 and Version 2 of the Internet standard Network Management Framework SNMPv2 Working Group RFC 2271 2275 SNMPv3 RFC 2104 Keyed Hashing for Message Authentication RFC 2271 An Architecture for Describing SNMP Management Frameworks RFC 2272 Message Processing and Dispatching for the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP RFC 2273 SNMPv3 Applications RFC 2274 User Based Security Model USM for version 3 of the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMPv3 RFC 2275 View Based Access Control Model VACM for the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP Configuring SNMP There are several commands and variable which can be set for configuring SNMP They ate listed below The basic SNMP v1 parameters can be set by referring to the section on System Parameters Most commands here refer to SNMP v3 commands and how the variables for SNMP v3 can be configured Syntax snmp enter the SNMP Configuration mode Syntax set snmp type lt v1 all gt define the version of SNMP to use the option all supports all versions v1 v2 and v3 v1 restricts SNMP to v1 only By default SNMP v1 only is enabled Syntax show active snmp shows the version of SNMP currently in use 221 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Syntax community write lt write community gt read lt read
272. ng The password is recommended to be at least 8 characters long with a mix of upper case lower case numbers and special characters Syntax add user lt name gt level lt number gt Magnum6K25 user Magnum6K25 user add user peter level 2 Enter User Password Confirm New Password Magnum6K25 user FIGURE 7 Adding a user with Manager level privilege In this example user peter was added with Manager privilege Delete User Syntax delete user lt name gt Magnum6K25 user delete user peter Confirm User Deletion Y N Y User successfully deleted Magnum6K25 user FIGURE 8 Deleting a user In this example user peter was deleted Modify Password Syntax passwd user lt name gt Magnum6K25 user passwd user peter Enter New Password Confirm New Password Password has been modified successfully Magnum6K25 user FIGURE 9 Changing the password for a specific user In this example password for peter was modified Modify the Privilege Level Syntax chlevel user lt name gt level lt number gt 29 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Magnum6K25 user chlevel user peter level 1 Access Permission Modified Magnum6K25 user FIGURE 10 Changing the privilege levels for a user In this example user peter was modified to Operator privileges Modify Access Privileges for a user Syntax useraccess
273. ng gt help for a specific command Syntax command lt Enter gt options for a command Syntax lt TAB gt fisting all commands available at the privilege level Syntax lt command string gt lt TAB gt options for a command Syntax lt first character of the command gt lt TAB gt sting commands starting with the character Syntax logout logout from the CLI session Syntax usetaccess user lt name gt service lt telnet web gt lt enable disable gt 34 Chapter 3 IP Address and System Information First simple steps to follow automatic methods such as bootp and DHCP Besides this other parameters required for proper operation of the switch in a network are discussed T his section explains how the Magnum 6K family of switches can be setup using other IP Addressing It is assumed that the user has familiarity with IP addresses classes of IP addresses and related netmask schemes e g class A Class B and Class C addressing Importance of an IP address Without an IP address the switch will operate as a standalone Layer 2 switch Without an IP address you cannot e Use the web interface to manage the switch e Use telnet to access the CLI e Use any SNMP Network Management software to manage the switch e Use NTP protocol or an NTP server to synchronize the time on the switch e Use TFTP or FTP to download the configurations or upload software updates e Run ping tests to test connectivity To set the IP
274. ng the information received from the supplicant to a suitable authentication server This allows the verification of user credentials to determine the consequent port authorization state It is important to note that the authenticator s functionality is independent of the actual authentication method It effectively acts as a pass through for the authentication exchange Supplicant Authentication Server RADIUS FIGURE 57 802 1 network components The RADIUS server is the authentication server The authentication server provides a standard way of providing Authentication Authorization and Accounting services to a network Extensible Authentication Protocol EAP is an authentication framework which supports multiple authentication methods EAP typically runs directly over data link layers such as PPP or IEEE 802 without requiring IP EAP over LAN EAPOL encapsulates EAP packets onto 802 frames with a few extensions to handle 802 characteristics EAP over RADIUS encapsulates EAP packets onto RADIUS packets for relaying to RADIUS authentication servers The details of the 802 1x authentication are shown below 78 MAGN 0 UM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Port Connected Access Blocked EAP Request Id gt RADIUS Access Request RADIUS Access Challenge EAP Request EAP Response o _ _________ RADIUS Access Request RADIUS Access Accept EAP Success Access Allowed FIGURE 58
275. ngs no overlapping rings or ting of rings Mesh topology can have multiple paths Mesh topology can have multiple paths Works with managed Magnum 6K family of switches Works with managed 6K family of switches other managed switches such as mP62 and non managed switches as well as some hubs Wide range of products including other vendor products Wider range of products including other vendor products Fastest Fast Medium sub second to a few seconds Slow in tens of seconds 153 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES TRS Rinc Past recovery from a single point of failure No centralized decision making MNS 6K USER GUIDE 9 Rin Past recovery from a single point of failure Ring Master is responsible for decision making Multiple points of failure each connected node can be in stand by CTD Multiple points of failure each connected node can be in stand by Licensed per ring Licensed per ring Included in MNS 6K Included in MNS 6K Managed 6K switches only One Managed 6K per ring Multiple choices for members of the ring Many choices available making it cost effective Many choices available making it cost effective Not available at this time Yes No No 50 nodes 50 nodes NA NA Supports dual homing to members in the ring Supports dual homing to members in the ring Supports dual h
276. not set to delete these emails GarrettCom Inc recommends that a rule be setup on the mail server so that all emails indicating SNMP faults are automatically stored in a folder or redirected to the necessary administrators The SNMP alerts can be configured using MNS 6K for the following Send email alert according to the configuration rules when a specific event category happens Send email alert according to the configuration rules when a specific trap SNMP trap category happens Provide configuration and customization commands for users to specify SMTP server to connect to TCP ports user recipients and filters The SMTP alerts provide the following capabilities SMTP alerts can be enabled or disabled globally User can define a global default SMTP server identified by its IP address TCP port and retry count User can add up to five SMTP alert recipients Each recipient is identified by an ID and email address The email address needs to be a valid address and can be an alias setup for distribution to a larger audience Filters are provided for each recipient to allow only certain categories of traps and events be sent by email Each recipient can have its own SMTP server and TCP port number if this is not defined on a certain recipient the default SMTP server and TCP port number is used Syntax smtp configure the SNMP alerts to be sent via email Syntax show smtp lt config recipients gt config displays the current SMTP g
277. ns get a file from the server or put the information on the server type lt app config oldconf script host s log gt optional type field This is useful to specify whether a log file or host file is uploaded or downloaded This can also perform the task of exporting a configurat upload and download information using xmodem command and console connection vlan type port enter the VLAN configuration commands 297 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE 298 APPENDIX APPENDIX 3 Daylight Savings No time like the present Daylight Savings Time Magnum6K Switches provide a way to automatically adjust the system clock for Daylight Savings Time DST changes In addition to the value none no time changes there are fifteen pre defined settings a few examples are e Alaska e Canada and Continental US e Middle Europe and Portugal e Southern Hemisphere e Western Europe The pre defined settings follow these rules Alaska e Begin DST at 2am the first Sunday on or after April 24 e End DST at 2am the first Sunday on or after October 25 Canada and Continental US e Begin DST at 2am the first Sunday on or after April 1 e End DST at 2am the first Sunday on or after October 25 Middle Europe and Portugal e Begin DST at 2am the first Sunday on or after March 25 e End DST at 2am the first Sunday on or after September 24 Southern Hemisphere e Begin DST at 2am the first Sunday on or afte
278. o sensing speed Magnum6K25 device Magnum6K25 device setport port 11 name JohnDoe Magnum6K25 device setport port 12 name JaneDoe Magnum6K25 device show port 10Tx DOWN 10 No 10Tx DOWN 10 No Keys E Enable D Disable H Half Duplex F Full Duplex M Multiple VLANs NA Not Applicable LI Listening LE Learning F Forwarding B Blocking Port Name Control Dplx Media Link Speed Part Auto VianID GVRP STP 9 Bi E H 10Tx UP 10 No E 1 10 B2 E H 10Tx DOWN 10 No E 1 11 JohnDoe E H 10Tx DOWN 10 No E 1 12 JaneDoe E H 10Tx DOWN 10 No E 1 13 B5 F 100Tx UP 100 No E 1 14 B6 H 10Tx DOWN 10 No E 1 H E 1 H E 1 mmm m Magnum6K25 device exit Magnum6K25 FIGURE 64 Port setup The port s speed and duplex data transfer operation setting are summarized below Speed settings Auto default Senses speed and negotiates with the port at the other end of the link for data transfer operation half duplex or full duplex Auto uses the IEEE 802 3u auto negotiation standard for 100Base T networks If the other device does not comply 95 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE with the 802 3u standard then the port configuration on the switch must be manually set to match the port configuration on the other device Possible port setting combinations for copper ports are e 10HDx 10 Mbps Half Duplex e 10FDx 10 Mbps Full Duplex e 100HDx 100 Mbps Half Duplex e 100FDx 100 M
279. ode manual system_ip 192 168 1 15 system_subnet 0 0 0 0 system_gateway 192 168 1 11 idle_timeout 10 telnet_access enable snmp_access enable web_access enable XXXX more 51 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE lt additional lines deleted for succinct viewing gt FIGURE 37 show config command output Magnum6K25 show config module snmp HARDWARE type Magnum6K25 slotB 8 Port TP Module Atittit k attt tittttt t ttttttt ttitttit ttit ttittktitktitittitititt Network Management This area configures the SNMPv3 agent FEB t ttt tttttit t tittttttttktt nttit tttt ttit ttitttutititit SNMP engineid 6K_v3Engine defreadcomm public defwritecomm private deftrapcomm public authtrap disable com2sec_count 0 group_count 0 view_count 1 view1_name all view1_type included view1_subtree 1 view1_mask ff more lt additional lines deleted for succinct viewing gt FIGURE 38 displaying specific modules using the show contig command Magnum6K25 show config module snmp system HARDWARE type Magnum6K25 slotB 8 Port TP Module FEE A A A AA RE EE System Manager This area configures System related information FARBER EE SYSTEM Edit below this line only system_name Main system_contact someone joe com system_location Sunnyvale CA boot_mode manual system_ip 192 168 1 15 system_subnet 0 0 0 0 system_gateway 192 168 1
280. of a specific multicast group Thus IGMP identifies members of a multicast group within a subnet and allows IGMP configured hosts and routers to join or leave multicast groups When IGMP is enabled on the Magnum 6K family of switches it examines the IGMP packets it receives e To learn which of its ports are linked to IGMP hosts and multicast routers queriers belonging to any multicast group e To become a querier if a multicast router querier is not discovered on the network Once the switch learns the port location of the hosts belonging to any particular multicast group it can direct group traffic to only those ports resulting in bandwidth savings on ports where group members do not reside The following example illustrates this operation The figure below shows a network running IGMP 196 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Multicast Data Stream E Video N Server IGMP is NOT Running Here l IGMP IS E N Running Here Z 4 PC 1 Video Cli PC5 FIGURE 113 IGMP concepts advantages of using IGMP e PCs 1 and 4 switch 2 and all of the routers are members of an IP multicast group The routers operate as queriers e Switch 1 ignores IGMP traffic and does not distinguish between IP multicast group members and non members Thus it is sending large amounts of unwanted multicast traffic out the ports to PCs 2 and 3 e Switch 2 is recognizing IGMP traffic and learns that PC 4 is in the IP mul
281. of the event log the CLI command is exportlog as shown below Syntax exportlog mode lt serialltftplftp gt lt ipaddress gt file lt name gt doctype lt rawlhtml gt facilitates the export of the event log information as a text file or as an HTML file Where mode lt serialltftplftp gt is the mode of transfer lt ipaddress gt is the IP address of the ftp or TFTP server file lt name gt is the file name please make sure the proper file extension is used e g html for an html file doctype lt rawlhtml gt indicates the log is saved as a text file raw or as an HTML file 249 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Magnum6K25 exportlog Usage exportlog mode lt serialltftp ftp gt lt ipaddress gt file lt name gt doctype lt raw html gt Magnum6K25 exportlog mode tftp 192 168 5 2 file eventlog doctype html Do you wish to export the event logs Y or N Y Successfully uploaded the event log file Magnum6K25 exportlog mode tftp 192 168 5 2 file eventlog txt doctype raw Do you wish to export the event logs Y or N Y Successfully uploaded the event log file Magnum6K25 FIGURE 138 Using exportlog to export the event log information 250 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE For the alerts the events per subsystem function are listed below The table is sorted by the subsystem function first and then by the severity level Subsystem Description Severity BRIDGE Un
282. of the ring manager or ring control switch providing quick recovery of the ring fault without conflicting with standard RSTP STP The Magnum 6K family of switches running MNS 6K software offer users the choice of selecting S Ring when RSTP or STP is configured and in use For the S Ring the user must select two ports of one 6K switch to operate as a pait in support of each Ethernet ring and attach to the two ends of each ring as it comes together at the ring control switch 156 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE FIGURE 86 More than one S Ring pair can be selected and more than one S Ring can be defined per switch Note the mP62 as well as the ESD42 switches support LLL and can participate in S Ring as an access switch More than one S Ring port pair may be selected per ring control switch Each port pair will have its own separate attached ring and each port pair operates on faults independently The port pairs may be of any media type and the media type does not have to be the same for the pair With the Magnum 6K family of switches a port operating at any speed 10Mb 100Mb Gb may be designated as part of an S Ring port pair or RS Ring port pair ensuring proper Ethernet configuration of the ring elements After selecting a port pair for a ring the manager or administrator enables S Ring on the selected port paits via S Ring software commands One command enable disable turns S Ring on and off Anothe
283. oftware is updated via the serial port or over the network NOTE the common error is to use ftp gatrettcom com this URL will not work It will give you an error Please use ftp ftp garrettcom com Once the connection is established use the user login as m6kuser and the password as m 6kuser see Figure 1 If you have previously established a different login password for the GarrettCom site that login name and password can be used as well Intentionally left blank for image continuity image shown on next page 304 UPDATING MNS 6K STEP 1 ftp ftp garrettcom com Microsoft Internet Explorer F cdit Vie Favorit O Hel Qax B P seach f Folders fly Address ftp ftp garrettcom com Log On As gt Either the server does not allow anonymous logins or the e mail address was not accepted FTP server ftp garrettcom com User name m6kuser Password eovccece After you log on you can add this server to your Favorites and return to it easily FTP does not encrypt or encode passwords or data before sending them to the server To protect the security of your passwords and data use Web Folders WebDAV instead Learn more about using Web Folders Cl Log on anonymously C Save password FIGURE 141 Awessing the GarrettCom site for download Note if the browser does not support the login prompt you can type in the user name and password on the UR
284. omed device to devices in the network Supports dual homed device to devices in the network RSTP STP Operation without RS Ring or S Ring S Ring supports non managed switches as long as LLL capability is supported on that switch A ring is a special form of mesh network topology The two top of the ring ports form an otherwise illegal redundant path and standard RSTP STP causes one of these two ports to block incoming packets in order to enable normal Ethernet traffic flow All ring traffic goes through the non blocking port for normal LAN operation This port is designated Forwarding Port Meanwhile there is a regular flow of status checking multi cast packets called BPDUs or Bridge Protocol Data Units sent out by RSTP STP that move around the ring to show that things are functioning normally 154 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE ALOLE TARF s au Forwarding Blocking Pott Port FIGURE 84 Normal RSTP STP operations in a series of switches Note this normal status is designated RING_CLOSED This normal status is designated as RING_CLOSED Operations will continue this way indefinitely until a fault occurs A fault anywhere in the ring will interrupt the flow of standard RSTP STP status checking BPDU packets and will signal to RSTP STP that a fault has occurred According to the standard RSTP STP defined sequence protocol packets are then sent out gathered up and analyzed to enable RSTP STP to ca
285. oming packets as well as outgoing packets In a queue mechanism normally the packet which comes in first leaves first FIFO and all the packets are serviced accordingly Imagine if each packet had a priority assigned to it If a packet with a higher priority than other packets were to arrive in a queue the packet would be given a precedence and moved to the head of the queue and would go out as soon as possible The packet is thus preempted from the queue and this method is called preemptive queuing Preemptive queuing makes sense if there are several levels of priorities normally more than two If there are too many levels then the system has to spend a lot of time managing the preemptive nature of queuing IEEE 802 1p defines and uses eight levels of priorities The eight levels of priority are enumerated 0 to 7 with 0 the lowest priority and 7 the highest To make the preemptive queuing possible most switches implement at least two queue buffers The Magnum 6K family of switches has two priority queues 1 low and 0 high When tagged packets enter a switch port the switch responds by placing 186 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE the packet into one of the two queues and depending on the precedence levels the queue could be rearranged to meet the QoS requirements QoS refers to the level of preferential treatment a packet receives when it is being sent through a network QoS allows time sensitive packets such as voice and vi
286. on of a single Layer 2 link from two or more standard Ethernet links using the Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP LACP provides a robust means of assuring that both ends of the link are up and agree to be members of the aggregation before the link member is activated LACP trunking is a method of combining physical network links into a single logical link for increased bandwidth With LACP the effective bandwidth of a trunk and network availability is increased Two or more Fast Ethernet connections are combined as one logical trunk in order to increase the bandwidth and to create resilient and redundant links By taking multiple LAN connections and treating them as a unified ageregated link Link Aggregation provides the following important benefits e Higher link availability in case a link fails the other links continue to operate e Increased link capacity the effective throughput is increased e Better port utilization allows unused ports to be used as trunk ports allowing better throughput and availability e Interoperability being a standard allows LACP to work across different hardware platforms where LACP is supported Failure of any one physical link will not impact the logical link defined using LACP The loss of a link within an aggregation reduces the available capacity but the connection is maintained and the data flow is not interrupted 174 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE The performance is improved
287. ons traffic 187 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE IP Precedence IP Precedence utilizes the three precedence bits in the IPv4 header s Type of Service ToS field to specify class of service for each packet You can partition traffic in up to eight classes of service using IP precedence The queuing technologies throughout the network can then use this signal to provide the appropriate expedited handling Sl a L IP precedence FIGURE 110 IP Precedence ToS Field in an IP Packet Header The 3 most significant bits correlating to binary settings 32 64 and 128 of the Type of Service ToS field in the IP header constitute the bits used for IP precedence These bits are used to provide a priority from 0 to 7 for the IP packet Because only 3 bits of the ToS byte are used for IP precedence you need to differentiate these bits from the rest of the ToS byte The Magnum 6K family of switches has the capability to provide QoS at Layer 2 At Layer 2 the frame uses Type of Service ToS as specified in IEEE 802 1p ToS uses 3 bits just like IP precedence and maps well from Layer 2 to layer 3 and vice versa The switches have the capability to differentiate frames based on ToS settings With two queues present high or low priority queues or buffers in Magnum 6K family of switches frames can be placed in either queue and serviced via the weight set on all ports This placement of queues added to the weight set plus
288. op part of the figure shows two traditional Ethernet segments Up to 32 VLANS can be defined per switch FIGURE 68 Ports can belong to multiple VLANs In this figure a simplistic view is presented where some ports belong to VLANs 1 2 and other ports belong to VLANs 2 3 Ports can belong to VLANs 1 2 and 3 This is not shown in the figure sussies FIGURE 69 routing between different VLANs is performed using a router or a Layer 3 switch AS SPILL Ss a Rasta a ales FIGURE 70 configuring VLANs on Magnum GRvitch FIGURE 71 Example of setting ap port based VLANS xiii specified the port or specific ports or a range of ports can be queried as Shown sss acim inthe S OONN irei A E A AMDO ZARON ini N a a ailing FIGURE 61 TACACS packet format FIGURE G2 Confpunng TACACS Fiiirenicienidiiiiii i nin a aiia FIGURE 63 neeeeeee a a a 104 FIGURE 724 Example jor ae VIAN oii en a a a a 118 FIGURE 73 Editing the VLAN information for enabling or disabling management 121 Figure 74 STP default values refer to next section Using STP for more detailed explanation on the v tables cc coxieaakvcetbai covinchohBbabud ives vata badeav vadadebb bea van adabcatn bea nied 124 FIGURE 75 Viewing STP configuration 125 FIGURE 76 STP Port status information 126 FIGURE 77 Enabling STP reraman a A a a 128 FIGURE 78 Cozfeurnno S KP parameters iiano dunn taht
289. or RMON groups 1 2 3 and 9 Statistics Events Alarms and History Enterprise Traps Intruder S Ring and LLL Standards There are several RFC s defining SNMP MNS 6K supports the following RFC s and standards SNMPv1 standards e Security via configuration of SNMP communities e Event reporting via SNMP e Managing the switch with an SNMP network management tool Supported Standard MIBs include e SNMP MIB II RFC 1213 e Bridge MIB RFC 1493 GfGeneralGroup ifRcvAddressGroup ifStackGroup 220 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE RMON MIB REC 1757 RMON groups 1 2 3 and 9 Statistics Events Alarms and History Version 1 traps Warm Start Cold Start Link Up Link Down Authentication Failure Rising Alarm Falling Alarm RFC 1901 1908 SNMPv2 RFC 1901 Introduction to Community Based SNMPv2 SNMPv2 Working Group RFC 1902 Structure of Management Information for Version 2 of the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMPv2 SNMPv2 Working Group RFC 1903 Textual Conventions for Version 2 of the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMPv2 SNMPv2 Working Group RFC 1904 Conformance Statements for Version 2 of the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMPv2 SNMPv2 Working Group RFC 1905 Protocol Operations for Version 2 of the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMPv2 SNMPv2 Working Group RFC 1906 Transport Mappings for Version 2 of the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMPv2 RFC 1907 Management I
290. or a DHCP server If a DHCP server is not found it will then look for a BootP server If that server is not found the switch will check to see if the switch had a pre configured IP address If it did the switch would be assigned that IP address If the switch did not have a pre configured IP address it would inspect if the IP address 192 168 1 2 with a netmask of 255 255 255 0 is free If the IP address is free MNS 6K will assign the switch that IP address If the address is not free MNS 6K will poll the network for DHCP server then BootP server then check if the IP address 192 68 1 2 is freed up bootimg lt enable disable gt valid with type bootp only This option allows the switch to load the image file from the BootP server This is useful when a new switch is put on a network and the IT policies are set to load only a specific MNS 6Kimage which is supported and tested by IT personnel bootcfg lt enable disable gt valid with type bootp only This option allows the switch to load the configuration file from the BootP server This is useful when a new switch is put on a network and the specific configurations are loaded from a centralized BootP server Syntax telnet lt enable disable gt enables or disables telnet sessions Syntax telnet lt ipaddress gt port lt port number gt zelnet from the switch 258 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Syntax set serial baud lt rate gt data lt 5 6 7 8 gt parity lt none
291. or stop Disable STP Syntax set stp type lt stp rstp gt set the spanning tree protocol to be IEEE 802 1 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Syntax show active stp Display which version of STP is currently active Syntax show ts ring show the status of RS Ring status and configuration Syntax ts ring lt enable disable gt enable or disable RS Ring capabilities Syntax ts ring add port lt portl port2 gt define ports which make up the RS Ring ports Note as discussed earlier you can create multiple RS rings on a switch Syntax ts ring del port lt portl port2 gt remove the switch from RS Ring topology by eliminating the end ports on the switch Magnum 6K25 authorize s ring key BABABABABABAB S RING Module Successfully Authorized Please Save Configuration Magnum 6K25 save Saving current configuration Configuration saved Saving current event logs Event logs saved Magnum 6K25 show rs ring RS RING status Disabled RS RING set on ports NONE Magnum 6K25 show active stp Current Active Mode RSTP RSTP is Disabled Magnum 6K25 rstp Magnum 6K25 rstp rstp enable Successfully set the RSTP status Magnum 6K25 rstp show active stp Current Active Mode RSTP RSTP is Enabled Magnum 6K25 rstp rs ring add port 13 14 Added Ports 13 14 Magnum 6K25 rstp show rs ring RS RING status Disabled RS RING set on ports 13 14 165 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Magnum 6K2
292. ormation via emails FIGURE 133 Optimizing serial connection shown for Hyper Terminal on Windows XP The highlighted fields are the ones to change as described FIGURE 134 TIzsiory commands tairnic innia i n i i ii FIGURE 135 3 erno custom PV ODD IG nnn iaa a a A FIGURE 136 Using the ping command inini aE a E E e FIGURE 137 Event loo shown om the STen isvin iai a a EEEE FIGURE 138 Using exportlog to export the event log information FIGURE 139 Listing of severity sorted by subsystem and severity xvi 201 FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU RE 140 Display of the internal switching decision table sssri 254 RE 141 Accessing the GarrettCom site for download 305 RE 142 Select the proper version to use after successful login veescesssserecssssverecssssveresssssseeesseeencens 306 RE 143 Navigate to MNS 6K folder to download the latest MN S 6K software and the release noli annan aa a tisk a a o aana a a ams a a N a 306 RE 144 Use the copy command to copy the files to the proper location sessies 307 RE 145 HyperTerminal screen showing the serial settings sssssssiseriserisrrissrirsererererererersrissrresee 309 RE 146 Using telnet command to connect to a Magnum 6K switch with IP address 192168101 T Graal ahaii ka a a a aS 309 RE 147 Example of saveconf command using serial interfa t s 310
293. ormation will be propagated across 5 Layer 3 consideration check to see if the routing between the VLANs is working by pinging stations on different VLANs 1 You can rename the default VLAN but you cannot change its VID 1 or delete it from the switch 2 Any ports of specifically assigned to another VLAN will remain assigned to the DEFAULT VLAN 3 Changing the number of VLANs supported on the switch requires the SAVE command to save the new VLAN information Creating VLANs Creating VLAN and to configure VLAN related commands Syntax set vlan type lt port tag none gt 107 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE VLAN Configuration Syntax configure vlan type port OR Syntax vlan type port Adding VLANs Syntax add id lt vlan Id gt name lt vlan name gt port lt number list range gt forbid lt number list range gt lt mgt nomgt gt Disabling Management on VLAN Use the lt nomegt gt option when creating a VLAN as shown in the add command above Starting VLANs Syntax start vlan lt name number list range gt Saving the configuration Syntax save Editing VLANs Syntax edit id lt vlan Id gt name lt vlan name gt port lt numbet list range gt lt mgt nomgt gt Displaying the VLAN information Syntax show vlan type lt port tag gt lt id vlanid gt Magnum6K25 vlan type port Magnum6K25 port vian add id 2 name test port 1 10 Magnum6K25 port vlan start
294. ort S curitaire e tlh toute EN 65 Network sec rit it ai aeaa aaae eakas Seati 65 Configuring Port Security p 65 WO GS E EEEE AE 71 Authorized Managers ssesesseeseeresreseesresrssresrereesesreresresseseeseess 73 List of commands in this Chapter ssssssssesseeseererresresreseesresees 75 6 Access Using RADIUS 77 a a e a na 77 10e SEEE EEE EEE EEEE 77 Configuring 802 13renniasien 80 List of commands in this chapter ssssssssesseeseereeresrsresresresees 85 1 Access Using TACACSE nseries 87 TACACS flavors and history 87 TACACS H FOW isnin eu rssh 88 TACACS F Packetgsrri a EA E 89 Confiou tine TACAGS F nimena 89 List of commands in this chapter sssesssssesseeseereeressesreseeeresees 91 8 Port Mirroring and Setup esessesssseseeerersesesssoeeeeeesssssesee 93 Port monitoring and Minot issn shaieuiedsosiatbatadanvtails 93 Port TROT S aeinn nanan n aa 93 Port s para ee ace a EAE E a 94 Speed CST aS ainni a E E RRN 95 Flow ConttJJJJJ EEE ae cnnenaae 96 Back Pressure Wet ee ea a cre nee eee eee 97 Broadcast Storms sanin a a A nt 99 Preventing broadcast Storms ssesesessereerrerisresresrrrresresessees 100 Port Rate limiting for broadcast traffic sssssessereress 101 List of commands in this Chapter sssssseesessesresrsererrerese 101 DN Vi T E 103 a VAIN EAEE AE AN 103 Tag VLAN Gt Pott VLAN ai ocet toteadles ee etedadtiactnetecacsieterteas 105 V Private VLANS 106
295. orts IPv6 addressing as most Linux and Windows systems do one can access the switch using the IPv6 addressing as shown in the example below http fe80 220 6ff fe25 ed80 List of commands in this chapter Syntax ipconfig ip lt ip address gt mask lt subnet mask gt dgw lt gateway gt add del configure and IPv6 address The add delete option can be used to add or delete IPv4 IPv6 addresses Syntax show ipconfig display the IP configuration information including IPv6 address 62 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Syntax ping6 lt IPv6 address gt pings an IPv6 station Syntax show ipv6 displays the IPv6 information Syntax ftp lt IPv6 address gt fp to an IPv6 station Syntax telnet lt IPv6 address gt ze net to an IPv6 station 63 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Chapter 5 Access Considerations Securing the switch access his section explains how the access to the GarrettCom Magnum MNS 6K can be secured Further security considerations are also covered such as securing access by IP address or MAC address Securing access It is assumed here that the user is familiar with issues concerning security as well as securing access for users and computers on a network Secure access on a network can be provided by authenticating against an allowed MAC address as well as IP address Passwords Magnum 6K family of switches comes with a factory default password for the manager as
296. ote Authentication Dial In User Service or RADIUS is a server that has been traditionally used by many Internet Service Providers ISP as well as Enterprises to authenticate dial in users Today many businesses use the RADIUS server for authenticating users connecting into a network For example if a user connects a PC into the network whether the PC should be allowed access or not provides the same issues as to whether or not a dial in user should be allowed access into the network or not A user has to provide a user name and password for authenticated access A RADIUS server is well suited for controlling access into a network by managing the users who can access the network on a RADIUS server Interacting with the server and taking corrective action s is not possible on all switches This capability is provided on the Magnum 6K family of switches RADIUS servers and its uses are also described by one or more RFCs 802 1x There are three major components of 802 1x Supplicant Authenticator and Authentication Server RADIUS Server In the figure below the PC acts as the supplicant The supplicant is an entity being authenticated and desiring access to the services The switch is the authenticator The authenticator enforces authentication before 77 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE allowing access to services that are accessible via that port The authenticator is responsible for communication with the supplicant and for submitti
297. p lt ipaddress gt mask lt netmask gt service lt name list gt deny specific IP address or range of IP addresses remove ip lt ipaddress gt mask lt netmask gt delete a specific IP address from the access or trusted host list 75 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Syntax temoveall remove all IP addresses of trusted hosts Syntax show ip access display all trusted hosts Syntax clear lt history log 1 5 informational activity critical fatal debug terminal arp portstats addr char command to clear various aspects of the MNS 6K information most notably clear addr clears the addresses learnt or clear log to clear the logs and the type of logs 76 Chapter 6 Access Using RADIUS Using a RADIUS server to authenticate access based network access control that makes use of the physical access characteristics of IEEE 802 LAN infrastructure It provides a means of authenticating and authorizing devices attached to LAN ports that have point to point connection characteristics It also prevents access to that port in cases where the authentication and authorization fails Although 802 1x is mostly used in wireless networks this protocol is also implemented in LANs The Magnum 6K family of switches implements the authenticator which is a major component of 802 1x T he IEEE 802 1x standard Port Based Network Access Control defines a mechanism for port RADIUS Rem
298. p to 5 users to be added Right now the MNS 6K agent only support noauth and auth md5 for v3 authentication and auth des for priv authentication Syntax show uset id lt id gt display all or specific view entries id is optional and is the number corresponding to the view entry number in the table Magnum6K25 set snmp type v1 Magnum6K25 show active snmp 6K SNMP Agent supports v1 only Magnum6K25 show snmp SNMP CONFIGURATION INFORMATION SNMP Get Community Name public SNMP Set Community Name private SNMP Trap Community Name public AuthenTrapsEnableFlag disabled SNMP Access Status enabled 223 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE SNMP MANAGERS INFO Magnum6K25 snmp Magnum6K25 snmp community write private read public SNMP Read community name successfully set SNMP Write community name successfully set Magnum6K25 snmp show snmp SNMP CONFIGURATION INFORMATION SNMP Get Community Name public SNMP Set Community Name private SNMP Trap Community Name public AuthenTrapsEnableFlag enabled SNMP Access Status enabled SNMP MANAGERS INFO Magnum6K25 snmp mgrip add ip 192 168 1 111 oo Use this command for SNMP v1 managers Manager IP Address added successfully Without this command SNMP v1 managers will not be able to manage the switches Not Magnum6K25 snmp mgrip add ip 192 168 1 222 needed for SNMP v3 Note maximum of 5 stations allowed Manager IP Address
299. pe lt app config oldconf script hosts log gt host lt hostname gt ip lt ipaddress gt file lt filename gt upload and download information using tftp command Where lt get put gt different tftp operations get a file from the server or put the information on the server 3 FTP uses a set of separate ports for the data stream and command stream This causes problems in security conscious companies who prefer that the client initiate the file transfer as well as the stream for the commands To accommodate that ftp added the capability called passive ftp in which the client initiating the connection initiates both the data and command connection request Most companies prefer passive ftp and GarrettCom MNS 6K provides means to operate in those environments 46 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE type lt app config oldconf script hosts log gt optional type field This is useful to specify whether a log file or host file is uploaded or downloaded This can also perform the task of exporting a configuration file or uploading a new image to the switch host lt hostname gt ip lt ipaddress gt file lt filename gt parameters associated with tftp server for proper communications with the server Syntax xmodem lt get put gt type lt app config oldconf script hosts log gt upload and download information using xmodem command and console connection Where lt get put gt
300. plicants port mandatory ports to be configured quiet optional This is the quiet period the amount of time in seconds the supplicant is held after an authentication failure before the authenticator retries the supplicant for connection The default value is 60 seconds Values can range from 0 to 65535 seconds maxreauth optional The number of re authentication attempts that are permitted before the port becomes unauthorized Default value is 2 Values are integers and can range from 0 to 10 transmit optional This is the transmit period this is the time in seconds the authenticator waits to transmit another request for identification from the supplicant Default value is 30 Values can be from 1 to 65535 seconds Syntax teauth port lt num list range gt status lt enable disable gt period lt 10 86400 gt set values on how the authenticator Magnum 6K snitch does the re authentication with the supplicant or PC port mandatory ports to be configured status optional This enables disables re authentication period optional this is the re authentication period in seconds This is the time the authenticator waits before a re authentication process will be done again to the supplicant Default value is 3600 seconds 1 hour Values can range from 10 to 86400 seconds Syntax show stats port lt num gt displays 802 1x related statistics Syntax trigger reauth port lt num list rang
301. port 193 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Syntax show qos type lt port tag tos gt port lt port list range gt displays the QoS settings Syntax set untag port lt port list range gt priority lt high low gt tag lt 0 7 gt The 802 1p user priority assigned to untagged received packets to be transmitted as tagged from the priority queue 194 Chapter 16 IGMP Mutticast traffic on a network nternet Group Management Protocol IGMP is defined in RFC 1112 as the standard for IP multicasting in the Internet It is used to establish host memberships in particular multicast groups on a single network The mechanisms of the protocol allows a host to inform its local router using Host Membership Reports that it wants to receive messages addressed to a specific multicast group All hosts conforming to level 2 of the IP multicasting specification require IGMP IGMP concepts The Magnum 6K family of switches supports IGMP L2 standards as defined by RFC 1112 IGMP is disabled by default and needs to be enabled on the Magnum 6K family of switches IP multicasting is defined as the transmission of an IP datagram to a host group a set of zero or more hosts identified by a single IP destination address A multicast datagram is delivered to all members of its destination host group with the same best efforts reliability as regular unicast IP datagram i e the datagram is not guaranteed to arrive at all members of
302. port lt num list range gt manually initiate a re authentication of supplicant Chapter 7 Access using TACACS Syntax show tacplus lt status servers gt show status of TACACS or servers configured as TACACS SEVTVETS Syntax tacplus lt enable disable gt order lt tac local local tac gt enable or disable TACACS authentication specifying the order in which the server or local database is looked up where tac local implies first the LACAS server then local logins on the device 264 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Syntax tacservet lt add delete gt id lt num gt ip lt ip addr gt port lt tcp port gt encrypt lt enable disable gt key lt string gt mgrlevel lt level gt oprlevel lt level gt adds a list of up to five TACACS servers where lt add delete gt mandatory adds or delete a TACACS server id lt num gt mandatory the order in which the TACACS servers should be polled for authenticaton ip lt ip addr gt mandatory for add the IP address of the TACACS server port lt tcp port gt optional for add TCP port number on which the server is listening encrypt lt enable disable gt optional for add enable or disable packet encryption key lt string gt optional for add mandatory with encrypt when encryption is enabled the secret shared key string must be supplied mgrlevel lt level gt and oprlevel lt level gt opt
303. port security 65 69 70 75 262 priority 126 128 131 134 142 145 148 186 267 268 Private VLAN 106 privilege level 28 prtmr 93 101 265 ps 66 67 75 262 put 46 47 260 282 297 qos 189 193 270 QoS 20 97 186 187 188 189 191 193 194 270 271 quickcfg 222 226 232 273 RADIUS 77 78 79 80 85 263 rate threshold 100 101 102 266 reauth 83 86 264 reboot 27 33 257 316 317 319 remove 66 69 73 74 75 262 263 remove mac 66 75 262 removeall 74 263 RFC 77 195 RFC 1112 195 RFC 1752 59 RFC 1901 221 RFC 1902 221 RFC 1903 221 RFC 1904 221 RFC 1905 221 RFC 1906 221 RFC 1907 221 RFC 1908 221 RFC 2104 221 324 RFC 2271 221 RFC 2272 221 RFC 2273 221 RFC 2274 221 RFC 2275 221 RFC 3164 71 RFC 4541 202 RFC 821 239 RING_CLOSED 155 157 163 RING_OPEN 156 rmon 231 233 274 RMON 230 231 233 234 236 241 274 275 rs ring 165 166 286 RS Ring 20 137 149 150 151 152 154 157 158 159 162 163 164 165 167 268 286 rs ring add 165 286 rs ring del 165 166 286 rs ring disable 166 rstp 137 143 147 165 267 RSTP 20 51 53 125 127 128 129 130 131 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 162 163 164 165 178 179 236 238 239 267 268 282 284 286 287 291 293 294 rstp enab
304. ppear sluggish With IGMP L2 enabled on all Magnum 6K family of switches this situation as shown above is prevented This is explained in the figure below 200 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE FIGURE 116 Using IGMP L2 on Magnum 6K family of switches a Layer 2 network can minimize multicast traffic as shown above Each switch has the IGMPL2 turned on Each switch can exchange the IGMP query message and respond properly R4 wants to view surveillance traffic from T1 As shown by 1 a join request is sent by R4 Once the join report information is exchanged only R4 receives the video surveillance traffic as shown by 2 No other device on the network gets the video surveillance traffic unless they issue a join request as well Since the query and the join information is exchanged between the neighboring switches the topology does not matter The design issue to consider is the timing difference between a topology recovery and IGMP refresh recovery GarrettCom Magnum 6K family of switches connected in a S Ring or RS Ring topology recovers very rapidly sub second recovery The IGMP requests for updates are sent out every few seconds depending on the network and the devices on the network The recovery of the network from a fault situation is much faster than the age out and join request from IGMP Thus when the Magnum 6K switch network self heals it is possible that the video may freeze till the IGMP device reissues a join requ
305. ps associated with any of the connections to the switch This works regardless of whether VLANs are configured on the switch Thus these switches do not distinguish between VLANs when identifying redundant physical links The switch automatically senses port identity and type and automatically defines port cost and priority for each type The MNS 6K software allows a manager to adjust the cost priority the mode for each port as well as the global STP parameter values for the switch While allowing only one active path through a network at any time STP retains any redundant physical path to serve as a backup blocked path in case the existing active path fails Thus if an active path fails STP automatically activates unblocks an available backup to serve as the new active path for as long as the original active path is down The table below lists the default values of the STP variables 123 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Variable or Attribute Default Value STP capabilities Disabled reconfiguring general operation priority 32768 Bridge maximum age 20 seconds Hello time 2 seconds Forward delay 15 seconds Reconfiguring per port STP path cost 0 Priority 32768 Mode Normal Monitoring of STP Not Available Root Port Not set Figure 74 STP default values refer to next section Using STP for more detailed explanation on the variables 1 By default STP is disabled
306. pter 11 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Syntax set stp type lt stp rstp gt Set the switch to support RSTP or change it back to STP Need to save and reboot the switch after this command Syntax rstp enter the RSTP configuration mode Syntax rstp lt enable disable gt enable RSTP by default this is disabled and has to be manually activated Syntax port pott lt number list range gt status lt enable disable gt migration lt enable gt edge lt enable disable gt p2p lt on off auto gt set the port type for RSTP 267 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Example port port lt number list range gt p2p off Set the point to point value to off on all ports that are connected to shared LAN segments i e connections to hubs The default value is auto P2P ports would typically be end stations or computers on the network Example port pott lt numbet list range gt edge enable enable all ports connected to other hubs bridges and switches as edge ports Example port port lt number list range gt migration enable set this for all ports connected to other devices such as hubs bridges and switches known to support IEEE 802 1d STP services but cannot support RSTP services Syntax show active stp status whether STP or RSTP is running Syntax show stp lt config ports gt display the RSTP or STP parameters Syntax forceversion lt stp rstp gt set the STP or RSTP compatibil
307. r use UDP socket number if the RADIUS authentication is on port other than 1812 Syntax auth lt enable disable gt enables or disables the 802 1 authenticator function on MNS 6K switch Syntax setport port lt num list range gt status lt enable disable gt control lt auto forceauth forceunauth gt initialize lt assert deassert gt se ting the port characteristic for an 802 1 network Syntax backend port lt num list range gt supptimeout lt 1 240 gt servertimeout lt 1 240 gt maxreq lt 1 10 gt configure parameters for EAP over RADIUS port mandatory port s to be configured supptimeout optional This is the timeout in seconds the authenticator waits for the supplicant to respond back Default value is 30 seconds Values can range from 1 to 240 seconds setvertimeout optional This is the timeout in seconds the authenticator waits for the backend RADIUS server to respond back The default value is 30 seconds Values can range from 1 to 240 seconds 263 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE maxreq optional The maximum number of times the authenticator will retransmit an EAP Request packet to the Supplicant before it times out the authentication session Its default value is 2 It can be set to any integer value from 1 to 10 Syntax portaccess port lt num list range gt quiet lt 0 65535 gt maxreauth lt 0 10 gt transmit lt 1 65535 gt set port access paramete
308. r any other operating system based work station computer personal computer laptop notebook or any other computing device Most of the manual uses Windows XP based examples While effort has been made to indicate other Operating System interactions it is best to use a Windows XP based machine when in doubt Supported MNS 6K Version The documentation reflects features of MNS 6K version 3 4 or later If your switch is not at the current version GarrettCom Inc recommends upgrade to the latest version Please refer to the GarrettCom Web site for information on upgrading the MNS 6K software on Magnum 6K family of switches Product Family this manual is for all the Magnum 6K family of switches Finally at the end of each chapter is a list of the commands covered in the chapter as well as a brief synopsis of what they do Flow of the User Guide The manual is designed to guide the user through a sequence of events Chapter 1 this chapter Chapter 2 is the basic setup as required by the Magnum 6K family of switches After completing Chapter 2 the configuration can be done using the web interface Chapter 2 is perhaps the most critical chapter in what needs to be done by the network administrator once the switch is received MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Chapter 3 focuses on operational issues of the switch This includes time synchronization using the command line or using a time server on the network Chapter 4 throu
309. r October 25 e End DST at 2am the first Sunday on or after March 1 Western Europe e Begin DST at 2am the first Sunday on or after March 23 e End DST at 2am the first Sunday on or after October 23 Daylight saving time is defined for the following countries 299 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Australia Belgium Canada Chile Cuba Egypt France Finland Germany Greece Iraq Italy London Namibia Portugal Russia Spain Sweden Switzerland Syria USA Note as of Release 3 7 the new daylight saving times dates enforced as of 2007 for the time zones and states in US have been implemented in MNS 6K 300 UPDATING MNS 6K APPENDIX APPENDIX 4 Updating MNS 6K Software Keep up to date The steps required to update the MNS 6K software on your Magnum switch are listed UPDATING MNS 6K STEP 1 Step 1 Getting Started Decide which version to use switch The methods described for updating the MNS 6K software are either locally at the console port on the Magnum 6K switch or remotely over the network using FTP or TFTP This step involves getting ready with the necessary software and hardware tools as well as deciding on which MNS 6K software version to update to T his document describes how to upgrade the MNS 6K software on a Magnum 6K Depending on the update process update through the serial console port or remotely through the network it would be best if the necessary tools listed b
310. r command adds deletes port pairs Other commands provide for status reporting on the ring The MNS 6K software package provides for remote operation access security event logs and other industry standard managed network capabilities suitable for industrial applications requiring redundancy When S Ring is enabled for a port pair fault detection and recovery are armed for the associated ting The standard RSTP STP functions are performed by the Magnum 6K family of switches for other ports in the same manner as they would be without S Ring enabled when operating in the RING_CLOSED state During this state RS Ring or S Ring is also watching the flow of the BPDU packets that move around the ring between the designated part pair The extra capability of S Ring comes into play when a fault occurs When the flow of BPDU packets around the ring is interrupted or when Link Loss is sensed on one of the ports of the ring port pair by S Ring S Ring quickly acts to change the blocking port s state to forwarding No waiting for STP analysis No waiting for RSTP analysis No checking for other possible events No other ports to look at No 30 second delay before taking action S Ring or RS Ring takes immediate corrective action for quick recovery from the fault in the ring The ring becomes two strings topologically as shown above and there is a path 157 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE through the two strings for all normal LAN traffic to
311. r gt udp lt num gt secret lt string gt define the RADIUS server use UDP socket number if the RADIUS authentication is on port other than 1812 Syntax auth lt enable disable gt enables or disables the 802 1 authenticator function on MNS 6K switch Syntax setport port lt num list range gt status lt enable disable gt control lt auto forceauth forceunauth gt initialize lt assert deassert gt getting the port characteristic for an 802 1 network Syntax backend port lt num list range gt supptimeout lt 1 240 gt servertimeout lt 1 240 gt maxreq lt 1 10 gt configure parameters for EAP over RADIUS port mandatory port s to be configured supptimeout optional This is the timeout in seconds the authenticator waits for the supplicant to respond back Default value is 30 seconds Values can range from 1 to 240 seconds servertimeout optional This is the timeout in seconds the authenticator waits for the backend RADIUS server to respond back The default value is 30 seconds Values can range from 1 to 240 seconds maxreq optional The maximum number of times the authenticator will retransmit an EAP Request packet to the Supplicant before it times out the authentication session Its default value is 2 It can be set to any integer value from 1 to 10 Syntax porttaccess pott lt num list range gt quiet lt 0 65535 gt maxreauth lt 0 10 gt transmit lt 1 65535
312. r level provides all Operator level privileges plus the ability to perform system level actions and configuration commands To select this level enter the enable lt user name gt command at the Operator level prompt and enter the Manager password when prompted Syntax enable lt uset name gt For example switching from an Operator level to manager level using the enable command is shown below in Figure 6 Magnum6K25 gt enable manager Password Magnum6K25 FIGURE 6 Switching users and privilege levels Note the prompt changes with the new privilege level Operator Privileges Operator privileges allow views of the current configurations but do not allow changes to the configuration A gt character delimits the Operator level prompt Manager Privileges Manager privileges allow configuration changes The changes can be done at the manager prompt or for global configuration as well as specific configuration A character delimits any Manager prompt User management A maximum of five users can be added per switch Users can be added deleted or changed from a manager level account There can be more than one manager account subject to the maximum number of users on the switch being restricted to five 28 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Add User To add a user use the command add as shown below The user name has to be a unique name and can be up to 24 characters lo
313. r the IGMP querier to reside on a Layer 3 network device typically a router or a Layer 3 switch The end devices encoders or transmitters reside on a Layer 2 device and the encoder sends a quety join request to join the specific multicast group The Magnum 6K family of switches with the IGMP L2 enabled can propagate the query request and also make sure that the multicast traffic only goes to the ports requesting the traffic The Magnum 6K family of switches using IGMP L2 can perform the similar tasks a Layer 3 device performs for IGMP 199 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE For a Layer 2 IGMP environment all Magnum 6K family of switches have to be enabled in the IGMP L2 This is done using the CLI command set igmp mode 12 which will be described later In a Layer 2 network without IGMP L2 there is no querier nor is there any capability for the devices to use IGMP snooping to join a multicast group Thus the traffic picture from a multicast device would look as shown below FIGURE 115 In a Layer 2 network an IGMP multicast traffic goes to all the nodes In the figure T1 a surveillance camera using multicast will send the traffic to all the nodes R1 through R6 irrespective of whether they want to view the surveillance traffic or not The traffic is compounded when additional cameras are added to the network End result is that users R1 through R6 see the network as heavily loaded and simple day to day operations may a
314. ress in trap receivers list failed D SNMP read community string changed I SNMP write community string changed I SNMP trap community string changed I SNMP authentication failure trap sent to a b c d I SNMP Trap receiver a b c d added I SNMP Trap receiver a b c d deleted I SNMP Coldstart trap sent to a b c d I SNMP Warmstart trap sent to a b c d I SNTP client started I SNTP client stopped disabled by user I SNTP client stopped server not configured I SNTP Request timed out I SNTP Retrying I SNTP Time synchronized through SNTP I 252 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Subsystem Description Severity TCP IP Duplicate IP a b c d sent from MAC address XXXXXX TCP IP Unable to allocate memory for an ICMP packet TCP IP IP packet from a b c d with checksum error dropped TCP IP Bad IP fragments from a b c d dropped TCP IP UDP checksum error in the recetved packet a b c d TCP IP TCP checksum error in the received packet a b c d TCP IP ICMP checksum error in the received packet TCP IP Failed to initialize the interface x TCP IP IP packet of version X is dropped VLAN Type set to port VLAN Type set to mac VLAN Type set to tag VLAN Type set to none VLAN Pvlan port based vlan started VLAN Pvlan default vlan is modified VLAN Tvlan Tag based vlan started VLAN pvlan vlan X enabled VLAN pvlan vlan X disabled VLAN pvlan vlan X deleted VLAN pvlan port based VLAN started VLAN pvlan port based VLAN stopped VLAN pvlan default vlan is
315. ring dual homing Syntax dualhome enter the dual homing configuration sub system Syntax dualhome lt enable disable gt enable or disable dual homing Syntax dualhome add portl lt port gt port2 lt port gt dual homing setup similar to that of unmanaged switches such as ESD42 OR Syntax dualhome add primary lt port gt secondary lt port gt dual homing setup as primary secondary mode Syntax dualhome del Delete the dual homing setup Syntax show dualhome Display dual homing status The following set of commands show how dual homing is setup In the example below both modes of dual homing operation is setup 171 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Magnum 6K25 dualhome dualhome Configures Dual homing Usage dualhome lt enter gt Magnum 6K25 show dualhome Dual Homing Status DISABLED Magnum 6K25 dualhome Magnum 6K25 dualhome dualhome add port1 10 port2 11 Dual Homing Ports configured Magnum 6K25 dualhome dualhome enable Dual Homing Enabled Magnum 6K25 dualhome show dualhome Dual Homing Status ENABLED Dual Homing Ports 10 11 Dual Homing Active On Port 10 Magnum 6K25 dualhome dualhome del Dual Homing Ports Deleted and Dual Homing Disabled Magnum 6K25 dualhome show dualhome Dual Homing Status DISABLED Magnum 6K25 dualhome dualhome add primary 10 secondary 11 Dual Homing Ports configured Magnum 6K25 dualhome show dualhome Dual Homing St
316. rketing Ports 14 Magnum6K25 port vian show vlan type port VLAN ID 1 Name Default VLAN Status Active 9 UP 10 DOWN 11 DOWN 12 DOWN 13 UP 14 DOWN 15 DOWN 16 DOWN 109 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE VLAN ID 10 The VLANS added are not yet active Each individual Name engineering VLAN can be activated or all VLANS can be Status Pending activated 14 DOWN VLAN ID 20 Name sales Status Pending 14 DOWN VLAN ID 30 Name marketing Status Pending Start all VLANs Magnum6K25 port vian sitart vian all All pending VLAN s started Magnum6K25 port vian show vian type port VLAN ID 1 Name Default VLAN Status Active 9 UP 10 DOWN 11 DOWN 12 DOWN 13 UP 15 DOWN 16 DOWN VLANID 10 Se ae Status Active _ __ The Pending VLAN is now Active 14 DOWN VLAN ID 20 Name sales 110 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Status Active 14 DOWN VLAN ID 30 Name marketing Status Active Magnum6K25 port vian exit Magnum6K25 FIGURE 71 Example of setting up port based VLANs Using Tag VLANs When multiple switches are connected on a network the VLAN information needs to be propagated on to other switches In such situations it is best to use tag based VLANs Older versions of MNS 6K the use of tag VLANs needed the set ingress and set egress comm
317. rnet Engineering Task Force at the Toronto IETF meeting on July 25 1994 in RFC 1752 The Recommendation for the IP Next Generation Protocol The recommendation was approved by the Internet Engineering Steering Group and made a proposed standard on November 17 1994 The core set of IPv6 protocols were made an IETF draft standard on August 10 1998 IPv6 is a new version of IP which is designed to be an evolutionary step from IPv4 It is a natural increment to IPv4 It can be installed as a normal software upgrade in internet devices and is interoperable with the current IPv4 Its deployment strategy is designed to not have any dependencies IPv6 is designed to run well on high performance networks e g Gigabit Ethernet OC 12 ATM etc and at the same time still be efficient for low bandwidth networks e g wireless In addition it provides a platform for new internet functionality that will be required in the near future IPv6 includes a transition mechanism which is designed to allow users to adopt and deploy IPv6 in a highly diffuse fashion and to provide direct interoperability between IPv4 59 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE and IPv6 hosts The transition to a new version of the Internet Protocol is normally incremental with few or no critical interdependencies Most of today s internet uses IPv4 which is now nearly twenty years old IPv4 has been remarkably resilient in spite of its age but it is beginning to have problems Mos
318. rnet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Oax B JO Search f gt Folders Flv Address ftp ftp garrettcom com Rel3 Size Type Modified Folder Tasks File Folder 8 27 2004 1 54 PM File Folder 8 27 2004 2 00 PM i Rename this folder File Folder 9 1 2004 6 30 PM Move this folder User_Guide File Folder 10 21 2004 6 10 PM A Copy this folder X Delete this folder FIGURE 143 Navigate to MNS 6K folder to download the latest MNS 6K software and the release notes Copy the necessary files by using the copy command This can be done by using the right click or for left handed mouse the left click button and then selecting the copy command See Figure 4 Note Linux or other operating system users please use the appropriate copy command a If you are using another ftp program use that programs copy command Make sure to download the Rel x x bin file in the binary mode especially if you are using a command line ftp command or the MNS 6K image may be corrupted 306 UPDATING MNS 6K STEP 1 ft ftp ftp garrettcom com Rel3 MNS 6K Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Qax B LP search f Folders y Address E3 ftp ftp garrettcom com Rel3 MNS 6K Size Type Modified Folder Tasks File Folder 8 27 2004 7 49 PM d 2 51 MB BIN File 9 3 2004 6 02 PM ti Rename this item GS Move this item Copy this item
319. rompted Reboot Y N Select Y the prompt is then Save Current Configuration You must select No Along with the ftp command listed below MNS 6K also supports normal ftp as well as passive ftp Passive FTP is used by many companies today to work with firewall policies and other security policies set by companies The commands for setting the type of ftp are Syntax set ftp mode lt normal passive gt set the fip mode of operation Syntax show ftp display the current fip operation mode With MNS 6K additional capabilities have been added to save and load configurations The commands are Syntax ftp lt get put list del gt type lt app config oldconf script hosts log gt host lt hostname gt ip lt ipaddress gt file lt filename gt user lt user gt pass lt password gt upload and download information using fip command Where lt get put list del gt different ftp operations type lt app config oldconf script hosts log gt optional type field This is useful to specify whether a log file or host file is uploaded or downloaded This can also perform the task of exporting a configuration file or uploading a new image to the switch host lt hostname gt ip lt ipaddress gt file lt filename gt user lt user gt pass lt password gt parameters associated with ftp server for proper communications with the server Syntax tftp lt get put gt ty
320. rs for authenticating PCs or supplicants port mandatory ports to be configured quiet optional This is the quiet period the amount of time in seconds the supplicant is held after an authentication failure before the authenticator retries the supplicant for connection The default value is 60 seconds Values can range from 0 to 65535 seconds maxreauth optional The number of re authentication attempts that are permitted before the port becomes unauthorized Default value is 2 Values are integers and can range from 0 to 10 transmit optional This is the transmit period this is the time in seconds the authenticator waits to transmit another request for identification from the supplicant Default value is 30 Values can be from 1 to 65535 seconds Syntax reauth port lt num list range gt status lt enable disable gt period lt 10 86400 gt set values on how the authenticator Magnum 6K switch does the re authentication with the supplicant or PG port mandatory ports to be configured status optional This enables disables re authentication period optional this is the re authentication period in seconds This is the time the authenticator waits before a re authentication process will be done again to the supplicant Default value is 3600 seconds 1 hour Values can range from 10 to 86400 seconds Syntax show stats port lt num gt displays 802 1 related statistics Syntax trigger reauth
321. rt lt num list range gt lt none disable drop gt action to perform in case of breach of port security add event lt event id list range all gt enables alarm action in response to the specified event ID add id lt 1 5 gt email lt email addr gt traps lt all none S R E gt events lt all none I A C F D gt ip lt ip addr gt port lt 1 65535 gt setup email id for receiving SNMP trap information by email add id lt vlan Id gt name lt vlan name gt port lt number list range gt forbid lt number list range gt lt mgt nomegt gt adding VLAN add user lt name gt level lt number gt adding a user 278 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES Command add port lt number list range gt priority lt 0 65535 gt MNS 6K USER GUIDE Description add the specified list of ports to form the logical LACP trunk Default value for priority is 32768 The lower the value assigned to priority the higher the priority The port with the highest priority is the primary port over which certain types of traffic like IGMP is transmitted Requires the lacp command module alarm enter the alarm configuration mode alarm lt enable disable gt Llobally enables or disables the alarm action alarm def owner lt string gt def define the RMON alarm group and the comm lt string gt community string associated with the group allow ip lt ipaddress g
322. rt VLAN tagged VLAN or no VLAN 2 IGMP is disabled as a default A switch with IGMP snooping has the behavior similar to a regular switch default IGMP behavior i e it forwards the multicast stream packets to all the ports Now if a device on any of the ports sends a join report or invokes the IGMP Pruning action the behavior changes A multicast group is formed in the switch and the stream is sent only to those ports that actually want to join the stream The default behavior of multicasting streams to all ports could create problems when there are a number of multicast streams that enter the switch though a number of different ports Each stream goes to ALL OTHER ports and creates congestion in the switch The mcast command described below controls this default behavior The default setting is enable If it is set to disable the default behavior is modified so that the stream is not transmitted or multicast to any of the ports until a device joins the stream from that port IGMP L2 IGMP requires a Layer 3 device in the network What happens if your network has only Layer 2 devices Can the Layer 2 devices take advantage of the IGMP technology and reduce the overall traffic in the network without requiring the presence of a Layer 3 device in the network Using GarrettCom IGMP L2 patent pending technology it is possible to do that The benefits of IGMP are clear The traditional ways of building an IGMP network calls fo
323. s Magnum6K25 FIGURE 27 System parameters using the show sysconfig command Most parameters here can be changed System variables can be changed Below is a list of system variables which GarrettCom recommends changing System Name Using a unique name helps you to identify individual devices in a network System Contact and System Information This is helpful for identifying the administrator responsible for the switch and for identifying the locations of individual switches To set these variables change the mode to be SNMP configuration mode from the manager mode Syntax snmp Syntax setvar sysname syscontact syslocation lt string gt where string is a character string maximum 24 characters long Magnum6K25 snmp Magnum6K25 snmp setvar setvar Configures system name contact or location Usage setvar sysname syscontact syslocation lt string gt Magnum6K25 snmp setvar syslocation Fremont System variable s set successfully Magnum6K25 snmp exit Magnum6K25 FIGURE 28 Setting the system name system location and system contact information 42 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Date and time It may be necessary to set the day time or the time zone manually This can be done by using the set command with the necessary date and time options These are listed below Syntax set timezone GMT or hour lt 0 14 gt min lt 0 59 gt Syntax set date yeat lt 2001 2035 gt
324. s Bridges seses RE LQG Cone LAC Pan niceniinaniie ls hae oan anodes RE 107 The network for the show lagp command listed Delo reverscecssverecerssverecssesveresssssens RE 108 LACP information over a netWworR RE 109 ToS and DSC Parapienenannenenanan RE 110 IP Precedence ToS Field in an IP Packet Hecuder RE 111 Port weight settings and the meaning of the setting cscssscsssserscssssserssssssereessssseeesssnens RE 112 QoS configuration and etup RE 113 IGMP concepts advantages of using ICMP RE 114 IGMP concepts Isolating multicast traffic in a NELWOTR ossessi RE 115 In a Layer 2 network an IGMP multicast traffic goes to all the nodes In the figure T1 a surveillance camera using multicast will send the traffic to all the nodes R1 XV 176 176 Raley les 178 178 180 181 188 through R6 irrespective of whether they want to view the surveillance traffic or not The traffic is compounded when additional cameras are added to the network End result is that users R1 through R6 see the network as heavily loaded and simple day to day operations ay aphear sinon shassii sti acne els cease Pada ees pA NN FIGURE 116 Using IGMP L2 on Magnum 6K family of switches a Layer 2 network can minimize multicast traffic as shown above Each switch has the IGMPL2 turned on Each switch can exchange the IGMP query message and respond properly R4 wants to view
325. s also known In the example below let us assume that the IP address of the TFIP server is 192 168 10 99 that the server can ping the switch and the switch can ping the server Intentionally left blank for image continuity image shown on next page 316 UPDATING SOFTWARE STEP 3 Magnum6K25 show version Version 2 6 0 Build Date Jan 29 2004 Time 12 02 32 Magnum6K25 upgrade mode tftp 192 168 10 99 file Rel3 0 bin Do you wish to upgrade the image V or N Y Upgrade is Successful Please reboot Magnum 6Kxx to start the application Magnum6K25 reboot Proceed on rebooting the switch Y or N Y Do you wish to save current configuration Y or N Y The switch will now reboot Reconnect and login Verify the MNS 6K software was upgraded Note as discussed in step 1 the switch may need a boot code update After a reboot the switch awaits a Y or IN on whether the boot code should be updated If no answer is given the default is not to update the boot code or a N Since this connection is over the network the question will not be visible and the boot code will not be automatically updated See_step 4 updating boot code over the network on how to update the boot code manually Magnum6K25 show version MNS 6K Ver 3 4 Date Mar 31 2006 Time 17 06 23 Build ID 1143853580 FIGURE 156 Dialog for upgrading the image using tfip This will load the Rel3 0 bin file from the TFTP server
326. s sssssesssssssessesresresreresresresrererrrenessrsresee 171 Configuring Dual Homing s sssssesseessereesesresresresrerresreseseereere 171 List of commands in this chapter ssssesssesessesresrrererreresee 173 14 Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP 174 TA CB 6 a A N 174 LAGP CoofpuriH onas nara a aaa 175 List of commands in this Chapter sessessseesseererrrererrerese 185 15 Quality OF Secyieee 186 E Cone N ete 186 PUTS CEVA QoS rena e e aar a aeaa 187 Phr c edengneeee an a e A 188 Confiruino QOS eaea e a Guana R i 189 List of commands in this chapter ssssssssesessesrerrrerereeresen 193 16 STG MP vosnvntas scistswsselesnsnsosuladesdsnvanesvatdsdeseees senses desdssagesees 195 IGMP sO CS a oats ol nc a ode a nna Set notre 195 DG IVA scale ata EE TAE 199 Gon Procite cc dads Duntc atv tee onaclachs 202 List of commands in this Chapter sc ccnsiccaitssscscssaseentas 207 DAY RP e E 209 E IE Soles A E 209 GVRP Operation Senrossencserennereireii iiini i 210 Configurine GW P satirist u eii a E IA 215 GVRP Operations INOtES assent aint nar detehatiitwo an 216 List of commands in this Chapter sissies cpciteasvcnieonds tentndes 217 1S SNM Pare enia 218 218 Trap Seear da tesa 220 St ndafd Snpra a 220 Con Gains SNMP sss hutedat aiiin a 221 Confisutine RMON sexiest itteees acacaernns a acm nitanres 230 List of commands in this Chapter waiincvasciisen ceva wists 231 19 Miscellaneous Commands
327. s the time period in seconds on which the switch sends general host query messages Querier Response Interval specifies maximum amount of time in seconds that can elapse between when the querier sends a host query message and when it receives a response from a host 203 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Syntax show group shows the multicast groups Magnum6K25 igmp show group Grouplp PortNo Timer LeavePending 2241 01 15 0 224 0 1 40 9 155 0 Magnum6K25 igmp FIGURE 118 Displaying IGMP groups The output of the show group command displays Group IP column shows the multicast groups Port No shows the port where the multicast group is being detected Timer shows the amount of time left in seconds before the group port will be deleted or will not be able to route multicast traffic if the switch does not receive a membership report Leave Pending column shows the number of leave messages received from this port Every port can be individually set to three different IGMP modes Auto Block and Forward e Auto lets IGMP control whether the port should or should not participate sending multicast traffic e Block manually configures the port to always block multicast traffic e Forward manually configures the port to always forward multicast traffic To set the port characteristics use the set port in the IGMP configuration command mode Syntax set port port lt port list r
328. seconds Root Bridge Max Age indicates the designated root bridge s maximum age after which it discards the information as being old and receives new updates Topology Change count since the last reboot the number of times the topology has changed Use this in conjunction with show uptime to find the frequency of the topology changes Time Since topology Change number of seconds since the last topology change Magnum6K25 rstp show stp ports RSTP Port Configuration Port Type Priority Path Cost State Des Bridge Des Port 09 TP 10 100 128 2000000 Forwarding 00 00 00 20 06 25 ed 89 00 09 10 TP 10 100 128 2000000 Disabled 00 0a 11 Le a 128 2000000 Disabled 00 0b 12 TP 10 100 128 2000000 Disabled 00 0c 13 TP 10 100 128 200000 Forwarding 00 00 00 20 06 25 ed 89 00 0d 14 TP 10 100 128 2000000 Disabled 00 0e 15 TP 10 100 128 2000000 Disabled 00 0f 16 TP 10 100 128 2000000 Disabled 00 10 Magnum6K25 rstp FIGURE 80 Reviewing the RSTP port parameters The variables listed by the show stp config command are Port indicates the port number Value ranges from 01 to max number of ports in the switch Type indicates the type of port TP indicates Twisted Pair Priority STP uses this to determine which ports are used for forwarding Lower the number means higher priority Value ranges from 0 to 255 Default is 128 Path Cost This is the assigned port cost value used for the switch to determine
329. sed 2 There are number of public NTP servers Search on the internet using NTP Servers yields the necessary server IP addresses 44 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Magnum6K25 sntp Magnum6K25 sntp setsntp server 204 65 129 201 timeout 3 retry 3 SNTP server is added to SNTP server database Magnum6K25 sntp sync hour 5 Do not forget to enable sntp for time synchronization Magnum6K25 sntp sntp enable SNTP is already enabled Magnum6K25 snip exit Magnum6K25 sntp FIGURE 31 Setting up SNTP services Saving and loading configuration After configuration changes are made all the changes are automatically registered but not saved i e the effect of the change is immediate however if power fails the changes are not saved and restored unless the changed are saved using the save command It is also a good practice to save the configuration on another server on the network using the tftp or ftp protocols Once the configuration is saved the saved configuration can be loaded to restore back the settings At this time the configuration parameter saved or loaded are not in a human readable format The commands for saving and loading configurations on the network are Syntax saveconf mode lt serial tftp ftp gt lt ipaddress gt file lt name gt Syntax loadconf mode lt serial tftp ftp gt lt ipaddress gt file lt name gt Make sure the machine specified by the IP a
330. ser If this option is not defined the global default SMTP server is used port optional TCP port of the SMTP server If this is not defined the global default TCP port is used Syntax delete id lt 1 5 gt delete the specific id specified The deleted id no longer receives the traps via email The id is added using the add command Syntax sendmail server lt ip addr gt to lt email addr gt from lt email addr gt subject lt string gt body lt string gt customize and also to send a test email to check SMTP settings the email sent out by specifying the email subject field server address to field and the body of the text See example fo the body of the text message later in this chapter server mandatory SMTP server IP v4 address to mandatory the recipient email address from mandatory the sender email address subject mandatory email subject or title body mandatory email body Syntax server ip lt ip addr gt port lt 1 65535 gt retry lt 0 3 gt configure the global SMTP server settings ip mandatory SMTP server IP address port mandatory TCP port to be used for SMTP communications default is 25 241 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE retry optional specifies how many times to retry if an error occurs when sending email Range from 0 to 3 Default is 0 Syntax smtp lt enable disable gt enables or disables SMTP to send SNMP alerts by email
331. set vlan type lt port tag none gt defines the VLAN type Syntax configure vlan type port enter the VLAN configuration commands Syntax vlan type port enter the VLAN configuration commands Syntax add id lt vlan Id gt name lt vlan name gt port lt number list range gt forbid lt number list range gt lt mgt nomegt gt adding VLAN Syntax edit id lt vlan id gt name lt vlan name gt port lt number list range gt lt mgt nomegt gt edit existing VLAN name Syntax start vVlan lt name number list range gt activate the VLAN configuration Syntax save save the configuration including the VLAN configuration Syntax show vlan type lt port tag gt lt id vlanid gt display specific VLAN information Syntax set pott port lt number list range gt default id lt number gt sets the default VLAN id For Magnum 6K family of switches the default VLAN id is 1 unless changed using this command Syntax set port port lt number list range gt filter status lt enable disable gt enables or disables the VLAN filtering function Syntax set port port lt number list range gt tagging id lt number gt status lt tagged untagged gt defines whether the outgoing packets from a port will be tagged or untagged Syntax set port port lt number list range gt join id lt number gt adds the specified port s to the specified VLAN id Syntax set port port lt number list range gt leave id lt number gt releases a sp
332. signed to 192 168 1 2 with a netmask of 255 255 255 0 25 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Should a situation arise when there are multiple new switches powered up at the same time there could be a situation of duplicate IP addresses In this situation only one Magnum switch will be assigned the IP address of 192 168 1 2 and netmask of 255 255 255 0 The other switches will not be assigned an IP address till the static IP address of 192 168 1 2 is freed up or reassigned To change the IP address please ensure that the IP address to be assigned to the switch is known or contact your system network administrator to get the IP address information Follow the steps listed below to configure the IP address manually e Ensure the power is off e Follow the steps described above for connecting the console cable and setting the console software e Power on the switch e Once the login prompt appears login as manager using default password manager e Configure the IP address network mask and default gateway as per the IP addressing scheme for your network e Set the Manager Password recommended tefer to next section e Save the settings without saving the changes made will be lost e Power off the switch or a software reboot as discussed below e Power on the switch login with the new login name and password e From the PC or from the switch ping the IP address specified for the switch to ensure connectivity e From the switc
333. signify whether the packet is encrypted e Session ID The ID for this TACACS session e Length The total length of the TACACS packet body not including the header Configuring TACACS CLI commands to configure TACACS are 89 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Syntax show tacplus lt status servers gt show status of TACACS or servers configured as TACACS Servers Syntax tacplus lt enable disable gt order lt tac local local tac gt enable or disable TACACS authentication specifying the order in which the server or local database is looked up where tac local implies first the LACAS server then local logins on the device Default order is Local then TACACS server Syntax tacsetver lt add delete gt id lt num gt ip lt ip addr gt port lt tcp port gt encrypt lt enable disable gt key lt string gt mgrlevel lt level gt oprlevel lt level gt adds a list of up to five TACACS servers where lt add delete gt mandatory adds or delete a TACACS server id lt num gt mandatory the order in which the TACACS servers should be polled for authenticaton ip lt ip addr gt mandatory for add the IP address of the TACACS server port lt tcp port gt optional for add TCP port number on which the server is listening encrypt lt enable disable gt optional for add enable or disable packet encryption key lt string gt optional for add mandator
334. sparently and propagates the VLAN information along 105 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE In the tag VLAN an identifier called the VLAN identifier VID is either inserted or manipulated This manipulated VLAN tag allows VLAN information to be propagated across devices or switches allowing VLAN information to span multiple switches As described earlier VLAN is an administratively configured LAN or broadcast domain Instead of going to the wiring closet to move a cable to a different LAN segment the same task can be accomplished remotely by configuring a port on an 802 1Q compliant switch to belong to a different VLAN The ability to move end stations to different broadcast domains by setting membership profiles for each port on centrally managed switches is one of the main advantages of 802 1Q VLANs 802 1Q VLANs aren t limited to one switch VLANs can span many switches Sharing VLANs between switches is achieved by inserting a tag with a VLAN identifier VID into each frame A VID must be assigned for each VLAN By assigning the same VID to VLANs on many switches one or more VLAN broadcast domain can be extended across a large network 802 1Q compliant switch ports such as those on the Magnum 6K family of switches can be configured to transmit tagged or untagged frames A tag field containing VLAN information can be inserted into an Ethernet frame If a port has an 802 1Q compliant device attached such as another switch
335. ss will be detected faster than the two second interval at which the BPDU packets are successfully passed around the ring Typical ring recovery times using S Ring software and mP62 edge switches with the LLL feature enabled on the ring ports is less than 250 milliseconds even with 50 or more Magnum 6K family of switches in a ring structure Without LLL activation the Magnum 6K family of switches address buffer aging time 5 minutes default could be the gating factor in ring recovery time LLL is used on S Ring and helps speed up the ring recovery time S Ring operates from specifically defined port pairs that participate in a ring topology Multiple rings of different pairs on the same switch are also supported however intersecting rings or a ring of rings or overlapping rings is not supported in the current version While S Ring builds upon the foundation of RSTP ot STP S Ring offers an additional topology option to network architects The two ends of a ring must be connected to two ports in a Magnum 6K Switch that is enabled with the S Ring software The end points of the ring provide an alternate path to reach the switch that has failed The in out pairs of the ports to other devices in the ring have to be enabled with LLL Some items to be aware of with S Ring are as follows 150 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE 1 The S Ring feature is a separately licensed module for the MNS 6K software package This module must be e
336. ssesisssissrisrisrisrereeerresrresrreseresee 25 RE 3 Setting IP address on the switch sssssssssssesseserssrsrrsrissesessessersreserssessrestestenesteseeseessreseesrese 26 RE EN TR IESU arrr tens E A AOR Ea A E O E ER 27 RE 5 Viewing the basic setup parameters You can use show setup or show sysconfig to Diew SOLA D paramietir i ainina suisse a E a 27 RE 6 Switching users and privilege levels Note the prompt changes with the new privilege VEERE ENEE 28 RE 7 Adding a user with Manager level privilege 29 RES gt Deleng inse sar a a 29 RED Changing the password for a specifie uer 29 RE 10 Changing the privilege levels for a uer 30 RE 11 Creating user access privileges aaninenineninininan iiien nii aa 30 R 12 Hep tommand Re RE TOC OP OT EERE is PETE aisa 31 RE 13 Fep fora speape tommand orien a ia 31 RE 14 Options for the show command ssssssssisssessesieriseriserissrrssressresseesreesrresrresrresteseeeseeeneesreess 32 RE 15 Listing commands available at the operator level 32 RE 16 Listing commands starting with a specific Chav acter assesses 32 RE 17 Listing commands options note the command was not completed and the TAB key completed the command nisi civacikcatad cain nbeahicensied bniubca rani i iia ai ias 33 RE 1B 900 UE COIL see a a aaa eda aA a a Aa aaa aa Aasaa OSTR 33 REL Checkino the TP e ee A e E aea AE iiit 36 RE 20 Changing the boot mode of the qwitch 38 RE 21
337. stp gt Note it is always a good idea to check which mode of STP Current Active Mode RSTP as active If the proper mode is not active the configuration RSTP is Disabled command stp will not be understood To set the proper mode use the set stp command Magnum6K25 stp ERROR Invalid Command Magnum6K25 set stp type stp STP Mode set to STP Magnum6K25 stp Magnum6K25 stp stp enable Successfully set the STP status Magnum6K25 stp show stp config 127 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE STP CONFIGURATION Spanning Tree Enabled Global YES Spanning Tree Enabled Ports YES 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Protocol Normal STP Bridge ID 80 00 00 20 06 25 ed 80 Bridge Priority 32768 Bridge Forward Delay 15 Bridge Hello Time 2 Bridge Max Age 20 Root Port 0 Root Path Cost 0 Designated Root 80 00 00 20 06 25 ed 80 Designated Root Priority 32768 Root Bridge Forward Delay 15 Root Bridge Hello Time 2 Root Bridge Max Age 20 RSTP CONFIGURATION Rapid STP STP Enabled Global NO Magnum6K25 stp show stp ports STP Port Configuration Forwarding 80 00 00 20 06 25 ed 80 Disabled 80 00 00 20 06 25 ed 80 Disabled 80 00 00 20 06 25 ed 80 Disabled 80 00 00 20 06 25 ed 80 Forwarding 80 00 00 20 06 25 ed 80 Disabled 80 00 00 20 06 25 ed 80 Disabled 80 00 00 20 06 25 ed 80 Disabled 80 00 00 20 06 25 ed 80 Magnum6K25 stp FIGURE 77 Enabling STP Syntax prior
338. surveillance traffic from T1 As shown by 1 a join request is sent by R4 Once the Join report information is exchanged only R4 receives the video surveillance traffic as shown by 2 No other device on the network gets the video surveillance traffic unless they UE gon regnest aswel aiamiona ana FIGURE 117 Enabling IGMP and query the status of ICCV FIGURE 118 Displaying IGMP groups FIGURE 119 Conprarn JJ a ulema aaa aa FIGURE 120 Serine IGMP 2 iea eaa a n S a i Era FIGURE 121 GVRP operation see description below FIGURE 122 VLAN Assignment in GVRP enabled switches Non GVRP enabled switches can impact VLAN settings on other GVRP enabled gwitohe FIGURE 123 Port settings for GVRP operations ssssssssssssssesessisresessessesssessessensensensresensenseessesenseesees FIGURE 124 Command to check for dynamically assigned VLANS ssssssesssesssesisssrsssiesrieserererereerees FIGURE 125 Converting a dynamic VLAN to a statie VIMN FIGURE 126 GVRP options asaan a a FIGURE 127 GVRP configuration example FIGURE 128 Configuring SNMP most of the command here are SNMP v3 commands cuss FIGURE 129 Confiture RMON hOB eeeeee a a e a a A FIGURE 130 Predefined conditions for the relay sssssssssesssessserissrissrisressersseesrresrresrresreeseesseenresnreseresee FIGURE 131 Setting up the external electrical relay and alettos FIGURE 132 setting SMTP to receive SNMP trap inf
339. t Port Status Control Initialize Current State 1 Enabled Auto Deasserted Authorized 2 Enabled ForcedAuth Asserted Unauthorized Port 2 is where 3 Enabled Auto Deasserted Authorized RADIUS server 4 Enabled Auto Deasserted Unauthorized is connected 5 Enabled Auto Deasserted Unauthorized 6 Enabled Auto Deasserted Unauthorized 7 Enabled Auto Deasserted Unauthorized 8 Enabled Auto Deasserted Unauthorized 9 Enabled Auto Deasserted Unauthorized 10 Enabled Auto Deasserted Unauthorized 11 Enabled Auto Deasserted Unauthorized 12 Enabled Auto Deasserted Unauthorized 13 Enabled Auto Deasserted Unauthorized 14 Enabled Auto Deasserted Unauthorized 15 Enabled Auto Deasserted Unauthorized 16 Enabled Auto Deasserted Unauthorized Command included for completeness validate the RADIUS server settings Magnum6K25 auth backend port 2 supptimeout 45 servertimeout 60 maxreq 5 Successfully set backend server authentication parameter s Backend command is used for setting characteristics of the timeouts and number of requests before access is denied 82 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Magnum6K25 auth show port backend Port Supp Timeout Server Timeout Max Request sec sec 1 30 30 2 2 45 60 5 The authenticator waits for the 3 30 30 2 supplicant to respond back for 45 4 30 30 2 seconds the authenticator waits for 5 30 30 2 60 seconds for the backend 6 30 30 2 RADIUS server to respond b
340. t mask lt netmask gt service lt name list gt allow specific IP address or range of addresses as a trusted host s allow mac lt address list range gt port lt num list range gt specify a specific MAC address or MAC address list auth configuration mode to configure the S02 1x parameters auth lt enable disable gt enables or disables the 802 1 authenticator function on MNS 6K switch authorize lt module gt key lt security key gt activate the S Ring capabilities Don t forget to use the save command to save the Rey authsertver ip lt ip addr gt udp lt num gt secret lt string gt define the RADIUS server authtraps lt enable disable gt enables or disables authentication traps generation backend port lt num list range gt supptimeout lt 1 240 gt servertimeout lt 1 240 gt maxreq lt 1 10 gt configure parameters for EAP over RADIUS backpressure rxthreshold lt value gt configure backpressure buffers broadcast protect lt enable disable gt protect switch from broadcast storms chlevel user lt name gt level lt number gt changing the user privilege level 279 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES Command clear lt history log 1 5 informational activity critical fatal debug terminal arp portstats addr MNS 6K USER GUIDE Description clear command to clear various aspects of the MN
341. t importantly there is a growing shortage of IPv4 addresses which are needed by all new machines added to the Internet IPv6 fixes a number of problems in IPv4 such as the limited number of available IPv4 addresses It also adds many improvements to IPv4 in areas such as routing and network auto configuration IPv6 is expected to gradually replace IPv4 with the two coexisting for a number of years during a transition period What s changed in IPV6 The changes from IPv4 to IPv6 fall primarily into the following categories Expanded Routing and Addressing Capabilities IPv6 increases the IP address size from 32 bits to 128 bits to support more levels of addressing hierarchy and a much greater number of addressable nodes and simpler auto configuration of addresses The scalability of multicast routing is improved by adding a scope field to multicast addresses A new type of address called a anycast address is defined to identify sets of nodes where a packet sent to an anycast address is delivered to one of the nodes The use of anycast addresses in the IPv6 source route allows nodes to control the path which their traffic flows Header Format Simplification Some IPv4 header fields have been dropped or made optional to reduce the common case processing cost of packet handling and to keep the bandwidth cost of the IPv6 header as low as possible despite the increased size of the addresses Even though the IPv6 addresses are four t
342. t of the SNMP commands where is that specified or both 66 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Note 1 There is a limitation of 200 MAC addresses per port and 500 MAC addresses per Switch for Port Security Note 2 All the commands listed above have to be executed under the port security configuration mode Syntax Clear lt history log 1 5 informational activity critical fatal debug terminal arp portstats addr char command to clear various aspects of the MNS 6K information most notably clear addr clears the addresses learnt Let s look at a few examples Magnum6K25 port security allow mac 00 c1 00 7f ec 00 00 60 b0 88 9e 00 port 18 FIGURE 46 Port security allowing specific MAC addresses on a specified port No spaces between specified MAC addresses Magnum6K25 port security action port 9 10 none Magnum6K25 port security learn port 9 10 enable FIGURE 47 Port security the port learns the MAC addresses Note a maximum of 200 MAC addresses can be learnt per port and a maximum of 500 per switch Also the action on the port must be set to none before the port learns the MAC address information Magnum6K25 port security ps enable Port Security is already enabled Magnum6K25 port security ps disable Port Security Disabled Magnum6K25 port security ps enable Port Security Enabled FIGURE 48 Enabling and disa
343. t vendors LLL triggers action on the device supporting LLL when a connection is broken or there is loss of the link signal on a ring port LLL can be used with S Ring on managed switches such as the GarrettCom Magnum 6K family of switches LLL can also be used on managed switches such as Magnum 6K family of switches Magnum mP62 as well as on unmanaged switches such as ESD42 switches Note that LLL can also be used with non ring topologies such as mesh topologies using RSTP or STP where it does the necessary actions for fault recovery such as re learn addresses in case of a link failure S Ring is a ring technology using the GarrettCom MNS 6K software In a S Ring a switch is designated as a Ring Manager Devices in a S Ring can be managed switches such as the Magnum 6K family of switches other managed switches such as Magnum mP62 or unmanaged switches such as ESD42 or even hubs which leverages LLL S Ring is a licensed product from GarrettCom Inc GarrettCom Inc also licenses this technology to other companies who are interested in implementing the resiliency capabilities offered by S Ring RS Ring provides superior recovery times from failures It works when 149 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE e The ring is made up of devices which are managed switches only from Magnum 6K family of switches e Each of the switches in the ring topology are configured for RSTP e The RS Ring product license key is configured on each switch
344. tats port lt num gt displays 802 1x related statistics Syntax trigger reauth port lt num list range gt manually initiate a re authentication of supplicant 86 Chapter 7 Access Using TACACS Using a TACACS server to authenticate access access control for routers network access servers and other networked computing devices via one or more centralized servers TACACS provides separate authentication authorization and accounting services T ACACS short for Terminal Access Controller Access Control System protocol provides TACACS flavors and history TACACS allows a client to accept a username and password and send a query to a TACACS authentication server sometimes called a TACACS daemon server or simply TACACSD This server was normally a program running on a host The host would determine whether to accept or deny the request and sent a response back The TACACS protocol is the latest generation of TACACS TACACS is a simple UDP based access control protocol originally developed by BBN for the MILNET Military Network Cisco s enhancements to TACACS are called XTACACS XTACACS is now replaced by TACACS TACACS is a TCP based access control protocol TCP offers a reliable connection oriented transport while UDP offers best effort delivery TACACS improves on TACACS and XTACACS by separating the functions of authentication authorization and accounting and by encrypting all traffic between the Network
345. tax set port port lt port list range gt mode lt auto forward block gt set the port characteristics Block drops the unregistered mutticasts Forward forwards unregistered multicasts Syntax show potrt display the port characteristics for IGMP Syntax show touter displays detected IGMP enabled router ports Syntax set leave lt enable disable gt enables or disables the switch to immediately process a host sending a leave message rather that wait for the timer to expire Syntax set querier lt enable disable gt enables or disables a switch as IGMP querier Syntax set qi interval lt value gt The IGMP querier router periodically sends general host query messages These messages are sent to ask for group membership information This is sent to the all system multicast group address 224 0 0 1 The default value is 125 seconds The valid range can be from 60 to 127 seconds Syntax set qri interval lt value gt The query response interval is the maximum amount of time that can elapse between when the querier router sends a host query message and when it receives a response from a host The Default value is 10 seconds The Range can be from 2 to 270 seconds Restrictions apply to the maximum value because of an internal calculation that is dependent on the value of the Query Interval 208 Chapter 17 GVRP Generic Attribute Registration Protocol GARP VLAN Registration Protocol GV RP called GVRP GVRP is def
346. ted to be considered in most networks Redundancy at the edge of the network is greatly simplified by the using dual homing D esigning and implementing high availability Ethernet LAN topologies in Dual Homing concepts In Ethernet LANs dual homing is a network topology that adds reliability by allowing a device to be connected to the network by way of two independent connection points points of attachment One connection point is the operating connection and the other is a standby or back up connection that is activated in the event of a failure of the operating connection A dual homing switch such as EDS42 offers two attachments into the network or two independent media paths and two upstream switch connections In the case of the Magnum 6K family of switches any two ports can be defined as dual home ports to provide this level of redundancy Loss of the Link signal on the operating port connected upstream indicates a fault in that path and traffic is quickly moved to the standby connection to accomplish a fault recovery 168 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Active link Standby Link FIGURE 93 Dual homing using ESD42 switch and Magnum 6K family of switches In case of a connectivity break the connection switches to the standby path or standby link In those situations where the end device is a PoE device for example a video surveillance camera as shown above a Magnum 6K switch with MNS 6K can pro
347. ter the ports are defined e Dual homing ports can span different modules in a switch 6 If dual homing is not configured there is a potential a loop can be created and either STP or RSTP will setup the port in the active stand by mode Dual homing may not work if one of the dual homed port is in active standby To avoid that situation it is recommended to configure dual homing first 170 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Dual Homing Modes There are two modes in which the dual homing works The first one is where the ports are equivalent i e if one port fails the other one take over however if the first failed port recovers the active port does not switch back The second mode of operation is primary secondary mode In this mode of operation the primary port is explicitly defined and the secondary port is explicitly defined In the primary secondary mode of operation if the primary fails the secondary takes over When the primary recovers the secondary switches back from active state to passive state and the primary port is now the active port The primary secondary mode has to be explicitly setup The primary secondary mode of operation is only possible on managed switches such as the Magnum 6K family of switches The primary secondary mode of operation allows the network manager to determine on which path the packets will flow as a default Configuring Dual Homing The following commands are used for configu
348. the destination group or in the same order relative to other datagram The membership of a host group is dynamic that is hosts may join and leave groups at any time There is no restriction on the location or number of members in a host group but membership in a group may be restricted to only those hosts possessing a private access key A host may be a member of more than one group at a time A host need not be a member of a group to send datagram to it A host group may be permanent or transient A permanent group has a well known administratively assigned IP address It is the address and not the membership of the group that is permanent at any time a permanent group may have any number of members even zero A transient group on the other hand is assigned an address dynamically when the group is created at the request of a host A transient group ceases to exist and its address becomes eligible for reassignment when its membership drops to zero 8 Most of the concepts are extracted from RFC 1112 and it is recommended that RFC 1112 be read and understood carefully if IGMP is used or planned for the network 195 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE The creation of transient groups and the maintenance of group membership information is the responsibility of multicast agents entities that reside in internet gateways or other special purpose hosts There is at least one multicast agent directly attached to every IP network or sub
349. the forwarding points Values range from 1 to 2000000 Lower the value lower the cost and hence the preferred route The costs for different Ethernet speeds are shown below The Path cost in STP is compared to the path cost in RSTP 140 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Port Type STP Path cost RSTP Path cost 10 Mbps 100 2 000 000 100 Mbps 19 200 000 1 Gbps 4 20 000 10 Gbps 2 2 000 Figure 81 Path cost as defined in IEEE 802 1d STP and 802 1w RSTP State indicates the STP state of individual ports Values can be Listening Learning Forwarding Blocking and Disabled Des Bridge this is the port s designated root bridge Des Port this is the port s designated root port Another screen capture of the same command from a larger network with several switches is shown below Magnum6K25 show stp ports RSTP Port Configuration TP 10 100 2000000 Disabled TP 10 100 128 2000000 Disabled 128 2000000 Disabled aia 128 2000000 Disabled TP 10 100 128 2000000 Disabled TP 10 100 128 200000 Forwarding 80 00 00 20 06 30 00 01 TP 10 100 128 200000 Discarding 80 00 00 20 06 2b 0f e1 TP 10 100 128 2000000 Disabled Gigabit 128 20000 Forwarding 80 00 00 20 06 2b 0f e1 Gigabit 128 20000 Forwarding 80 00 00 20 06 30 00 01 Magnum6K25 FIGURE 82 RSTP information from a network with multiple switches Note the show stp ports command can be executed from the manager level prompt
350. these tagged frames can carry VLAN membership information between switches thus letting a VLAN span multiple switches Normally connections between switches can carry multiple VLAN information and this is call port trunking or 802 1Q trunks There is one important caveat administrators must ensure ports with non 802 1Q compliant devices attached are configured to transmit untagged frames Many network interface cards such as those for PCs printers and other dumb switches are not 802 1Q compliant If they receive a tagged frame they will not understand the VLAN tag and will drop the frame In situations like these its best to use port based VLANs for connecting to these devices Sometimes a port may want to listen to broadcasts across different VLANs or propagate the VLAN information on to other ports This port must thus belong to multiple VLANs so that the broadcast information reaches the port accurately If the port also wants to send broadcast traffic the proper egress sending out of information and ingress receiving information has to be configured on the Magnum 6K family of switches In Tag based VLAN this is similar but only if the port is tagged for each VLAN Private VLANS Private VLANs are VLANs which are private to a given switch in a network For Magnum 6K family of switches the Private VLANs are usually restricted to a single switch Private VLANs are implemented on Magnum 6K family of switches using Port based VLAN See t
351. ticast group receiving multicast data from the video server PC X Switch 2 then sends the multicast data only to the port for PC 4 thus avoiding unwanted multicast traffic on the ports for PCs 5 and 6 197 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE The next figure below shows a network running IP multicasting using IGMP without a multicast router In this case the IGMP configured switch runs as a querier PCs 2 5 and 6 are members of the same IP multicast group IGMP is configured on switches 3 and 4 Either of these switches can operate as querier because a multicast router is not present on the network If an IGMP switch does not detect a querier it automatically assumes this role assuming the querier feature is enabled the default within IGMP Switch 1 Running Here IGMP IS Running Here Multicast i Data Stream IGMP IS Running Here FIGURE 114 IGMP concepts Isolating multicast traffic in a network e In the above figure the multicast group traffic does not go to switch 1 and beyond This is because either the port on switch 3 that connects to switch 1 has been configured as blocked or there are no hosts connected to switch 1 or switch 2 that belong to the multicast group e For PC 1 to become a member of the same multicast group without flooding IP multicast traffic on all ports of switches 1 and 2 IGMP must be configured on both switches 1 and 2 and the port on switch 3 that connects to switc
352. tion settings In the example below the broadcast protection is turned on The threshold for port 11 is then set to a lower value of 3500 broadcast frames second Magnum6K25 device Magnum6K25 device show broadcast protect 9 Disabled 19531 0 NO 10 Disabled 19531 0 NO 11 Disabled 19531 0 NO 12 Disabled 19531 0 NO 13 Disabled 19531 0 NO 14 Disabled 19531 0 NO 15 Disabled 19531 0 NO 16 Disabled 19531 0 NO Magnum6K25 device broadcast protect enab Broadcast Storm Protection enabled e Magnum6K25 device show broadcast protect 15 Enabled 19531 100 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE 16 Enabled 19531 0 NO Magnum6K25 device rate threshold port 11 rate 3500 Broadcast Rate Threshold set Magnum6K25 device show broadcast protect 9 Enabled 19531 0 NO 10 Enabled 19531 0 NO 11 Enabled 3500 0 NO 12 Enabled 19531 0 NO 13 Enabled 19531 0 NO 14 Enabled 19531 0 NO 15 Enabled 19531 0 NO 16 Enabled 19531 0 NO FIGURE 66 Setting up broadcast storm protection Also shows how the threshold can be lowered for a Specific port Port Rate limiting for broadcast traffic Please tefer to the above section on broadcast storms List of commands in this chapter Syntax show port mirror display port mirror settings Syntax port mirror lt enter gt configure port mirror settings Syntax setport monitor lt monitor port number gt sniffer lt sniffer port number gt set port mirror settings
353. tocol or Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Syntax show active stp Display which version of STP is currently active Syntax show s ring show the status of S ring status and configuration Syntax s ring lt enable disable gt enable or disable S ring capabilities Syntax s ring learn start the learning process to discover the ring and the ports which make up the S ring Syntax s ring add port lt port1 port2 gt define ports which make up the S ring ports Note as discussed earlier you can create multiple s rings on a switch Syntax s ting del port lt portl port2 gt remove the switch from S ring topology by eliminating the end ports on the switch Syntax Ill lt enable disable gt enable or disable LLL on the switch Syntax Il add port lt port list range gt enable LLL on the list of specified ports Syntax Ill del port lt port list range gt disable LLL on the list of specified ports Syntax show Ill display the status of LLL Syntax tstp STP Configuration mode Syntax tstp lt enable disable gt Start Enable or stop Disable STP Syntax set stp type lt stp rstp gt set the spanning tree protocol to be IEEE 802 1d or 802 1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Syntax show active stp Display which version of STP is currently active Syntax show ts ring show the status of RS ring status and configuration Syntax ts ring lt enable disable gt enable or disable RS ring capabilities Syntax ts r
354. tory Syntax show history show the last 25 commands executed if less than 25 commands are executed only those commands executed are shown Syntax lt Up arrow gt every time the key is pressed the last command is printed on the screen but not executed This allows for editing errors made in typing Syntax lt Down arrow gt opposite of Up arrow key Syntax show version displays the version of MNS 6K being used Syntax set ftp mode lt normal passive gt set the fip mode of operation Syntax show ftp display the current ftp operation mode Syntax ping lt ipaddress gt count lt 1 999 gt timeout lt 1 256 gt use the ping command to test connectivity Syntax set prompt lt prompt string gt set the prompt for switch The prompt has predefined variables These are n System Name c System Contact l System Location i System IP m System MAC v Version Character r New Line b Space 256 APPENDIX APPENDIX 1 Command listing by Chapter A rich environment this Appendix provides a reference to the commands by chapter Chapter 2 Getting Started Syntax ipconfig ip lt ip address gt mask lt subnet mask gt dgw lt gateway gt zo set IP address on the switch Syntax save save changes made to the configuration Syntax reboot restart the switch same effect as physically turning off the power Syntax show setup show setup parameters Syntax show confi
355. tp parameters usually specified on Linux UNIX systems in etc boopttab Bootp Database Bootp keeps a record of systems supported in a database a simple text file On most systems the bootp service is not started as a default and has to be enabled A sample entry by which the bootp software will look up the database and update the IP address and subnet mask of the switch would be as follows M6k25switch ht ether ha 002006250065 ip 192 168 1 88 sm 255 255 255 0 gw 192 168 1 1 hn vm rfc1048 where M6k25switch is a user defined symbolic name for the switch 1 Note on Windows systems the location of the file will vary depending on which software is being used 36 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE ht is the hardware type For the Magnum 6K family of switches set this to ether for Ethernet This tag must precede the ha tag ha is the hardware address Use the switch s 12 digit MAC address ip is the IP address to be assigned to the switch sm is the subnet mask of the subnet in which the switch is installed Configuring Auto DHCP Bootp Manual By default the switch is configured for auto As describer earlier in Chapter 2 in the auto mode the switch will first look for a DHCP server If a DHCP server is not found it will then look for a BootP server If that server is not found the switch will first inspect to see if the IP address 192 168 1 2 with a netmask of 2
356. ture RS Ring requires RSTP to be configured across all switches and uses the underlying RSTP protocol to provide simplicity in configuration as well as rapid recovery in the RS Ring topology The recovery times for RS Ring based networks are within milliseconds While the recovery time for STP devices is in tens of seconds typically 30 seconds in most networks or sub second to a few seconds for RSTP networks RS Ring offers recovery times typically in less than 100 milliseconds The biggest advantage of RS Ring besides the fast recovery time is the defined topology which makes the network manageable RS Ring is configured on Magnum 6K family of switches and requires RSTP to be enabled on all switches participating in the RS Ring RS Ring cannot be used in a multi vendor environment RS Ring operates from specifically defined port pairs that participate in a ring topology Each of the two ends of a ring must be connected to two ports in a Magnum 6K Switch that is enabled with the RS Ring software The end points of the ring provide an alternate path to reach the switch that has failed Some items for using RS Ring are as follows 1 Faster recover times than S Ring or RSTP are needed by the network The RS Ring feature is a separately licensed module for the MNS 6K software package This module must be enabled by means of a software key 3 The same key can be used for either S Ring or RS Ring 151 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE 4
357. twork After the switch creates a dynamic VLAN GVRP can also be used to dynamically enable port membership in static VLANs configured on a switch There must be one common VLAN that is one common VID connecting all of the GVRP aware devices in the network to carry GVRP packets GarrettCom Inc recommends the default VLAN DEFAULT_VLAN VID 1 which is automatically enabled and 209 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE configured as untagged on every port of the Magnum 6K family of switches That is on ports used as GVRP links leave the default VLAN set to untagged and configure other static VLANs on the ports as either Tagged or Forbid Forbid is discussed later in this chapter GVRP Operations A GVRP enabled port with a Tagged or Untagged static VLAN sends advertisements BPDUs or Bridge Protocol Data Units advertising the VLAN identification VID Another GVRP aware port receiving the advertisements over a link can dynamically join the advertised VLAN All dynamic VLANs operate as Tagged VLANs Also a GVRP enabled port can forward an advertisement for a VLAN it learned about from other ports on the same switch However the forwarding port will not itself join that VLAN until an advertisement for that VLAN is received on that specific port Switch 1 Switch 2 Static VLAN GVRP On GVRP On configured end device NIC or switch with GVRP on FIGURE 121 GVRP operation see description below Switc
358. ty Port Magnum6K25 snmpv3 show trap id 1 Trap ID 1 Trap Type vi Host IP 10 21 1 100 Community Auth Type Magnum6K25 snmpv3 com2sec add id 1 secname public source default community public Entry is added successfully Magnum6K25 snmpv3 com2sec add id 2 ERROR secname parameter is required for add directive Magnum6K25 snmpv3 com2sec add id 2 secname BCM Entry is added successfully Magnum6K25 snmpv3 show com2sec ID Sec Name Source Community 1 public default public 2 BCM default public Z a 4 oe 5 a ee 6 7 8 9 an 10 Magnum6K25 snmpv3 show com2sec id 2 Com2SecID 2 Security Name BCM Source default Community public 227 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Magnum6K25 snmpv3 group add id 1 groupname v1 model v1 com2secid 1 Entry is added successfully Magnum6K25 snmpv3 show group ID Group Name Sec Model Com2Sec ID 1 v1 v1 1 2 public v2c 1 3 public usm 1 4 5 6 7 ee 8 9 10 ae Magnum6K25 snmpv3 show group id 1 Group ID 1 Group Name v1 Model ivi Com2Sec ID 1 Magnum6K25 snmpv3 view add id 1 viewname all type included subtree 1 Entry is added successfully Magnum6K25 snmpv3 show view ID View Name Type Subtree Mask 1 all included 1 ff 2 z eS Ss 3 z 4 zz z as 5 as 6 os 7 s ce 8 os a 9
359. uration through the serial console port A female female null modem cable This cable is available from GarrettCom Inc as well as from LAN store http www lanstore com Serial port if your PC does not have a serial port you may want to invest in a USB to serial converter This is again available from LAN store or from GarrettCom Inc Alternately a USB to serial cable can also be used This cable is also available from LAN store or GarrettCom Inc A PC or a workstation computer with a terminal emulation program such as HyperTerminal included with Windows or Teraterm pro minicom or other equivalent software Make sure the software supports Xmodem protocol as you may need this in the future to update the MNS 6K software Enough disk space to store and retrieve the configuration files as well as copy software files from GarrettCom We recommend at least 15MB of disk space for this purpose Decide on a manager level account name and password for access security IP address netmask default gateway for the switch being configured As a default the switch has no IP Internet Protocol address and subnet mask For first time use the IP address has to be assigned This can only be done by using the console interface provided 22 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE The same procedure can also be used for other configuration changes or updates e g changing the IP address VLAN assignments and more Once the IP address is assigned and a
360. user lt name gt service lt telnet web gt lt enable disable gt Where user lt name gt specifies the user id setvice lt telnet web gt specifies which service telnet or web the user has access to lt enable disable gt specifies whether the services are allowed or not allowed Magnum6K25 user Magnum6K25 user add user peter level 2 Enter User Password Confirm New Password Magnum6K25 user useraccess user peter service telnet disable Telnet Access Disabled FIGURE 11 Creating user access privileges After this command user Peter will not have telnet access to the switch User Peter only has console access or SWM access The user peter has to be added before this command can be successfully executed 30 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Help Typing the help command lists the commands you can execute at the current privilege level For example typing help at the Operator level shows Magnum6K25 gt help logout ping set terminal telnet walkmib Contextless Commands clear enable exit help show whoami alarm Magnum6K25 gt FIGURE 12 Help command Displaying Help for an Individual Command Help for any command that is available at the current context level can be viewed by typing help followed by enough of the command string to identify the command Syntax help lt command string gt For example to list the Help
361. vide PoE to the end devices as well as other advantages such as IGMP managed configuration and more To provide the managed reliability to the end devices dual homing can be used with MNS 6K devices Active link Standby Link FIGURE 94 Dual homing using Magnum 6K family of switches Note the end device video surveillance camera can be powered using PoE options on Magnum 6K family of switches In case of a connectivity break the connection switches to the standby path or standby link Because it takes advantage of Ethernet standards the dual homing redundancy features of the ESD42 as well as those for MNS 6K work with any brands or models of Ethernet 169 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE switches upstream With MNS 6K the user has to define the set of ports which make up the dual home ports Active link Standby Link FIGURE 95 Using S Ring RS Ring and dual homing it is possible to build networks resilient not only to a single link failure but also for one device failing on the network The following points should be remembered for setting up dual homing e Configure dual homing before connecting the Ethernet connectors cables in the switchs e Only one set of dual homing ports can be defined per switch e Port types Copper vs fiber as well as speeds can be mixed and matched both ports need not be identical e By default dual homing is turned off you have to enable it af
362. vlanid gt forbid lt port number list range gt sets the forbid GVRP capability on the ports specified set leave lt enable disable gt enables or disables the switch to immediately process a host sending a leave message rather that wait for the timer to expire setport monitor lt monitor port number gt sniffer lt sniffer port number gt Set port mirror settings set port port lt port list range gt mode lt auto forward block gt set the port characteristics for IGMP Block drops the unregistered mutticasts Forward forwards unregistered multicasts set port port lt number list range gt default id lt number gt sets the default VLAN id For Magnum 6K family of switches the default VLAN id is 1 unless changed using this command set port port lt number list range gt filter status lt enable disable gt enables or disables the VLAN filtering function set port port lt number list range gt join id lt number gt adds the specified port s to the specified VLAN id set port port lt number list range gt leave id lt number gt releases a specific port from a VLAN set port port lt number list range gt tagging id lt number gt status lt tagged untagged gt defines whether the outgoing packets from a port will be tagged or untagged 288 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES Command setport port lt num list range gt status lt enabl
363. with a specific character 32 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE OR Magnum6K25 gt se lt TAB gt password timeout vlan Magnum6K25 gt set FIGURE 17 Listing commands options note the command was not completed and the TAB key completed the command To exit from the CLI interface and terminate the console session use the logout command The logout command will prompt you to ensure that the logout was not mistakenly typed Syntax logout Magnum6K25 logout Logging out from the current session Y or N Y Connection to the host lost FIGURE 18 ogout command List of commands in this chapter Syntax ipconfig ip lt ip address gt mask lt subnet mask gt dgw lt gateway gt add del zo set IP address on the switch Syntax save save changes made to the configuration Syntax reboot restart the switch same effect as physically turning off the power Syntax show setup show setup parameters Syntax show config show setup parameters configured Syntax enable lt uset name gt changing the privilege level Syntax add uset lt name gt level lt number gt adding a user Syntax delete uset lt name gt deleting a user 33 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Syntax passwd user lt name gt changing a password for a user Syntax chlevel user lt name gt level lt number gt changing the user privilege level Syntax help lt command stri
364. with the IP address 192 168 10 99 on the switch A similar example using ftp would be similar to what is shown in Figure 16 except the command mode tftp will be replaced by mode ftp Make sure the username and password for the ftp user is known If not known use the user name anonymous with any password Enter the username and password when prompted by the ftp server Note if you are using MNS 6K version3 0 or lower it is best to use the FIP server without a password i e use the anonymous login Next steps Optional step Reload the saved configuration Update the boot code if needed This is described in step 4 317 UPDATING SOFTWARE STEP 4 Step 4 Optional Step Restoring the configuration Optionally restore back the original configuration and update the boot code t this optional step the original configuration has been saved MNS 6K image copied from the www gatrettcom com site and then onto the Magnum 6K switch and finally if required the configuration can be restored using the instructions in this step If the Magnum 6K switch is updated over the network it maybe necessary to update the boot code Accessing the switch Continue to use the access method defined in steps 1 2 and 3 Reloading the configuration The command used for restoring the original configuration is Syntax loadconf mode lt serial tftp ftp gt lt ipaddress gt file lt name gt Where mode is the mode b
365. wner lt string gt def comm lt string gt define the RMON statistics group and the community string associated with the group Syntax alarm def owner lt string gt def comm lt string gt define the RMON alarm group and the community string associated with the group Syntax event def owner lt string gt def comm lt string gt define the RMON event group and the community string associated with the group Syntax show rmon lt stats hist event alarm gt st the specific RMON data as defined by the group Hype Magnum6K25 rmon Magnum6K25 rmon event def owner test def comm somestring RMON Event Default Owner is set RMON Event Default Community is set Magnum6K25 rmon show rmon event RMON Event Default Owner test RMON Event Default Community somestring Magnum6K25 rmon exit Magnum6K25 FIGURE 129 Configuring RMON groups List of commands in this chapter Syntax snmp enter the SNMP Configuration mode 231 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE Syntax snmpv3 enter the SNMP V3 configuration mode note enable SNMP V3 by using the set snmp command which follows Syntax show active snmp shows the version of SNMP currently in use Syntax community write lt write community gt read lt read community gt trap lt trap community gt set the necessary community strings Syntax authtraps lt enable disable gt enables or disables authentication traps generation Synt
366. x set ftp mode lt normal passive gt set the fip mode of operation Syntax show ftp display the current fip operation mode FTP uses a set of separate ports for the data stream and command stream This causes problems in security conscious companies who prefer that the client initiate the file transfer as well as the stream for the commands To accommodate that ftp added the capability called passive ftp in which the client initiating the connection initiates both the data and command connection request Most companies prefer passive ftp and GarrettCom MNS 6K provides means to operate in those environments System Events The Event Log records operating events as single line entries listed in chronological order and therefore can be a useful tool for isolating problems Each Event Log entry is composed of four fields as shown below S Date Time Description S or Severity is one of the following I Information indicates routine events A Activity indicates the activity on Switch D Debug reserved for Magnum MNS 6K internal diagnostic information C Critical indicates that a severe Switch error has occurred F Fatal indicates that a service has behaved unexpectedly Date is the date in mm dd yy format as per configured that the entry was placed in the log Time is the time in hh mm ss format as per configured that the entry was placed in the log Description is a brief description of the event The event log holds up to 10
367. y lt security key gt activate the S Ring capabilities Don t forget to use the save command to save the Rey In the example below STP is used to show how S Ring is setup S Ring will also work with RSTP If RSTP is used GarrettCom Inc recommends using RS Ring instead Magnum6K25 authorize s ring key abc123456789 S RING Module Successfully Authorized Please Save Configuration Magnum6K25 save Saving current configuration Configuration saved Saving current event logs Event logs saved Magnum 6K25 reboot Proceed on rebooting the switch Y or N Y Do you wish to save current configuration Y or N Y Saving current configuration Configuration saved Rebooting now FIGURE 87 Activating S Ring on the switch Since S Ring uses RSTP STP STP has to be activated and enabled Please refer to the Chapter on Spanning Tree Protocol STP for more information Some of the commands are repeated here for clarity Using S Ring with multiple switches it is recommended to do the following 1 On the switch which is the root node authorize the use of S Ring software 2 On the switch which is the root node or where the top of the ring ports are configured enable STP 3 On the root node enable S Ring and add the necessary ports as S Ring ports 4 On all other switches except the root node disable STP 5 On all other switches except the root node enable LLL 159 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K
368. y which the configuration file will be accessed for upload serial ftp or tftp ipaddress is the IP address of the ftp or tftp server only used when mode ftp or tftp file name is the name of the configuration file At this stage follow the same process for uploading the files as described in step 3 The file that needs to be uploaded is the configuration file which was saved in step 2 as shown in Figure 7 or Figure 12 318 UPDATING SOFTWARE STEP 4 Updating boot code over the network As discussed in step 1 selecting the proper version with either upgrade path to Version 2 7 1B or to Version 3 0 the boot code will be updated At boot up time the Magnum 6K switch identifies that there is a new version of the boot code and asks if the new boot code should be loaded The new boot code is not loaded unless the user responds affirmatively to the question from the console port or serial connection If the Magnum 6K switch is upgraded over the network or remotely the boot code can be manually updated by using the upgrade command discussed below This allows the boot code to be updated without requiring access to serial port Syntax upgrade mode bl mode bl is a hidden option and is not visible using the help capabilities in MNS 6K This command can be executed by accessing the switch through the console port serial connection or through the network telnet to the switch Continue to use the network access method d
369. y with encrypt when encryption is enabled the secret shared key string must be supplied mgrlevel lt level gt and oprlevel lt level gt optional specifies the manager and operator level as defined on the TACACS server for the respective level of login This command works in the user configuration mode as well Note maximum of five TACACS servers Magnum6K25 show tacplus servers ID TACACS Server Port Encrypt Key 1 10 21 1 170 49 Enabled secret 2 Es 3 4 a 5 Magnum6K25 user To configure TACACS enter the user configuration mode Magnum6K25 user __ Check the status of TACACS authentication Magnum6K25 user show tacplus status Note this command was run in the user configuration mode TACACS Status Disabled Magnum6K25 user tacplus disable TACACS Tunneling is disabled Magnum6K25 user tacserver add id 2 ip 10 21 1 123 encrypt enable key some TACACS server is added Magnum6K25 user show tacplus servers 90 MAGNUM 6K SWITCHES MNS 6K USER GUIDE ID TACACS Server Port Encrypt Key 1 10 21 1 170 49 Enabled secret 2 10 21 1 123 49 Enabled some 3 z 4 5 Magnum6K25 user tacserver delete id 2 TACACS server is deleted Magnum6K25 user show tacplus servers ID TACACS Server Port Encrypt Key Magnum6K25 user tacplus enable TACACS is enabled Ma

GarrettCom Magnum MNS-6K User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents